B-1378(8)Pro/Lite User’s Manual
SmartAXIS FT1A Series

S AFETY P R ECAUTI ON S
 Read the SmartAXIS Pro/Lite User’s Manual to ensure correct operation before starting installation, wiring, operation, maintenance, andinspection of the SmartAXIS.
 All SmartAXIS modules are manufactured under IDEC’s rigorous quality control system, but users must add a backup or failsafe provision to thecontrol system when using the SmartAXIS in applications where heavy damage or personal injury may be caused, in case the SmartAXIS shouldfail.
 In this user’s manual, safety precautions are categorized in order of importance:

Warning

Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe personal injury or death.

 The SmartAXIS is not designed for use in medical equipment, nuclear power, railways, aviation, passenger vehicle equipment, or similar

applications requiring a high degree of reliability and safety. The SmartAXIS should not be used for such applications.
 When using the SmartAXIS in applications (not described above) that require a high degree of reliability in terms of functionality and precision,

appropriate measures such as failsafe mechanisms and redundant mechanisms must be taken for the system containing the SmartAXIS.
 Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the SmartAXIS.
 If relays or transistors in the SmartAXIS output circuits should fail, outputs may remain at on or off state. For output signals which may cause

serious accidents, configure monitor circuits outside the SmartAXIS.
 The SmartAXIS self-diagnostic function may detect internal circuit or program errors, stop programs, and turn outputs off. Configure circuits

so that the system containing the SmartAXIS is not jeopardized when outputs turn off.
 Turn off power to the SmartAXIS before installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the SmartAXIS. Failure to turn power off

may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard.
 Special expertise is required to install, wire, program, and operate the SmartAXIS. People without such expertise must not use the SmartAXIS.
 Install the SmartAXIS according to the instructions described in SmartAXIS Pro/Lite user's manual. Improper installation will result in falling,

failure, or malfunction of the SmartAXIS.

CautionCaution notices are used where inattention might cause personal injury or damage to equipment.

 The SmartAXIS is designed for installation in a cabinet. Do not install the SmartAXIS outside a cabinet.
 Install the SmartAXIS in environments described in the SmartAXIS Pro/Lite user's manual. If the SmartAXIS is used in places where theSmartAXIS is subjected to high-temperature, high-humidity, condensation, corrosive gases, excessive vibrations, or excessive shocks, thenelectrical shocks, fire hazard, or malfunction will result.
 The environment for using the SmartAXIS is “Pollution degree 2.” Use the SmartAXIS in environments of pollution degree 2 (according to IEC

60664-1).
 Prevent the SmartAXIS from falling while moving or transporting the SmartAXIS, otherwise damage or malfunction of the SmartAXIS will result.
 Wiring must use lead sizes that are appropriate for the applied voltage and current. Terminal screws must be tightened with the prescribedtightening torque.
 Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the SmartAXIS housing. Put a cover on the SmartAXIS modules during

installation and wiring. Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard, damage, or malfunction.
 Use a power supply of the rated value. Use of a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard.
 Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the power line outside the SmartAXIS. This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is

destined for Europe.
 Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the output circuit. This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is destined for Europe.
 Use an EU-approved circuit breaker. This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is destined for Europe.
 Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the SmartAXIS or when operating the SmartAXIS to force outputs on or off. Incorrect operationof the SmartAXIS may cause machine damage or accidents.
 Do not connect the ground wire directly to the SmartAXIS. Connect a protective ground to the cabinet containing the SmartAXIS using an M4 orlarger screw. This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is destined for Europe.
 Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the SmartAXIS modules.
 The SmartAXIS contains electronic parts and batteries. When disposing of the SmartAXIS, do so in accordance with national and local

regulations.

Preface-1

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL This product has a built-in battery. Please dispose of batteries correctly in accordance with each country or local regulation. The following

symbol is valid only in countries within the European Union. This symbol mark means that when disposing of batteries and storage batteries,
they must be disposed of separately from general garbage.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy
metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as follows:
Hg : Mercury (0.0005%)
Cd : Cadmium (0.002%)
Pb : Lead (0.004%)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Preface-2

A BOUT THI S M AN UALThis user’s manual describes functions, specifications, installation, and operation basics of the SmartAXIS. Also included isinformation on the powerful communications tools of the SmartAXIS, as well as troubleshooting procedures.

Chapter 1: General I nform ation

General information about the SmartAXIS, features, brief description on special functions, and various system setup configurations
for communication.

Chapter 2: P roduct Specifications

Specifications of SmartAXIS, optional adapters, and cartridges.

Chapter 3: I nstallation and W iring

Methods and precautions for installing and wiring the SmartAXIS.

Chapter 4: Operation Basics

General information about setting up the basic SmartAXIS system for programming, starting and stopping SmartAXIS operation, and simple
operating procedures. Everything from creating a user program using WindLDR on a computer to monitoring the SmartAXIS operation.

Chapter 5: Special Functions

Stop/reset inputs, run/stop selection at memory backup error, and keep designation. Also included are high-speed counter,
frequency measurement, catch input, interrupt input, timer interrupt, input filter, user program protection, daylight savings time,
network settings, and many more special functions.

Chapter 6: HM I Function

HMI function on the SmartAXIS Pro by using the LCD and operation buttons on the SmartAXIS.

Chapter 7: Device Addresses

Device addresses available for the SmartAXIS to program basic and advanced instructions. Special internal relays and special dataregisters are also described.

Chapter 8: I nstructions R eference

List of basic and advanced instructions to program the SmartAXIS.

Chapter 9 through Chapter 11: M aintenance Com m unication, User Com m unication I nstructions, M odbus
Com m unication
Various communication functions such as user communication and Modbus communication.

Chapter 12: R em ote I / O

Remote I/O communication to increase the number of inputs and outputs by connecting other SmartAXIS as remote I/O slaves over Ethernet.

Chapter 13: Script

Programming complicated processing with script language using conditional branching, logical operations, arithmetic operations, and functions.

Chapter 14: Troubleshooting

Procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble occurs while operating the SmartAXIS.

Appendix

Additional information about type numbers, and system software upgrade.

I ndexAlphabetical listing of key words.

Publication history
March 2013
August 2013
October 2013
December 2013
August 2014
May 2019
December 2019
November 2021
July 2024

First Edition
Second Edition
Third Edition
Fourth Edition
Fifth Edition
Sixth Edition
Seventh Edition
Eighth Edition
Ninth Edition

Trademarks

SmartAXIS is a trademark of IDEC Corporation.

Preface-3

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Regarding laws and compatible standards

This product adheres to the laws and compatible standards of all countries involved, as shown below.
European laws and standards
This product complies with the following EU directives.


Low Voltage Directive
EMC Directive
RoHS Directive

To comply with these directives, this product has been designed and evaluated on the basis of the following international andEuropean standard.


IEC/EN 61131-2: 2007 (excluding the Lite digital I/O status indicators)
EN IEC 63000

For details on the compatible standards and EU Directives, contact the distributor from which you purchased this product or visit our web site.
North America laws and standards
This product complies with the following standards.
 UL508
 CSA C22.2 No.142

 ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 (Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D)*1

 CAN/CSA C22.2 No.213 (Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D)*1

*1 These products with the following hardware versions comply with Class I, Division 2, Group C, D.
FT1A-H12RC (V200 and later), FT1A-H12RA (V200 and later), FT1A-B12RA (V200 and later)
FT1A-H24RC (V300 and later), FT1A-H24RA (V300 and later), FT1A-B24RA (V300 and later)

Marine standards
This product is certified by the following classification societies. (FT1A Version V130 or later, system software version V2.10 orlater)- ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)- DNV (Det Norske Veritas)- LR (Lloyd's Register)- NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

 To use this product as a marine certified product, wrap the power supply cable (excluding the earth wire) and the Ethernet communication cableconnected to the SmartAXIS around a ferrite core (TDK ZCAT3035-1330) twice.
 Wrap cables connected to the communication cartridge around a ferrite core (TDK ZCAT1730-0730) twice.
 This product is not certified for use on the bridge and deck.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Under no circumstances shall IDEC Corporation be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting fromthe use of or the application of IDEC PLC components, individually or in combination with other equipment.
All persons using these components must be willing to accept responsibility for choosing the correct component to suit theirapplication and for choosing an application appropriate for the component, individually or in combination with other equipment.
All diagrams and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only. In no way does including these diagrams andexamples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application. To test and approve all
programs, prior to installation, is the responsibility of the end user.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Preface-4

R ELATED M AN UALS

The following manuals related to the SmartAXIS are available. Refer to them in conjunction with this manual.
Manual Name

Description

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite
User’s Manual (this manual)

Describes product specifications, installation and wiring instructions, instructions for basic programming
operations and special functions, device and instruction lists, communication functions, andtroubleshooting procedures for the SmartAXIS Pro/Lite series.

SmartAXIS
Ladder Programming Manual

Describes basic operations for ladder programming, instructions for monitoring ladders on the SmartAXIS,
available devices and instruction lists, and details of each instruction.

SmartAXISFBD Programming Manual

Describes basic operations for function block programming, available devices and function block lists, anddetails of each function block.

SmartAXIS Touch
User’s Manual

Describes product specifications, installation and wiring instructions, instructions for setting basic
programming actions and special functions, device and instruction lists, communication functions, andtroubleshooting procedures for the Touch series.

Preface-5

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUALN AM ES AN D A BBR EVI ATI ON S U SED I N THI S M AN UAL
Model Names

Name Used in this Manual

Description (Detailed Type No.)

SmartAXIS

Name for the FT1A programmable logic controllers.

SmartAXIS Lite

Modules without LCD.
(FT1A-B12RA, FT1A-B12RC, FT1A-B24RA, FT1A-B24RC, FT1A-B40RKA, FT1A-B40RSA, FT1A-B40RC,
FT1A-B48KA, FT1A-B48SA, FT1A-B48KC, FT1A-B48SC)

SmartAXIS Pro

Modules with LCD.
(FT1A-H12RA, FT1A-H12RC, FT1A-H24RA, FT1A-H24RC, FT1A-H40RKA, FT1A-H40RSA, FT1A-H40RC,
FT1A-H48KA, FT1A-H48SA, FT1A-H48KC, FT1A-H48SC)

SmartAXIS Touch

Modules that extend the functionality of display.
(FT1A-M12RA-W, FT1A-M12RA-B, FT1A-M12RA-S, FT1A-C12RA-W, FT1A-C12RA-B, FT1A-C12RA-S,
FT1A-M14KA-W, FT1A-M14KA-B, FT1A-M14KA-S, FT1A-M14SA-W, FT1A-M14SA-B, FT1A-M14SA-S,
FT1A-C14KA-W, FT1A-C14KA-B, FT1A-C14KA-S, FT1A-C14SA-W, FT1A-C14SA-B, FT1A-C14SA-S)

12-I/O type

SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 12 I/O points.
(FT1A-B12RA, FT1A-B12RC, FT1A-H12RA, FT1A-H12RC)

24-I/O type

SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 24 I/O points.
(FT1A-B24RA, FT1A-B24RC, FT1A-H24RA, FT1A-H24RC)

40-I/O type

SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 40 I/O points.
(FT1A-B40RKA, FT1A-B40RSA, FT1A-B40RC, FT1A-H40RKA, FT1A-H40RSA, FT1A-H40RC)

48-I/O type

SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 48 I/O points.
(FT1A-B48KA, FT1A-B48SA, FT1A-B48KC, FT1A-B48SC, FT1A-H48KA, FT1A-H48SA, FT1A-H48KC,
FT1A-H48SC)

AC power type

SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with an AC power supply.
(FT1A-B12RC, FT1A-H12RC, FT1A-B24RC, FT1A-H24RC, FT1A-B40RC, FT1A-H40RC, FT1A-B48KC,
FT1A-B48SC, FT1A-H48KC, FT1A-H48SC)

DC power type

SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with a DC power supply.
(FT1A-B12RA, FT1A-H12RA, FT1A-B24RA, FT1A-H24RA, FT1A-B40RKA, FT1A-H40RKA,
FT1A-B40RSA, FT1A-H40RSA, FT1A-B48KA, FT1A-B48SA, FT1A-H48KA, FT1A-H48SA)

Abbreviations
Abbreviation

Meaning

FBD

Function block diagram

FB

Function block
For example, the AND (logical AND) function block is written as AND FB.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Preface-6

TABLE OF C ON TEN TS

C HAP TER 1:C HAP TER 2:

C HAP TER 3:

C HAP TER 4:

C HAP TER 5:

Safety Precautions............................................................................................................................. Preface-1
About This Manual............................................................................................................................. Preface-3
Related Manuals................................................................................................................................ Preface-5
Names and Abbreviations Used in this Manual ..................................................................................... Preface-6

General I nform ation

About the SmartAXIS................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Features ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Special Functions......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Communication Functions ............................................................................................................................ 1-6
Maintenance Communication........................................................................................................................ 1-7
User Communication.................................................................................................................................... 1-8
Modbus Communication............................................................................................................................... 1-8
Remote I/O................................................................................................................................................. 1-9
Ethernet Communication.............................................................................................................................. 1-9
Operator Interface Connectivity .................................................................................................................. 1-10

Product Specifications

Parts Description ......................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Communication Cartridge........................................................................................................................... 2-24
Memory Cartridge...................................................................................................................................... 2-26
Ethernet Port ............................................................................................................................................ 2-28
SD Memory Card ....................................................................................................................................... 2-29
Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................... 2-31

I nstallation and W iring

Installation Location .................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Mounting Space .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Mounting on DIN Rail .................................................................................................................................. 3-3
Removing from DIN Rail .............................................................................................................................. 3-3
Direct Mounting on Panel Surface ................................................................................................................. 3-4
Input/Output Wiring .................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................ 3-12
Terminal Connection.................................................................................................................................. 3-14
Securing the Panel Attachment USB Extension Cable.................................................................................... 3-16

Operation Basics

Start WindLDR ............................................................................................................................................ 4-1
PLC Selection .............................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Create Program ........................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Convert Program ....................................................................................................................................... 4-12
Protect Project .......................................................................................................................................... 4-13
Save Project.............................................................................................................................................. 4-13
Simulate Operation.................................................................................................................................... 4-14
Download Program .................................................................................................................................... 4-16
Monitor Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Exit WindLDR ............................................................................................................................................ 4-18
Start/Stop Operation.................................................................................................................................. 4-19

Special Functions

Function Area Settings ................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Stop Input and Reset Input.......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error.................................................................................................. 5-5
Run/Stop Selection at Power Up ................................................................................................................... 5-6
Keep Designation for Internal Relays, Shift Registers, Counters, and Data Registers......................................... 5-7
Data Register ROM Backup .......................................................................................................................... 5-9
High-Speed Counter .................................................................................................................................. 5-13
Catch Input............................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Interrupt Input.......................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Frequency Measurement ............................................................................................................................ 5-36
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Preface-7

TABLE OF C ON TEN TS
Input Filter................................................................................................................................................ 5-38
Analog Input ............................................................................................................................................. 5-39
Timer Interrupt ......................................................................................................................................... 5-41
Forced I/O function ................................................................................................................................... 5-43
Communication Ports................................................................................................................................. 5-46
Memory Cartridge...................................................................................................................................... 5-49
SD Memory Card ....................................................................................................................................... 5-52
Backlight ON Time..................................................................................................................................... 5-57
Monitoring Ladder Program ........................................................................................................................ 5-58
Message Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 5-60
32-bit Data Storage Setting ........................................................................................................................ 5-62
User Program Protection ............................................................................................................................ 5-64
Watchdog Timer Setting ............................................................................................................................ 5-67
Constant Scan Time................................................................................................................................... 5-68
Daylight Savings Time ............................................................................................................................... 5-69
Clock Function........................................................................................................................................... 5-70
Network Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 5-73
Connection Settings................................................................................................................................... 5-74
Remote Host List ....................................................................................................................................... 5-76

C HAP TER 6:

C HAP TER 7:
C HAP TER 8:
C HAP TER 9:
C HAP TER 10:

HM I Function

About the Menu Screen................................................................................................................................ 6-2
Basic Operations ......................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Switching to the System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 6-6
Switching run/stop ...................................................................................................................................... 6-7
SmartAXIS Environment Settings .................................................................................................................. 6-8
Monitoring the SmartAXIS .......................................................................................................................... 6-15
Checking/Clearing Error Information ........................................................................................................... 6-20
Uploading/Downloading the User Program .................................................................................................. 6-22
Displaying Arbitrary Messages .................................................................................................................... 6-24
Maintaining the SD Memory Card................................................................................................................ 6-25
Entering a Password .................................................................................................................................. 6-27
System Menu Hierarchy Diagram ................................................................................................................ 6-28

Device Addresses

Device Addresses ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1
Special Internal Relays................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Special Data Registers ................................................................................................................................. 7-8

I nstructions/ Function Blocks R eference

Ladder Program Instructions List .................................................................................................................. 8-1
Advanced Instruction List ............................................................................................................................. 8-3
Advanced Instruction Applicable SmartAXIS .................................................................................................. 8-6
FB List ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-9

M aintenance Com m unication

Maintenance Communication via USB Port..................................................................................................... 9-2
Maintenance Communication via Expansion Communication Port .................................................................... 9-3
Maintenance Communication via Ethernet Port .............................................................................................. 9-5

User Com m unication I nstructions

User Communication via Serial Communication............................................................................................ 10-1
User Communication Overview ................................................................................................................... 10-1
User Communication Mode Specifications .................................................................................................... 10-1
RS232C User Communication System Setup ................................................................................................ 10-2
RS485 User Communication System Setup .................................................................................................. 10-3
Programming WindLDR.............................................................................................................................. 10-4
RS232C Line Control Signals..................................................................................................................... 10-11
User Communication via Ethernet Communication ..................................................................................... 10-14
Ethernet User Communication Overview.................................................................................................... 10-14
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Preface-8

TABLE OF C ON TEN TS

C HAP TER 11:

C HAP TER 12:
C HAP TER 13:

C HAP TER 14:

A P P ENDI X

Preface-9

User Communication Client .......................................................................................................................10-16
User Communication Server......................................................................................................................10-19
Programming WindLDR (User Communication Server) ................................................................................10-20
User Communication Error ........................................................................................................................10-22
ASCII Character Code Table .....................................................................................................................10-23
Sample Program – User Communication TXD .............................................................................................10-24
Sample Program – User Communication RXD .............................................................................................10-26

M odbus Com m unication

Modbus Communication via RS-232C/RS-485 ...............................................................................................11-1
Modbus Master Communication...................................................................................................................11-2
Modbus Slave Communication.....................................................................................................................11-8
Communication Format ............................................................................................................................11-12
Modbus Communication via Ethernet Communication .................................................................................11-18
Modbus TCP Client ...................................................................................................................................11-19
Modbus TCP Server..................................................................................................................................11-24

R em ote I / O

Remote I/O Master ....................................................................................................................................12-2
Remote I/O Slave ......................................................................................................................................12-8

Scripts

Script Programming and Management .........................................................................................................13-3
Programming Scripts ................................................................................................................................13-10
Script Programming Examples...................................................................................................................13-16
Important Notes ......................................................................................................................................13-35
About the Priority of the Operator .............................................................................................................13-35

Troubleshooting

Reading Error Data ....................................................................................................................................14-1
Special Data Registers for Error Information ................................................................................................14-3
General Error Codes ...................................................................................................................................14-3
SmartAXIS Operating Status, Output, and ERR LED during Errors..................................................................14-4
Error Causes and Actions............................................................................................................................14-4
User Program Execution Error .....................................................................................................................14-6
Troubleshooting Diagrams ..........................................................................................................................14-7

System Software......................................................................................................................................... A-1
Cables........................................................................................................................................................ A-5
HMI Screen Transition Diagram.................................................................................................................... A-8
Type List .................................................................................................................................................. A-12
Fonts ....................................................................................................................................................... A-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
I ntroduction
This chapter describes SmartAXIS functions and system configuration examples. The SmartAXIS is available in three types: theSmartAXIS Lite, the SmartAXIS Pro, and the SmartAXIS Touch. The SmartAXIS Lite is equipped with the same various control andcommunication functions as a PLC. In addition to the functions of the SmartAXIS Lite, the SmartAXIS Pro is equipped with an LCD
and operation buttons on the front of the module. The SmartAXIS Touch is equipped with the HMI functions of an operator
interface and PLC control functions.
This document describes the SmartAXIS Lite and Pro. Unless otherwise specified, SmartAXIS refers to the SmartAXIS Lite and Pro.
For the SmartAXIS Touch, refer to the SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual.

About the SmartAXISThe SmartAXIS is a small-size programmable controller that is fully equipped with powerful functions and various communication
functions.
You can select the type of SmartAXIS best-suited for your applications, in such ways as the inclusion of the display function, thetype of power supply, and the number of inputs and outputs.
The SmartAXIS Lite is equipped with basic functions. The SmartAXIS Pro adds to the functionality of the SmartAXIS Lite and isequipped with an LCD and operation buttons on the module, enabling independent monitor and operation functions.
The SmartAXIS supports 100 to 240V AC and 24V DC power supplies. SmartAXIS with Ethernet port (24-, 40-, 48-I/O types) can
expand the number of inputs and outputs for a maximum of 90 inputs and a maximum of 54 outputs using the remote I/Ofunction.
User programs can be created using WindLDR, the PLC programming software.
The SmartAXIS supports ladder programs and function block programs. Ladder programs for FT1A are compatible with other IDEC
PLCs including MicroSmart and MicroSmart Pentra, so you can make use of existing software assets.
Type Numbers
The notation for SmartAXIS part numbers is as follows.

FT1A - H 12 R A
Power supply type

A: DC power type (24V DC)
C: AC power type (100 to 240V AC)

Output type

R: Relay output
RK: Relay output/transistor sink output
RS: Relay output/transistor source output
K: Transistor sink output
S: Transistor source output

Inputs/outputs

1 2: 1 2 I / O p o i n t s
24: 24 I/O points
40: 40 I/O points
48: 48 I/O points

H: With LCD and operation buttons

B: Without LCD and operation buttons

FT1A: Type number
Note: For the input specifications, see "Input Specifications (AC Power Type)" on page 2-8 to "Input Specifications (DC Power Type)" on page 2-10.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

1-1

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Type List
Type Number

Power Supply

FT1A-H12RA

24V DCFT1A-H12RC

100 to 240V AC

FT1A-B12RA

24V DCFT1A-B12RC

100 to 240V AC

FT1A-H24RA

24V DCFT1A-H24RC

100 to 240V AC

FT1A-B24RA

24V DCFT1A-B24RC

100 to 240V AC

FT1A-H40RKA
FT1A-H40RSA
FT1A-H40RC
FT1A-B40RKA
FT1A-B40RSA
FT1A-B40RC
FT1A-H48KA
FT1A-H48SAFT1A-H48KC
FT1A-H48SC
FT1A-B48KA
FT1A-B48SA
FT1A-B48KC
FT1A-B48SC

Inputs and
Outputs(In/Out)

LCD,
Operation
Buttons

ExpansionCommunication
Port

Ethernet
Port

—

—

SD Memory
Card slot

Yes
12 (8/4)
—
—
Yes

Yes
1 port24 (16/8)—

24V DC
100 to 240V AC

USB Port

Yes
Yes

40 (24/16)

24V DC—Yes

100 to 240V AC
24V DCYes

Yes
2 ports

100 to 240V AC
48 (30/18)
24V DC—
100 to 240V AC

Options

1-2

RS232C Communication Cartridge

RS485 Communication Cartridge

RS485 Communication Cartridge

FT1A-PC1 (Mini-DIN type)

FT1A-PC2 (Mini-DIN type)

FT1A-PC3 (Terminal block type)

Memory Cartridge

SD Memory Card (2GB)

FT1A-PM1

HG9Z-XMS2

USB Maintenance Cable

Panel Mount USB Extension Cable

HG9Z-XCM42

HG9Z-XCE21

S M AR TAXI S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

Yes

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
FeaturesThis section describes the features of the SmartAXIS.
The SmartAXIS is high-performance programmable controller in a compact package and is equipped with high speed counters thatcan be used for positioning control. The SmartAXIS enables you to build optimum systems to automate factories or control
production lines.
Powerful HMI Functions
The SmartAXIS Pro is equipped with an LCD on the front of the module, enabling you to monitor the device values and the ladderprogram. Customized messages can be programmed to display current time, bar charts, scrolling messages, or simple text on the
LCD. The operation buttons on the module are used for operations with LCD such as checking and modifying device values.
Powerful Communication Functions
The SmartAXIS supports various communications such as maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus
communication, and remote I/O.
The SmartAXIS is equipped with RS232C (optional), RS485 (optional), an Ethernet port, and a USB port, and can be connected tovarious devices such as computers, operator interfaces, and printers.
RS232C Communication Cartridge

RS485 Communication Cartridge

RS485 Communication Cartridge

FT1A-PC1 (Mini-DIN type)

FT1A-PC2 (Mini-DIN type)

FT1A-PC3 (Terminal block type)

Memory Cartridge
A user program of SmartAXIS can be stored in a memory cartridge (FT1A-PM1). When a memory cartridge is inserted into a
SmartAXIS, the user program in the memory cartridge is executed instead of the user program in the SmartAXIS. You can also
download the user program in a memory cartridge to the SmartAXIS.
Memory Cartridge
FT1A-PM1

SD Memory Card
The 40- and 48-I/O types are equipped with an SD memory card slot. The log data of device values can be saved to an optional SD
memory card (HG9Z-XMS2) or a commercially available SD memory card (32 GB maximum).
32-bit and Floating Point Data Types
Some advanced instructions can select 32-bit data types from D (double word), L (long), and F (float) in addition to W (word) andI (integer).
Safety and High-Quality Compliant with International Standards
The SmartAXIS is compliant with international standards and can be used all over the world while maintaining safety and highquality.
Supports 9 Languages
The SmartAXIS LCD supports the display of the following nine languages:
Setting Name

Character Set

Supported Languages

European

ISO 8859-1 (Latin-1)

English, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch (Note), French (Note)

Japanese

Shift-JIS

Japanese (level 1)

Chinese

GB2312Chinese (simplified)Cyrillic

ANSI 1251

RussianNote: Some of the characters cannot be input.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

1-3

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Special Functions
This section describes the functions of the SmartAXIS.

I/O Related Functions
Catch Input
The catch input receives short input pulses from sensors without regard to the scan time. A maximum of 6 catch inputs can be
used.
Input Filter
The input filter can be adjusted, according to the width of input signals, to reject input noises. Selectable input filter values to pass
input signals are 0ms, and 3 through 15ms in 1ms increments. The input filter rejects inputs shorter than the selected input filter
value minus 2ms. This function is useful for eliminating input noises and bounce in limit switches.
Interrupt Input
The interrupt input can be used to call an interrupt program to respond to an external input that requires a response faster than
the scan time. A maximum of six interrupt inputs can be used. This can only be used when ladder program is selected as the
programming language.
Stop and Reset Inputs
Stop input is a function to stop SmartAXIS operation. Reset input is a function to stop SmartAXIS operation and clear device
values. Any input terminal on the SmartAXIS can be designated as a stop or reset input to control the SmartAXIS operation.
Remote I/O
When the number of SmartAXIS inputs and outputs is insufficient, the number of inputs and outputs can be expanded to a
maximum of 192 points by connecting additional SmartAXIS as remote I/O slaves over Ethernet. With the remote I/O function, theanalog inputs on the SmartAXIS that are connected as remote I/O slaves can also be used.
Analog Input
Analog input of 0 to 10V DC can be converted to a digital value of 0 to 1000. A maximum of eight inputs can be used as analog
inputs (not including remote I/O slaves analog inputs).
Forced I/O
The inputs and outputs of the SmartAXIS can be forced on or off. This function can be used to check the I/O wiring or the user
program operation.

Pulse I/O Functions
High-speed Counter
This function counts high-speed pulse inputs that cannot be measured in normal user program processing.
Use this function for applications such as positioning control with a rotary encoder or motor control. The SmartAXIS can use singlephase high-speed counters and two-phase high-speed counters. A maximum of six single-phase high-speed counters and amaximum of two two-phase high-speed counters can be used simultaneously.
Example: Controlling a motor by counting two-phase pulse input with a high-speed counter

Pulse motor
Rotaryencoder

High-speed pulse input

Two-phase pulses

SmartAXIS

1-4

S M AR TAXI S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Positioning Control
The SmartAXIS can perform positioning control with pulse outputs. The SmartAXIS features the PULS instructions that cangenerate pulse outputs with configured frequency at the fixed pulse width ratio, pulse-width modulation (PWM) instructions thatcan generate pulse outputs with configured pulse width ratio at a fixed frequency, RAMP instructions for trapezoidal control, ZRN
instructions for zero return operation, and ARAMP instructions that can generate pulse outputs according to a table in which thechanges of the frequency are configured.
Example: Pulse output by the RAMP instruction
Steady pulse frequency

Initial pulse frequency

Frequency Measurement
This function measures the frequency of pulses input to an input terminal. The frequencies of a maximum of six inputs can bemeasured.

Convenient Functions
Calendar/Clock
The SmartAXIS features a real-time clock on-board. Using the calendar and clock function, the SmartAXIS can operate according
to the current date and time. These functions can be used to control a time schedule for lighting or air conditioning equipments.
User Program Read/Write Protection
The user program in the SmartAXIS can be protected against reading and/or writing by including a password in the user program.
This function is effective for security of user programs.
“Keep” or “Clear” Designation of SmartAXIS Data
Internal relays, shift register bits, counter current values, and data register values can be designated to be kept or cleared when
the SmartAXIS is powered down. All or a specified range of these devices can be designated as keep or clear types.
RUN/STOP Selection at Startup when “Keep” Data is Lost
When the backup battery is dead, all data to be kept are lost. The user can select whether the SmartAXIS starts to run or not toprevent undesirable operation at the startup.
Log Data
Device values of the SmartAXIS can be saved as CSV files on the SD memory card. The DLOG instruction saves device values to
the SD memory card. The TRACE instruction accumulates device values at each scan and saves them to the SD memory card at
the desired timing.
Constant Scan TimeThe variations in scan time that occur when the user program is running can be made constant.
Timer Interrupt
The timer interrupt can be used to call an interrupt program at a predetermined interval of time without being affected by the scantime. This can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

1-5

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Communication Functions
The SmartAXIS features a variety of communication functions.
RS232C and RS485 communication of SmartAXIS is possible by installing the RS232C or RS485 communication cartridges into the
expansion communication ports on the SmartAXIS module. The 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types also feature an Ethernet port asstandard, enabling communication over Ethernet.
Communication Functions
Maintenance Communication(Chapter 9)

Maintenance communication enables you to check the operating status and I/O status of the SmartAXIS,
monitor and change device values, and download and upload user programs using a computer or
operator interface.

User Communication(Chapter 10)

The SmartAXIS can communicate with external devices equipped with RS232C, RS485, or Ethernet ports
using user communication. This can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming
language.

Modbus Communication(Chapter 11)

The SmartAXIS can send and receive data with Modbus compliant devices on RS232C, RS485, or the
Ethernet port.

For details on the communications functions, refer to the chapter for each function.
Communication Ports
USB Port

Maintenance communication can be performed by connecting the SmartAXIS and a computer with USB.

Ethernet Port

The SmartAXIS can communicate with Ethernet devices such as computers and operator interfaces.
Maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus communication, and remote I/O are possible.

Expansion Communication
Ports

Maintenance communication, user communication, and Modbus RTU communication are possible.

Expansion Communication Ports
The SmartAXIS can perform RS232C/RS485 communication by installing RS232C or RS485 communication cartridges to the
expansion communication ports on the SmartAXIS. The expansion communication ports are available on 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O
types.
Example: 40-I/O type

Expansion communication ports

1-6

S M AR TAXI S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Maintenance Communication
The maintenance communication of the SmartAXIS enables you to check the operating status and I/O status of the SmartAXIS,
monitor and change device values, and download and upload user programs with the PLC programming software WindLDR
installed on a computer. For details on maintenance communication, see "Maintenance Communication" on page 9-1.
Supported ports: USB port, Ethernet port, and expansion communication ports
 1:1 Maintenance Communication System

This example shows a 1:1 maintenance communication system in which a SmartAXIS and a computer are connected with USB.
The USB maintenance cable (HG9Z-XCM42) is used.
SmartAXIS

Windows computer
USB port

USB maintenance cableMini-B plug

Type A plug

USB port(USB 2.0 Mini-B connector)

 1:N Maintenance Communication System

This example shows a 1:N maintenance communication system in which three SmartAXIS and a computer are connected over
Ethernet. The Ethernet cables are connected to the Ethernet ports of three SmartAXIS, and those SmartAXIS are connected to thecomputer via an Ethernet hub.

Windows computer

Ethernet hub

Ethernet port

Ethernet port

Ethernet port

SmartAXIS

SmartAXIS

SmartAXISS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

1-7

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
User Communication
The user communication of the SmartAXIS enables you to control external devices such as computers, printers, and barcode
readers. For details on user communication, see "User Communication Instructions" on page 10-1.
Supported ports: Ethernet port and expansion communication ports
 User Communication on RS232C

This example shows a system in which a SmartAXIS receives the data read by a barcode reader. The RS232C communication
cartridge (FT1A-PC1) is installed in a SmartAXIS expansion communication port, and then the barcode reader is connected to theRS232C port.
SmartAXIS

Expansion communication
port
RS232C communication
cartridge (FT1A-PC1)

Barcode reader

Modbus Communication
The SmartAXIS is compliant with Modbus protocol and can be used as either a Modbus communication master or slave. Whenused as a Modbus master, the SmartAXIS can monitor and modify the data of Modbus compliant devices, such as inverters andtemperature controllers, using Modbus communication.
For details on Modbus communication, see "Modbus Communication" on page 11-1.
Supported ports: Ethernet port and expansion communication ports
 Modbus Communication on RS485

This example shows a system in which a SmartAXIS is communicating with a temperature controller and an inverter that support
Modbus RTU. The RS485 communication cartridge (FT1A-PC3) is installed in an expansion communication port on the SmartAXIS.
Temperature controller

SmartAXIS
Expansioncommunication
port
RS485 communication
cartridge(FT1A-PC3)

INVERTER

Inverter

RUN
RVS
ALM
COM

Shielded twisted-pair cable

1-8

S M AR TAXI S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Remote I/O
The remote I/O of the SmartAXIS enables you to expand the number of inputs and outputs by connecting separate SmartAXIS
modules over Ethernet as remote I/O slaves when you run out of inputs and outputs. The SmartAXIS remote I/O master can use
the digital inputs and outputs and analog inputs on the remote I/O slaves.
This function can be used on the Ethernet port only. Remote I/O cannot be used with the expansion communication ports (RS232C
and RS485).
 Remote I/O System Example

A SmartAXIS is connected to an Ethernet network as a remote I/O master. Two other SmartAXIS are used as remote I/O slaves.
Up to a maximum of 3 SmartAXIS can be connected to a remote I/O master as remote I/O slaves.
Ethernet hub

Master

Slave

Slave

48-I/O type

48-I/O type

48-I/O type

48-I/O type (master) + 48-I/O type (slave)+ 48-I/O type (slave)(30 inputs, 18 outputs)+ (30 inputs, 18 outputs) + (30 inputs, 18 outputs)= 90 inputs, 54 outputs

Ethernet Communication
The SmartAXIS can be connected to the Ethernet network via Ethernet port and communicate with network devices over Ethernet.
The SmartAXIS has three TCP/IP connections that can be used for Ethernet communication functions. Each of these connections
can simultaneously be used for a different communication protocol. Each connection can be configured for maintenancecommunication, user communication, Modbus TCP, or remote I/O master.
 Ethernet Communication Example

This example shows a system in which a SmartAXIS communicates with another SmartAXIS, an operator interface, and acomputer simultaneously over Ethernet. Among the three connections the SmartAXIS has, Connection 1 is configured as
maintenance communication for the computer to communicate with the SmartAXIS. Connection 2 is configured as Modbus TCP
server for the operator interface to communicate with the SmartAXIS. Connection 3 is configured as the remote I/O master tocommunicate with another SmartAXIS.
Ethernet
Ethernet Hub

SmartAXIS

Ethernet port

Ethernet Hub

SmartAXIS

Operator interface

Windows computer

Notes:
 When accessing the SmartAXIS over the Internet, adequate safety measures are required. Be sure to consult your network administrator orInternet service provider. IDEC bears no responsibility for damages or problems caused due to security in Ethernet communication.
 Restrict the access to SmartAXIS with IP addresses and ports by using appropriate measures such as the firewall.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

1-9

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Operator Interface Connectivity
The SmartAXIS can perform maintenance communication with IDEC operator interfaces using the Ethernet port and expansion
communication ports. Device values of the SmartAXIS can be monitored and modified with the connected operator interface. An
Ethernet cable or an O/I communication cable (see Note) is used to connect the SmartAXIS and the operator interface.
For details on communication settings, refer to the operator interface manuals.
SmartAXIS
Expansion communication ports
RS232C communication cartridge(FT1A-PC1)
RS485 communication cartridge(FT1A-PC3)

Operator interface

O/I communication cable
For RS232C: FC4A-KC1C/FC4A-KC2C
For RS485: FC2A-KP1C (open end at operator interface side)

Note: For details on O/I communication cables, see "Cables" on page A-5.

1-10

S M AR TAXI S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL FT9Y-B1378

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
I ntroduction
This chapter describes part names and specifications of the SmartAXIS.
SmartAXIS is available in 12-, 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types. The 12-I/O type has 8 input and 4 output terminals, the 24-I/O type has
16 input and 8 output terminals, the 40-I/O type has 24 input and 16 output terminals, and the 48-I/O type has 30 input and 18
output terminals. The 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types have 1 or 2 port connectors to install an optional RS232C or RS485
communication cartridge for maintenance communication, user communication, or Modbus RTU communication. The 24-, 40-, and48-I/O types have built-in Ethernet port for maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus TCP, or Remote I/O. The
40- and 48-I/O types have SD memory card slot to install an SD memory card for logging the device data. Every type of SmartAXIS
has a cartridge connector to install an optional memory cartridge.

Parts Description
SmartAXIS Pro

Example: FT1A-H48KA(1) Power Supply Terminals(2) Input Terminals(3) Ethernet Port

(4) Ethernet Status LED [Ethernet](5) SD Memory Card Status LED[SD Access](17) Sensor Power Terminals(14) LCD(13) Operation Buttons(7) Expansion Communication Port (Port 3)(6) Expansion Communication Port (Port 2)(8) Output Terminals(10) USB Port Cover(9) SD Memory Card Slot(11) Memory Cartridge Connector(12) USB Port (USB 2.0 Mini-B Connector)

SmartAXIS Lite

Example: FT1A-B48KA(15) Power/Run Status LED[PWR/RUN](16) Error Status LED [ERR]

The text in square brackets is printed on the SmartAXIS to describe LED.

(1) Power Supply Terminals
Connect power supply to these terminals.
(2) Input Terminals
For connecting input signals from input devices such as sensors and pushbuttons.
DC power type can use high-speed input of up to 100 kHz and 0 to 10V DC analog input, which is shared with digital input.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-1

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Ethernet PortThis port is used for Ethernet connection. An Ethernet cable can be connected to enable the SmartAXIS to communicate with
network devices, such as computers or PLCs. Not available on the 12-I/O type.
(4) Ethernet Status LED [Ethernet]
Turns on or blinks when an Ethernet cable is connected to the SmartAXIS and the SmartAXIS communicates with network
devices. Not available on the 12-I/O type.
Ethernet Status LED

StatusOFF

Ethernet cable is not connected.

ON

Ethernet cable is connected and communication is possible.

Flashing

Ethernet cable is connected and data is being sent or received.

(5) SD Memory Card Status LED [SD Access]Turns on or blinks when the SD memory card is being accessed. Not available on the 12- or 24-I/O type.
SD Memory Card Status LED

Status When the SD memory card is not insertedOFF When an unsupported or unformatted SD memory card was inserted When access to the SD memory card was stopped by SD memory card access stop flag (M8076)
 When the SmartAXIS power is off

ON

The standby state where the SD memory card can be written or read
 When the SmartAXIS is recognizing the SD memory card

Slow Flash (1-sec interval)

 When the SmartAXIS is stopping access due to SD memory card access stop flag (M8076)

Quick Flash (100ms interval)

Reading or writing to the SD memory cardturning on (slow flashing, then off)(6) Expansion Communication Port (Port2)(7) Expansion Communication Port (Port3)
This port is used to install a communication cartridge for communication with external devices. The 24-I/O type has one
expansion communication port while the 40- and 48-I/O types have two. Not available on the 12-I/O type.
(8) Output Terminals
For connecting output signals to output devices such as electromechanical relays and solenoid valves. Relay output (10A and2A types) and transistor output (sink/source) are available.
(9) SD Memory Card Slot
Insert SD memory card to this slot. Not available on the 12- or 24-I/O type.
(10) USB Port CoverProtects the USB port and the memory cartridge. If the panel mount USB extension cable is to be connected permanently, it
can be secured to the USB port cover using a cable tie.
(11) Memory Cartridge Connector
For connecting an optional memory cartridge.
(12) USB Port
A Mini-B type USB 2.0 connector. A USB maintenance cable or panel mount USB extension cable can be attached andconnected to a PC to download and upload user programs using WindLDR.
(13) Operation Buttons
For operating the menus displayed on the LCD to access functions. There are six operation buttons: [[ ], [OK], and [ESC].
Not available on the SmartAXIS Lite.
(14) LCD
Displays operation menus, status, and setting of the SmartAXIS. Not available on the SmartAXIS Lite.

2-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

], [

], [

],

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(15) Power/Run Status LED [PWR/RUN]
A green LED that turns on or flashes to indicate the power supply and operation status.
Power/Run Status LED

StatusOFF

Power is not supplied.

ON

Power is supplied and the user program is being executed.

Slow Flash (1-sec interval)

Power is supplied and the user program is stopped.

Not available on the SmartAXIS Pro.
(16) Error Status LED [ERR]
A red LED that turns on if an error occurs.
Error Status LED

StatusOFF

Normal operationON

An error has occurred.

Slow Flash (1-sec interval)

The SmartAXIS is running and the forced I/O function is enabled.

Quick Flash (100 ms interval)

The user program is stopped and the forced I/O function is enabled.

Not available on the SmartAXIS Pro.
(17) Sensor Power Terminals
For supplying power to sensors (24V DC). Not available on the DC power type.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-3

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
General Specifications
AC Power TypeType Number

FT1AH12RC, B12RC

H24RC, B24RC

H40RC, B40RC

H48KC, H48SC
B48KC, B48SC

Normal Operating Conditions
Operating Temperature

0 to +55°C (operating ambient temperature) (Note 2)

Storage Temperature–25 to +70°C (no freezing)

Relative Humidity

10 to 95% (non-condensing, operating and storage humidity)

Pollution Degree

2 (IEC60664-1)

Degree of Protection

IP20 (IEC60529)

Corrosion Immunity

Atmosphere free from corrosive gases

AltitudeOperation: 0 to 2,000m (0 to 6,565 feet)
Transport: 0 to 3,000m (0 to 9,840 feet)

Installation Location

Inside cabinet (Note 1)

Device Class

Open equipment

Overvoltage Category

II

Vibration Resistance

When mounted on a DIN rail or panel surface:
5 to 8.4Hz amplitude 3.5mm, 8.4 to 150Hz acceleration 9.8m/s2 (1G)
2 hours per axis on each of three mutually perpendicular axes

Shock Resistance

147 m/s2 (15G), 11ms duration, 3 shocks per axis on three mutually perpendicular axes

Power Supply (Note 3)
Rated Power Voltage

100 to 240V AC

Allowable Voltage Range

85 to 264V AC

Rated Power Frequency

50/60Hz (47 to 63Hz)

Maximum Power Consumption

18VA

Allowable Momentary Power Interruption

10ms maximum (at the rated power voltage)

41VA

48VA

43VA

Between power and PE terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and PE terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteBetween transistor output and PE terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteBetween relay output and PE terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteDielectric Strength Voltage

Between power and input terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and transistor output terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and transistor output terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minute

EMC Immunity

IEC/EN 61131-2:2007 compliant

Inrush Current

35A maximum (Cold start with Ta = 25°C, 200V AC)

GroundD-type ground (Class 3 ground)

Grounding Wire

UL1007 AWG16Power Supply Wire

UL1015 AWG22, UL1007 AWG18

Effect of Improper Power Supply
Connection
WeightReverse polarity: Normal operation
Improper voltage or frequency: Permanent damage may be caused
Improper lead connection: Permanent damage may be caused
Approx. 230g

Approx. 400g

Approx. 580g

Approx. 540g

Note 1: Use in environments that satisfy product specifications.
Note 2: UL, c-UL Listed at 0 to +50°C (FT1A Version V110).
Note 3: Supports input/output overvoltage protection. When overvoltage protection occurred, the power supply output is shut off. In this situation,
shut off the AC input, wait for one minute or longer, and then turn on the AC input again.

2-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
DC Power TypeType Number

FT1AH12RA, B12RA

H24RA, B24RA

H40RKA, H40RSA
B40RKA, B40RSA

H48KA, H48SA
B48KA, B48SA

Normal Operating Conditions
Operating Temperature

0 to +55°C (operating ambient temperature) (Note 2)

Storage Temperature–25 to +70°C (no freezing)

Relative Humidity

10 to 95% (non-condensing, operating and storage humidity)

Pollution Degree

2 (IEC60664-1)

Degree of Protection

IP20 (IEC60529)

Corrosion Immunity

Atmosphere free from corrosive gases

AltitudeOperation: 0 to 2,000m (0 to 6,565 feet)
Transport: 0 to 3,000m (0 to 9,840 feet)

Installation Location

Inside cabinet (Note 1)

Device Class

Open equipment

Overvoltage Category

II

Vibration Resistance

When mounted on a DIN rail or panel surface:
5 to 8.4Hz amplitude 3.5 mm, 8.4 to 150Hz acceleration 9.8m/s2 (1G)
2 hours per axis on each of three mutually perpendicular axes

Shock Resistance

147m/s2 (15G), 11 ms duration, 3 shocks per axis on three mutually perpendicular axes

Power Supply
Rated Power Voltage

24V DC

Allowable Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC (Including ripple voltage)

Maximum Power Consumption

4.3W

Allowable Momentary Power Interruption

10ms maximum (Rated voltage, PS2)

4.8W

7.9W

6.0W

Between power/input and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween transistor output and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteDielectric Strength Voltage

Between relay output and FE terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween power/input and transistor output terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power/input and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minute

EMC Immunity

IEC/EN 61131-2:2007 compliant

Inrush Current

30A maximum

GroundD-type ground (Class 3 ground)

Grounding Wire

UL1007 AWG16Power Supply Wire

UL1015 AWG22, UL1007 AWG18

Effect of Improper Power Supply
Connection
WeightReverse polarity: No operation, no damage
Improper voltage or frequency: Permanent damage may be caused
Improper lead connection: Permanent damage may be caused
Approx. 190g

Approx. 310g

Approx. 420g

Approx. 380g

Note 1: Use in environments that satisfy product specifications.
Note 2: UL, c-UL Listed at 0 to +50°C (FT1A Version V110).

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-5

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications
Function Specifications
FT1AType Number

ProgramCapacity(Note 1)
Number of
Function
Blocks (Note 2)

H12RA
B12RA

H12RC
B12RC

H24RA
B24RA

H40RKA
H40RSA
B40RKA
B40RSA

H24RC
B24RC

H40RC
B40RC

Ladder

12,000 bytes(3,000 steps)

47,400 bytes(11,850 steps)

FBD

10,000 bytes

38,000 bytes

Block (B)

200

1,000

Timer (T)

100

200

Counter (C)

100

200

Input
Points816

Digital Input(Terminal No.)6
(I0 to I5)

8(I0 to I7)

12(I0 to I7,
I10 to I13)

Shared Analog Input(Terminal No.)2
(I6, I7)—

4(I14 to I17)

Output Points

4

2A Relay Output(Terminal No.)

Transistor Output(Terminal No.)
User Program Storage

24

H48KC
H48SC
B48KC
B48SC

30

16
(I0 to I7,
I10 to I17)

18
(I0 to I7,
I10 to I17,
I20, I21)

24(I0 to I7,
I10 to I17,
I20 to I27)

22
(I0 to I7,
I10 to I17,
I20 to I25)

30
(I0 to I7,
I10 to I17,
I20 to I27,
I30 to I35)—

6
(I22 to I27)—

8
(I26, I27,
I30 to I35)

—

8

16

18

4
(Q0 to Q3)

10A Relay Output(Terminal No.)

H48KA
H48SA
B48KA
B48SA

—

—

4
(Q4 to Q7)

8(Q4 to Q7,
Q10 to Q13)

12
(Q4 to Q7,
Q10 to Q13,
Q14 to Q17)

—

—

—

4
(Q14 to Q17)—18
(Q0 to Q7, Q10 to Q17,
Q20, Q21)

Flash ROM (10,000 rewriting life)

Backup Function
RAM

Backup data: Internal relay, shift register, counter current value, data register (Note 3), clock data (year,
month, and day)Backup Duration

Approx. 30 days (typical) at 25°C after backup battery fully charged

Battery

Lithium secondary battery

Charging Time

Approx. 15 hours for charging from 0% to 90% of full charge

Battery Life

5 years in cycles of 9-hour charging and 15-hour discharging

Replaceability

Not possible to replace battery

Clock Function (Note 4)

Clock accuracy: ±30 sec/month (typical) at 25°C

Control System

Stored program system

Instruction Words (Ladder)
Basic Instructions

42

Advanced Instructions

99

107

DC type: 125, AC type: 111

Function Block (FBD)
Function Blocks

45

Processing Time
LadderFBD

Basic Instruction

0.95 ms (1000 steps)

END Processing

640 μs

LogicalOperation FB
Execution Time

1.3 ms(100 FBs)

Scan End
Processing

1 msInternal Relay

1024

Shift Register

128

2-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1AType Number

H12RA
B12RA

H12RC
B12RC

H24RA
B24RA

H40RKA
H40RSA
B40RKA
B40RSA

H24RC
B24RC

Data Register12-I/O type: 400
24-I/O type, 40-I/O type, 48-I/O type: 2,000Counter (adding, reversible)

100

200

Timer (1-sec, 100ms,
10ms, 1ms)

100

200

Input Filter

Without filter, 3 to 15ms (selectable in increments of 1ms)

H40RC
B40RC

H48KA
H48SA
B48KA
B48SA

H48KC
H48SC
B48KC
B48SC

—

Total
6 points—

Catch Input/Interrupt Input
Input Points

Self-diagnostic Function

4

6

Keep data
Power failure
Clock error
Watchdog timer
Timer/counter preset value change error
User program syntax
User program execution
System error
Memory cartridge transfer error

High-speed Counter
PointsTotal
4 points

Maximum Counter
Frequency

Single/two-phaseselectable: 100kHz(2 points)
Single-phase: 100kHz(2 points)

Counting Range

0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits)

Operation Mode

Rotary encoder mode and adding counter modeTotal
6 points—

Total
6 points—

Single/two-phase selectable: 100kHz (2 points)
Single-phase: 100kHz (4 points)

Pulse Output (Maximum frequency: 100kHz)
Points—2(Q14, Q15)—

2
(Q14, Q15)—

2
(Q16, Q17)—2
(Q16, Q17)

6
(I22 to I27)—

Pulse Output (Maximum frequency: 5kHz)
PointsAnalog Voltage Input
Points (Terminal No.)

2 (I6, I7)

Input voltage Range

0 to 10V DC

Digital Resolution

0 to 1000—

4(I14 to I17)—

8 (I26, I27,
I30 to I35)

—

USB
Port
Points1

USB Standard

USB 2.0

Connector

Mini-B type

Expansion Communication Ports
Points

—

1

—

1

2

Ethernet Port
PointsMemory Cartridge Connectors
Points

1

SD Memory Card Slots
Points—1

Note1: 1 step is equivalent to 4 bytes.
Note2: When FBD program is selected as the programming language.
Note3: Among data registers D0 to D1999, only D0 to D999 are backed up.
Note4: Set the calendar/clock using WindLDR to use the clock function.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-7

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
LCD Specifications (SmartAXIS Pro only)
Description/Specifications
Type

STN monochrome LCD

Resolution

64 x 192 pixels

Number of Characters

24 digits x 8 lines (8 x 8 pixel font)
12 digits x 8 lines (16 x 8 pixel font)
12 digits x 4 lines (16 x 16 pixel font)

Display Content

System menus, messages, operation status monitor

Contrast Adjustment

Not possible

Backlight

Yes (backlight can be turned on and off)

Input Specifications (AC Power Type)
FT1AType Number

H12RC
B12RC

H24RC
B24RC

Input Points

8

Rated Input Voltage

24V DC

Input Voltage Range

0 to 28.8V DC

Terminal Arrangement

See "Terminal Arrangement" on page 2-17.

Input External Power
SupplyVoltage Fluctuation
Range/Capacity (Note 1)—

DC20.4 to 26.4V
250mA

Contacts

Sink/Source

Input Points(Terminal No./
Common Line Name)

8 points in 1 common line
(I0 to I7/COM)

16 points in 1 common
line(I0 to I7, I10 to I17/COM)

Rated Input Current

5.3mA

Input Impedance

4.3kΩ

Turn ON Time

40 μs + filter valueTurn OFF Time150 μs + filter value

16

H48KC
H48SC
B48KC
B48SC

H40RC
B40RC
24

30

DC20.4 to 26.4V
300mA

DC20.4 to 26.4V
300mA

24 points in 1 common
line(I0 to I7, I10 to I17, I20
to I27/COM)

30 points in 2 common
lines(I0 to I7, I10 to I17, I20
to I25/COMA, I26, I27,
I30 to I35/COMB)

Digital Input
Input Type

Between input terminals: Not isolated

Isolation

Internal circuit: Photocoupler isolated

Input TypeType 1 (IEC61131-2)

Shared Digital/Analog
InputsStatus
DisplayNo

Pro

LCD display

Lite

—

External Load for I/OInterconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination
MethodStaticCable Length

100m in compliance with electromagnetic immunity

Effect of Improper
Input Connection

No damage. If any input exceeding the rated value is applied, permanent damage may be caused.

Note 1: When an overload state occurs such as a short circuit in the input external power supply, the power supplied to the internal circuit of theSmartAXIS is stopped. When the overload state is cleared, the output automatically recovers.

2-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Input Internal Circuit• Sink/Source Input (FT1A-*24/40/48RC)

24V DCCOM
Internal Circuit

Input
4.3KΩ

Input

4.3kΩ

COM

Internal Circuit• Contact Input (FT1A-*12RC)

0V

Input Operating Range
Input Voltage (V DC)
28.6
ON Area24
15Transition Area
5
OFF Area
1.1

3.0

5.3

5.5

Input Current (mA)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-9

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Input Specifications (DC Power Type)
FT1A-

Type Number

H12RA
B12RA

H24RA
B24RA

H40RKA
B40RKA

Input Points

12

Rated Input Voltage

24V DC

Input Voltage Range

0 to 28.8V DC

Terminal Arrangement

See "Terminal Arrangement" on page 2-17.

16

H40RSA
B40RSA

24

H48KA
B48KA

H48SA
B48SA

30

Digital Input
Input Type

Sink

SourceSink

SourceSink

Input Points(Terminal No. /Common LineName)

6 points in 1
common line
(I0 to I5/
Internal "-"terminal)

18 points in 1
common line
(I0 to I7, I10
to I17, I20,
I21/Internal "+"terminal)

18 points in 1
common line
(I0 to I7, I10
to I17, I20,
I21/Internal "-"terminal)

22 points in 1
common line
(I0 to I7, I10
to I17, I20 to
I25/Internal "+"terminal)

22 points in 1
common line
(I0 to I7, I10
to I17, I20 to
I25/Internal "-"terminal)

Rated Input Current

4.4mA

5.2mA

4.4mA

5.2mA

4.4mA

Input Impedance

5.5kΩ

4.7kΩ

5.5kΩ

4.7kΩ

5.5kΩ

Turn ON Time

2.5 μs + filter
value

I0 to I7: 2.5μs + filter value
Others: 40μs + filter valueTurn OFF Time

5 μs + filter
value

I0 to I7: 5μs + filter value
Others: 150μs + filter value

Function
Input

High-Speed
Counter(Two-phase)2 systems[System 1]
1-A phase: I0, 1-B phase: I1, 1-Z phase: I2 (for clear input)[System 2]
2-A phase: I3, 2-B phase: I4, 2-Z phase: I5 (for clear input)

High-Speed
Counter(Single-phase)

4 points(I0, I2, I3, I5)

6 points (I0, I2, I3, I5, I6, I7)Interrupt

4 points(I0, I2, I3, I5)

6 points (I0, I2, I3, I5, I6, I7)Catch

4 points(I0, I2, I3, I5)

6 points (I0, I2, I3, I5, I6, I7)

Frequency
Measurement

4 points(I0, I2, I3, I5)

6 points (I0, I2, I3, I5, I6, I7)

Isolation

2-10

12 points in 1
common line
(I0 to I7, I10
to I13/
Internal "-"terminal)

Between input terminals: Not isolatedInternal circuit: Not isolated

Input TypeType 1 (IEC61131-2)

External Load for I/OInterconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticCable Length(in compliance withelectromagnetic immunity)

3m (9.84 ft.)

I0 to I7: 3m (9.84 ft.)
Others: 100m (328.1 ft.)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-

Type Number

H12RA
B12RA

H24RA
B24RA

H40RKA
B40RKA

H40RSA
B40RSA

H48KA
B48KA

H48SA
B48SA

Analog Input
Input Signal Type

Voltage Input

Input Points(Terminal No. /Common LineName)

2 points in 1
common line
(I6, I7/
Internal "-"terminal)

Input Range

0 to 10.0V DC

Rated Input Current

0.3mA

Input Impedance

78.0kΩ

Digital Resolution

0 to 1000 (10 bits)

Data Type

Binary data: 0 to 1000

Input Value of LSB

10mVType of Input

Single-ended input

AD
Conversion

Input Error

GeneralCharacteristics
Status
Display

4 points in 1
common line
(I14 to I17
Internal "-"terminal)

SampleDuration Time2ms maximum

SampleRepetitionTime

2ms maximum

Total Input
SystemTransfer Time2ms + filtering time + scan time

Maximum
Error at 25°C

±1.5% of full scale

Temperature
Coefficient±0.25% of full scale/°C

Maximum
Error±5.0% of full scale

OperatingMode

Self-scan

Conversion
MethodSuccessive Approximation

Pro"Device Monitor" screen (LCD)

Lite

—

6 points in 1 common line
(I22 to I27/Internal "-"terminal)

Maximum Temporary Deviation
during Electrical Noise Tests±5.0% of full scale

Recommended Cable for Noise
Immunity

Twisted pair shielded cable

Calibration or Verification to
Maintain Rated Accuracy

Not possible

Maximum Permanent Allowed
Overload (No Damage)

28.8V DC

Overload Status (Outside Input
Range) Detection

Detectable (Stored in special data register D8077)
Between input terminals: Not isolated

Isolation

Used asDigital Input

8 points in 1 common line
(I26, I27, I30 to I35/Internal "-"terminal)

Between input and internal circuit: Not isolated
Digital Input
Type
Input
Threshold

Effect of Improper Input
Connection— (IEC 61131-2 digital input type is not supported)
ON voltage: 15V minimum (ON current: 0.20mA minimum)
OFF voltage: 5V maximum (OFF current: 0.06mA maximum)
No damage. If any input exceeding the rated value is applied, permanent damage may be caused.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-11

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Digital Input Internal Circuits• Source Input

24V DCInternal Circuit

24V DC

4.3kΩ
Input
1.0kΩ

24V DCInternal Circuit• Sink Input

4.7kΩ
47kΩ
Input
10kΩ

0V

0V

Internal Circuit with Shared Digital/Analog Input

Internal Circuit

24V DC

56kΩ
Input
22kΩ

0V

Digital Input Operating Range• Sink Input• Source Input

Input Voltage (V DC)

Input Voltage (V DC)

28.8

28.8
ON Area

ON Area

24

24

15

15

Transition Area

Transition Area

5

5

OFF Area
0.9

2.7

5.3

4.4

OFF Area

Input Current (mA)
-1.0

-3.0

• Operating Range of Shared Digital/Analog Input

Input Voltage (V DC)
28.8
ON Area24

15Transition Area
5
OFF Area
0.06

2-12

0.2

0.3

0.37

Input Current (mA)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

-5.2

-6.2

Input Current (mA)

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Output Specifications (10A Relay)
FT1AType Number

H12RC
B12RC

H12RA
B12RA

H24RC
B24RC

H24RA
B24RA

No. of Outputs (Terminal No.)

4 (Q0 to Q3)

Terminal Arrangement

See "Terminal Arrangement" on page 2-17.

Output Type1a contact

Maximum Load Current*1

10A

Minimum Switching Load

10mA/5V DC (reference value)

Initial Contact Resistance

100mΩ maximum (1A, 6V DC)

Electrical Life*2 (rated load
1,800 operations/hour)

240V AC-10A: 100,000 operations minimum
30V DC-10A: 50,000 operations minimum*3

Mechanical Life

20,000,000 operations minimum (no load 18,000 operations/hour)

Rated Load (Note)

250V AC/10A, 30V DC/10A

Dielectric Strength

Between output terminal and internal circuit: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween output terminals (COMs): 2,300V AC, 1 minute

Status
DisplayPro

LCD display

Lite

—

H40RC
B40RC

H40RKA
H40RSA
B40RKA
B40RSA

240V AC-10A: 100,000 operations
minimum
30V DC-10A: 100,000 operations
minimum*1 Values for resistive/inductive load.
*2 Values for resistive load.
*3 The electrical life of the relays for SmartAXIS with the following hardware versions is 100,000 operations minimum:
Type Number

Hardware Version

FT1A-H12RA, FT1A-H12RC, FT1A-B12RA

Before V200

FT1A-H24RA, FT1A-H24RC, FT1A-B24RA

Before V300

FT1A-B12RC, FT1A-B24RC—S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-13

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Output Delay
ON
CommandOFF
ON

Output Relay Status

OFF

OFF delay: 10ms maximum
ON delay: 15ms maximum

Note: The relay outputs of SmartAXIS with the following hardware versions include bounce time.
Type Number

Hardware Version

FT1A-H12RA, FT1A-H12RC, FT1A-B12RA

Before V200

FT1A-H24RA, FT1A-H24RC, FT1A-B24RA

Before V300

FT1A-B12RC, FT1A-B24RC,
FT1A-H40RC, FT1A-B40RC, FT1A-H40RKA,
FT1A-B40RKA, FT1A-H40RSA, FT1A-B40RSA—

ON
CommandOFF
ON

Output Relay Status

OFF

OFF delay: 10ms maximum
Bounce: 6ms maximum
ON delay: 6ms maximum

Derating
When using the SmartAXIS at an operating temperature of 45°C or higher, reduce the output current of the 10A relay and power
supply voltage as shown in the figure below.
Normal Installation
Output Current
10A

Operating Temperature
4 5 °COperating Temperature
5 5 °C

8A

0Power Supply Voltage
24V

28.8V

Note: UL, c-UL Listed at 0 to +50°C (FT1A Version V110).

2-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Output Specifications (2A Relay)
FT1AH24RC
B24RC
H24RA
B24RA

Type Number

4(Q4 to Q7)

12(Q4 to Q7, Q10 to Q13,
Q14 to Q17)8
(Q4 to Q7, Q10 to Q13)

COM4

4 (Q4 to Q7)

4 (Q4 to Q7)

4 (Q4 to Q7)

COM5

—

4 (Q10 to Q13)

4 (Q10 to Q13)

COM6

—

4 (Q14 to Q17)—

No. of Outputs(Terminal No.)
OutputPoints per
CommonLine

Terminal Arrangement

See "Terminal Arrangement" on page 2-17.

Output Type1a contact

Maximum
Load Current

1 point

2A

1 common line

8A maximum

Minimum Switching Load

0.1 mA/0.1V DC (reference value)

Initial Contact Resistance

1A, 6V DC

Electrical Life

100,000 operations minimum (rated load 1,800 operations/hour)

Mechanical Life

20,000,000 operations minimum (no load 18,000 operations/hour)

Rated Load*1

250V AC/2A, 30V DC/2A

Dielectric Strength

Between output terminal and internal circuit: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween output terminals (COMs): 2,300V AC, 1 minute

Status
Display

H40RKA
H40RSA
B40RKA
B40RSA

H40RC
B40RC

Pro

LCD display

Lite

—

*1 Values for resistive/inductive load.

Output Delay
ON
CommandOFF
ON

Output Relay Status

OFF

OFF delay: 10ms maximum
Chatter: 6ms maximum
ON delay: 6ms maximum

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-15

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Output Specifications (Transistor)
FT1A-

Type Number

OutputModel/
No. ofPoint

Output Points per
Common Line

H40RKA
B40RKA

H40RSA
B40RSA

H48KC
B48KC

H48KA
B48KA

4 (Q14 to
Q17)—

18 (Q0 to Q7,
Q10 to Q17,
Q20, Q21)—

18 (Q0 to Q7,
Q10 to Q17,
Q20, Q21)—

Source output—

4 (Q14 to
Q17)—

18 (Q0 to Q7,
Q10 to Q17,
Q20, Q21)—

18 (Q0 to Q7,
Q10 to Q17,
Q20, Q21)COM0—

8 (Q0 to Q7)

COM1

—

8 (Q10 to Q17)

COM2

—

2 (Q20, Q21)

COM6

4 (Q14 to Q17)—

24V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Terminal Arrangement

See "Terminal Arrangement" on page 2-17.

1 point

0.3A maximum

1 common line

1A maximum

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

1V maximum (voltage between COM and output terminals when output is on)

Inrush Current

1A maximum

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

39V±1V

Maximum Lamp Load

8W

Inductive Load

L/R = 10ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw

Sink output: 100mA maximum, 24V DC (power voltage at the +V terminal)
Source output: 100mA maximum, 24V DC (power voltage at the +COM terminal)

Function Input

Isolation

100kHz output

2 points (Q14, Q15)

5kHz output

2 points (Q16, Q17)

Between output
terminal andinternal circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between output
terminals

Same common line: Not isolated
Separate common line: Isolated

Turn ON Time

High-speed output terminal (100 kHz pulse output terminal): 5 μs maximum
Normal output terminal (including 5 kHz pulse output terminal): 100 μs maximum

Turn OFF Time

High-speed output terminal (100 kHz pulse output terminal): 5 μs maximum
Normal output terminal (including 5 kHz pulse output terminal): 100 μs maximumPro

LCD display

Lite

—

Output Delay

Status Display

Output Internal Circuit

Sink Output

Source Output
V (+)

Internal
Circuit

COM (+)

Internal
CircuitOutputCOM (-)

2-16

H48SA
B48SA

Sink output

Rated Load Voltage

Maximum Load
Current

H48SC
B48SC

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

OutputV (-)

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement
FT1A-H12RA, FT1A-B12RA
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side+-

Analog voltage
output device+

2-wireSensor+-Output Side: Fuse
L

L

L

L

L

: LoadFT1A-H12RC, FT1A-B12RC
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring I/O Diagrams
Input Side

Output Side: FuseL

L

L

L

L : Load

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-17

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H24RA, FT1A-B24RA
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side+-

Analog voltage
output device+

2-wireSensor+-Output Side

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

: FuseL

L: LoadFT1A-H24RC, FT1A-B24RC
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side
● Source Input--

2-wireSensor+ External

Power

+

- External

2-wireSensor● Sink Input
+

+

-

Power

Output Side

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

: FuseL : Load

2-18

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H40RSA, FT1A-B40RSA
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side

● Sink Input

Analog voltage
output device

2-wireSensorOutput Side

● Source Output (Transistor Output)

FT1A-H40RKA, FT1A-B40RKA
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side

● Source Input (Analog/Digital Shared Input

is Sink Input)

Analog voltage
output device

2-wireSensorOutput Side

● Sink Output (Transistor Output): FuseS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL: Load2-19

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H40RC, FT1A-B40RC
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side

● Source Input--

2-wireSensor+ External

Power

+

● Sink Input++-

2-wireSensorExternalPower-

Output Side

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

: FuseL : Load

2-20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H48SA, FT1A-B48SA
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side

● Sink Input+-

Analog voltage
output device+

2-wireSensor+-Output Side

● Source Output
Tr.

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L : Load: FuseFT1A-H48KA, FT1A-B48KA
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side

● Source Input (Analog/Digital Shared Input

is Sink Input)+-

Analog voltage
output device

2-wireSensor++Output Side

● Sink Output
Tr.

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

: FuseS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

L

L : Load

2-21

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-B48SC, FT1A-H48SC
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side

● Source Input+ ExternalPower

2-wireSensor+2-wireSensor++2-wireSensor-+2-wireSensor-+ExternalPower● Sink Input+- External
Power

+
-

ExternalPower

Output Side

● Source Output
Tr.

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

: Fuse

2-22

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

L : Load2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H48KC, FT1A-B48KC
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
Input Side

● Source Input+ ExternalPower

2-wireSensor+2-wireSensor++2-wireSensor-+2-wireSensor-+ExternalPower● Sink Input+- External
Power

+
-

ExternalPower

Output Side

● Sink Output
Tr.

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

: FuseS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

L : Load

2-23

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Communication Cartridge
Functions
By installing a communication cartridge on the SmartAXIS expansion communication port, the SmartAXIS can communicate with
communication devices supporting RS232C/RS485, such as Modbus RTU compliant devices, barcode readers, or operator
interfaces.
Specifications
Type No.

FT1A-PC1FT1A-PC2FT1A-PC3

Item

Specifications

Termination Connector

Mini DIN

Standards

EIA RS232C

Maximum Baud Rate

115,200 bps

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication, User communication, Modbus RTU master/slave

Isolation between Internal Circuitand Communication Port

Not isolated

Recommended Communication Cable

Special cable

Termination Connector

Mini DIN

Standards

EIA RS485

Maximum Baud Rate

115,200bps

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication, User communication, Modbus RTU master/slave

Isolation between Internal Circuitand Communication Port

Not isolated

Recommended Communication Cable

Special cable

Termination Connector

Screw Terminal blockStandards

EIA RS485

Maximum Baud Rate

115,200 bps

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication, User communication, Modbus RTU master/slave

Isolation between Internal Circuitand Communication Port

Not isolated

Recommended Communication Cable

Twisted-pair shielded cable with a minimum core wire of 0.3 mm2(Conductor resistance 85 Ω/km maximum, shield resistance 20 Ω/km maximum)

Maximum Cable Length200m

Note: For details on recommended communication cables, see "Cables" on page A-5.

Installation Procedure
Remove the expansion communication port cover by inserting a flat head screwdriver into the slots at the top and bottom of thecover. Press in the tabs at either end of the cover and lift the cover directly upward.
Expansion Communication Port Cover

Flat Head Screwdriver

Slot

2-24

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
After removing the expansion communication port cover, carefully install a communication cartridge on the SmartAXIS expansion
communication port. Ensure that the cartridge is installed with the correct orientation.
Communication Cartridge

With communication
cartridges installed.

Removal Procedure
As in the procedure to remove the expansion communication port cover, insert a flat head screwdriver into the slots, press in thetabs at either end of the communication cartridge, and lift it directly upward. If the cartridge is removed in a crooked state, thehousing of the cartridge or the internal connector may be damaged.

Caution Turn off the power to the SmartAXIS before removing or installing a communication cartridge.
 If a communication cartridge is installed while the SmartAXIS is powered, the SmartAXIS or the communication

cartridge may be damaged.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-25

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Memory Cartridge
Functions
By installing a memory cartridge on which a user program is stored to the SmartAXIS, it is possible to change the user program
executed by the SmartAXIS without using WindLDR. It is also possible to download a user program from a memory cartridge to the
SmartAXIS. The user program stored in the SmartAXIS ROM can also be uploaded to a memory cartridge.
Memory Cartridge

User Program Execution Priority
 When a memory cartridge is installed on the SmartAXIS, the user program stored in thememory cartridge is executed.
 User programs can be downloaded from memory cartridges to the SmartAXIS using theInstalled on the SmartAXIS

memory cartridge download function or LCD operation (SmartAXIS Pro only).
 User programs can be uploaded to memory cartridges from the SmartAXIS ROM using thememory cartridge upload function or LCD operation (SmartAXIS Pro only).
For details, see "Memory Cartridge" on page 5-49.
Not installed on the SmartAXIS

The user program stored in the SmartAXIS ROM is executed.

Note: Program capacity when using a memory cartridge is the same as the program capacity of the applicable SmartAXIS model. See "Function
Specifications" on page 2-6.

Specifications
Item

Specifications

Type Number

FT1A-PM1

Memory TypeFlash ROM

Hardware for Storing Data

SmartAXIS

Quantity of Stored Programs

One user program per memory cartridge

User Program Compatibility
The SmartAXIS can execute only user programs created for the same PLC type. When installing a memory cartridge, make surethat the user program stored on the memory cartridge matches the PLC type. If the user program is not for the same PLC type, auser program syntax error occurs and the PLC cannot run the user program.

CautionCompatibility of User Program with PLC System Software

When a memory cartridge contains a user program for higher functionality, do not install the memory cartridge into
PLCs with lower functionality, otherwise the user program syntax error occurs. Upgrade the system software of the
PLCs so the PLCs can run the user program in the memory cartridge.

Installation Procedure
Insert a flat head screwdriver under the memory cartridge cover and pull the cover directly upward to remove it.
Memory Cartridge Cover

Flat Head Screwdriver

2-26

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
After removing the memory cartridge cover, install a memory cartridge. Confirm that the triangular marks on the memory cartridge
and on the SmartAXIS point at each other to ensure that the memory cartridge is installed with the correct orientation.

Memory Cartridge

Ensure that the cartridge is installed with the correct orientation.

Removal Procedure
As in the procedure to remove the memory cartridge cover, insert a flat head screwdriver under the memory cartridge cover andpull the cover directly upward to remove it. If the cartridge is removed in a crooked state, the housing of the cartridge or theinternal connector may be damaged.

Caution Turn off the power to the SmartAXIS before removing or installing a memory cartridge.

If a memory cartridge is installed while the SmartAXIS is powered, the SmartAXIS or the memory cartridge may bedamaged.
 Do not damage the SmartAXIS with the screwdriver.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-27

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Ethernet Port
Functions
SmartAXIS with Ethernet port can communicate with other network devices that support Ethernet communications, such as
maintenance communication, Modbus TCP (client and server) communication, and user-defined communication (ETXD and ERXD
commands).
Applicable Models
An Ethernet port is available on the 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types.
12-I/O type24-I/O type40-I/O type

48-I/O type

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Specifications
Item

Specifications

Transmission Speed

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Electrical Characteristics

IEEE 802.3-compliant

Recommended Cable

CAT.5 STP (Category 5 shielded twisted-pair cable)

Connector

RJ45

AutoMDI/MDI-X Function

Yes (when only two SmartAXIS are connected, they can be directly connected with a straight cable)

Installation Procedure
Remove the protective seal covering the Ethernet port and insert the connector of an Ethernet cable securely.

(2) Insert the connector(1) Remove protective seal

Caution Turn off the power to the SmartAXIS before connecting an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port.
 If an Ethernet cable is connected while the SmartAXIS is powered, electrical shock to the operator or damage to the

SmartAXIS may be caused.

2-28

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
SD Memory Card
Applicable Models
SD memory cards can be used only with the 40- and 48-I/O types.
12-I/O type24-I/O type40-I/O type

48-I/O type

No

No

Yes

Yes

SD Memory Card Usage
Specified device values can be saved in CSV files on an SD memory card using the DLOG and TRACE instructions/FB. This makes it
possible to save log data or analyze the data when an error occurs.
CSV files saved on an SD memory card can be read out to a computer using WindLDR.
For details on the DLOG and TRACE instructions, see Chapter 26 "Data Log Instructions" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming
Manual". For details on the DLOG and TRACE FB, see Chapter 16 "The data logging FB" in the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming
Manual".
Specifications
Item

Specifications

Supported SD Memory Cards

SD memory cards (2GB maximum), SDHC memory cards (32GB maximum)

File System

FAT16/FAT32
SD memory cards of 2GB or less are only supported in FAT16 format. SD memory cards of 2GB
formatted in FAT32 are not recognized.

File
Specifications

FormatCSV

Size

5MB maximum

Supported
Characters

Single-byte alphanumeric characters
The following characters cannot be used in drive names:\"&()*+,./:;<>[]=|^
The following characters cannot be used in file and folder names:\/:*?"<>

Maximum Number of Files

Dependant on file system:• FAT16
65,534 maximum per sub-directory• FAT32
65,534 maximum per sub-directory

Recommended SD Memory Card
Recommended SD Memory Card

SDHC memory cards (32GB maximum)

Notes:
 It is recommended that SDHC memory cards are formatted on the SmartAXIS before it is used.
 It is recommended that important data is regularly backed up on separate media such as CDs or DVDs.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-29

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Installation
Follow the indications on the SmartAXIS and insert an SD memory card into the SD memory card slot on the SmartAXIS until you
hear a click.

RemovalPress the SD memory card in the SD memory card slot on the SmartAXIS until you hear a click and move your finger back.

The SD memory card will come partially out of the slot. Use your fingers to remove the SD memory card completely.

Notes:
 Insert and remove the SD memory card in the direction indicated on the SmartAXIS.
 Set the write-protect switch of the SD memory card to the OFF position before inserting into the SmartAXIS.

CautionIf any of the actions below are performed while the SD memory card is being accessed, data on the card
may be damaged:
 The SmartAXIS is turned off.
 The SD memory card is removed.

Do not turn off the SmartAXIS while the SD memory card is being accessed (while the SD memory card
status LED is flashing). Confirm that the SD memory card status LED is not flashing before removing thecard from the SmartAXIS. For details on SD memory card status LED, see "SD Memory Card Maintenancewith WindLDR" on page 5-53.

2-30

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Dimensions
FT1A-H12RA
76.0

56.0

2Ø
4.
5

5.0*

90.0
110.3

90.0
100.0

11.0

60.0

76.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-B12RA
76.0

56.0

2Ø

5.0*

4.
5

90.0
110.3

90.0
100.0

11.0

60.0

76.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-31

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H12RC
78.0

2Ø
4.
5

5.0*

90.0
110.3

90.0
100.0

11.0

76.0

74.0

76.0

Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-B12RC
78.0

2Ø

5.0*

4.
5

90.0
110.3

90.0
100.0

11.0

76.0

74.0

76.0

Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-H24RA
119.0

56.0

*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
2-32

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2Ø

5.0*

4.
5

110.3

90.0
100.0

11.0

60.0

119.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-B24RA
119.0

56.0

2Ø

5.0*

4.
5

90.0
110.3

90.0
100.0

11.0

60.0

119.0

Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-H24RC
119.0

74.0

2Ø

5.0*

4.
5

90.0
110.3

90.0
100.0

11.0

78.0

119.0

Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-B24RC
119.0

74.0

2Ø

5.0*

4.
5

90.0
110.3

90.0
100.0

11.0

78.0

119.0

Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-33

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H40RSA, FT1A-H40RKA
160.0

5.0*

90.0
110.0

60.0

56.0

90.0

100.0

144.0

160.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-B40RSA, FT1A-B40RKA
160.0

5.0*

90.0
110.0

60.0

90.0

100.0

144.0

160.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.

2-34

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

56.0

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H40RC
78.0

5.0*

90.0
110.0

160.0

74.0

90.0

100.0

144.0

160.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-B40RC
78.0

5.0*

90.0
110.0

160.0

74.0

90.0

100.0

144.0

160.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-35

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H48SA, FT1A-H48KA
78.0

5.0*

90.0
110.0

160.0

74.0

90.0

100.0

144.0

160.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-B48SA, FT1A-B48KA

5.0*

90.0

78.0

110.0

160.0

90.0

100.0

144.0

160.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
2-36

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

74.0

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FT1A-H48SC, FT1A-H48KC
160.0

5.0*

90.0
110.0

78.0

74.0

90.0

100.0

144.0

160.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
FT1A-B48SC, FT1A-B48KC
78.0

5.0*

90.0
110.0

160.0

90.0

100.0

144.0

74.0

160.0
Direct Mounting Hole Layout*9.3mm when the clamp is pulled out.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

2-37

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S

2-38

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
I ntroduction
This chapter describes the methods and precautions for installing and wiring SmartAXIS modules.
Before starting installation and wiring, be sure to read “Safety Precautions” in the beginning of this manual and understandprecautions described under Warning and Caution.

Warning Turn off the power to the SmartAXIS before starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of theSmartAXIS. Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard.
 Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the SmartAXIS. If such a circuit is configured

inside the SmartAXIS, failure of the SmartAXIS may cause disorder of the control system, damage, or accidents.
 Special expertise is required to install, wire, program, and operate the SmartAXIS. People without such expertise must

not use the SmartAXIS.

Caution Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the SmartAXIS housing. Put a cover on the

SmartAXIS modules during installation and wiring. Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard,
damage, or malfunction.
 Do not touch the connector pins with your hand. Electrostatic discharge may damage the internal elements.
 When handling the SmartAXIS, take measures to discharge static electricity.
 Keep the SmartAXIS wiring away from motor lines.

Installation Location
The SmartAXIS is designed to be installed in control panels and similar locations.
Install the SmartAXIS within product specifications.
Avoid use in the environments below, as doing so may cause electric shock, fire, or malfunction:
Places where there is a lot of dust, salt, iron powder, or soot.
Places exposed to direct sunlight.
Places where the SmartAXIS may be exposed to vibration or shock, either directly or indirectly.
Atmospheres of corrosive or flammable gases.
Places where condensation may form.
Places where the SmartAXIS may be directly exposed to water.
Around high-voltage lines, high-voltage equipment, motor lines, or motor equipment.
Places near where a large switching surge may occur.
Places subject to a strong magnetic or electrical field.
Always mount the SmartAXIS vertically as shown below. To provide ample ventilation, ensure that there is sufficient space
between the SmartAXIS and other devices, heat sources, and panel surfaces.
SmartAXIS Pro

SmartAXIS LiteS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3-1

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
The SmartAXIS can be mounted face up when the ambient temperature is 35°C or lower, and can be mounted on its side when theambient operating temperature is 40°C or lower. Do not mount the SmartAXIS on its side when the ambient temperature will
exceed 40°C.
Side Orientation (Use if 40°C or less)Face Up Orientation (Use if 35°C or less)

Do not install the SmartAXIS face down.
Face Down

Mounting SpaceTo allow for heat dissipation and facilitate replacement, ensure that there are at least 20 to 40mm between the SmartAXIS andsurrounding equipment and ducts.

20mm minimum
40mm minimum

40mm minimum
DIN Rail
20mm minimum

Mounting Two or More Units

40mm minimum

20mm minimum

DIN Rail

3-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GMounting on DIN Rail
Caution Install the SmartAXIS modules according to instructions described in this user’s manual. Improper installation will

result in falling, failure, or malfunction of the SmartAXIS.
 Do not install the SmartAXIS when it is powered up. Doing so may result in electric shock and may damage theproduct.

This section describes how to mount the SmartAXIS.
The SmartAXIS can be mounted directly on a DIN rail or in a control panel.
1. Firmly fasten the DIN rail to a panel using screws.
2. Using a flat head screwdriver, lower the DIN rail clamp and hang the SmartAXIS on the DIN rail.

(2) Clamp SmartAXIS over DIN rail.
DIN Rail(1) Lower DIN rail clamp.
3. Align the SmartAXIS with the DIN rail and raise the DIN rail clamp.

DIN Rail(1) Align with DIN rail.

(2) Raise DIN rail clamp.

4. Secure both ends of the SmartAXIS using the DIN rail brackets.
DIN Rail Bracket (BNL6)DIN Rail

Removing from DIN Rail
1. Using a flat head screwdriver, lower the DIN rail clamp on the SmartAXIS.
2. Pull the SmartAXIS outward and upward at the same time.

(2) Pull outward and upward.

DIN Rail(1) Lower DIN rail clamp.
Note: The SmartAXIS supports 35mm wide DIN rails. Supported rails: IDEC BAA1000 (Length: 1000mm)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3-3

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Direct Mounting on Panel Surface

This section describes how to mount the SmartAXIS directly onto a mounting plate for installation in a control panel. The 12- and24-I/O types are mounted differently from the 40- and 48-I/O types. To mount the SmartAXIS directly, it may be necessary to
make holes in the mounting plate depending on the SmartAXIS model.

Preparations

When directly mounting the 12- and 24-I/O types, pull out the direct-mounting plate and the DIN rail clamp on the back of theSmartAXIS, and attach the SmartAXIS to the mounting plate using the screw holes. Attach the 40- and 48-I/O types to themounting plate using the screw holes on the back of the SmartAXIS.
Direct-mounting Plate

Screw HoleDIN Rail Clamp

3-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GMounting Hole Layout for Direct Mounting on Panel Surface

Attach the SmartAXIS to the mounting plate using M4 tapping screws, as shown below, or make 5 to 6mm mounting holes andsecure the SmartAXIS using M4 pan head screws.
Always give sufficient consideration to operability, ease-of-maintenance, and environmental resistance when deciding on themounting position.

2Ø
4.
5

100

(90)

 12-I/O type (FT1A-H12RA, FT1A-B12RA, FT1A-H12RC, FT1A-B12RC)(76)

All dimensions in mm.

2Ø
4.
5

100

(90)

 24-I/O type (FT1A-H24RA, FT1A-B24RA, FT1A-H24RC, FT1A-B24RC)(119)
All dimensions in mm.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3-5

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
 40-I/O type (FT1A-H40RKA, FT1A-H40RSA, FT1A-B40RKA, FT1A-B40RSA, FT1A-H40RC, FT1A-B40RC)

(90)

100

144

(160)

All dimensions in mm.

 48-I/O type

(FT1A-H48KA, FT1A-H48SA, FT1A-B48KA, FT1A-B48SA, FT1A-H48KC, FT1A-H48SC, FT1A-B48KC, FT1A-B48SC)

(90)

100

144

(160)

Caution3-6

All dimensions in mm.

 When directly mounting the SmartAXIS, tighten mounting screws with torque of 1N·m (10kgf·cm).

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Input/Output Wiring
This section describes SmartAXIS input/output device wiring.

Precautions for I/O Device Wiring
Input Terminal Wiring
When wiring input devices, separate wiring from power, output, and motor lines.
When using duct for wiring, ground piping using a D-type (type 3) ground.
When wiring DC power type models, keep wiring away from AC power lines.
When using shielded cable for wiring, ground the shield on the SmartAXIS side using a D-type (type 3) ground.
Wire input devices you want to connect to the SmartAXIS according to type as shown below.
DC Power Type
Digital Input – Sink Input• Contact Output
SmartAXIS
Input Terminal (I*)

0V Power Supply
Terminal (-)+
External Power• PNP Output
Internal
Circuit

SmartAXIS

Sensor Output

OutputInput Terminal (I*)
0V Power Supply
Terminal (-)+
External Power• NPN Output

OutputExternal
resistanceInternal Circuit

SmartAXIS

Input Terminal (I*)

0V Power Supply
Terminal (-)+
External Power

Caution The above diagram (NPN output) is a reference wiring diagram for connecting an input device with NPN

output to the SmartAXIS sink input. By installing an external resistor, an input device with NPN output can beconnected. When installing an external resistor, note the following points when wiring and checking theoperation.
 When the external power supply voltage is 24V DC, an external resistor with a resistance value of 1kΩ and a rated voltage

of 2W or more (safety factor more than 3 times) is recommended. In this case, the current flowing through the external
resistor is as follows.
 When NPN output of the input device is off: Approximately 3.8 mA
 When the NPN output of the input device is on: Approximately 24.0 mA

For the digital input internal circuit (sink input), see "Digital Input Internal Circuits" on page 2-12.
 The on/off operation of the NPN output of the input device and the sink input of SmartAXIS is reversed.
 When the NPN output of the input device is off, the sink input of SmartAXIS is on.
 When the NPN output of the input device is on, the sink input of SmartAXIS is off.

When the external power supply of the input device is off, the sink input of SmartAXIS is on.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3-7

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GDigital Input – Source Input• Contact Output
SmartAXIS
Input Terminal (I*)

24V Power Supply
Terminal (-)• NPN Output

SmartAXISInternal
Circuit+

Input Terminal (I*)

Output-24V Power Supply
Terminal (-)+
External Power• PNP Output

OutputInput Terminal (I*)

External
resistanceInternal Circuit

SmartAXIS-

24V Power Supply
Terminal (-)+
External Power

Caution The above diagram (PNP output) is a reference wiring diagram for connecting an input device with PNP

output to the SmartAXIS source input. By installing an external resistor, an input device with PNP output canbe connected. When installing an external resistor, note the following points when wiring and checking theoperation.
 When the external power supply voltage is 24V DC, an external resistor with a resistance value of 1kΩ and a rated voltage

of 2W or more (safety factor more than 3 times) is recommended. In this case, the current flowing through the external
resistor is as follows.
 When the PNP output of the input device is off: Approximately 4.15 mA
 When the PNP output of the input device is on: Approximately 24.0 mA

For the digital input internal circuit (source input), see "Digital Input Internal Circuits" on page 2-12.
 The on/off operation of the PNP output of the input device and the source input of SmartAXIS is reversed.
 When the PNP output of the input device is off, the source input of SmartAXIS is on.
 When the PNP output of the input device is on, the source input of SmartAXIS is off.

When the external power supply of the input device is off, the source input of SmartAXIS is on.

• 2-wire Sensor
Internal
Circuit

SmartAXIS

3-8

Input Terminal (I*)

24V Power Supply
Terminal (-)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GShared Analog Input• Contact Output
SmartAXIS
Input Terminal (I*)

0V Power Supply
Terminal (-)+-

External Power• PNP Output
Internal
Circuit

SmartAXIS

OutputSensor Output

Input Terminal (I*)
0V Power Supply
Terminal (-)+
External Power• Analog Output

SmartAXIS
Analog Output
Terminal

COM

Input Terminal (I*)
0V Power Supply
Terminal (-)

AC Power TypeContact Input• Contact Output

SmartAXIS
Input Terminal (I*)

COM

Sink/Source Input• Contact Output
SmartAXIS
Input Terminal (I*)

COM+
Sensor Power Supply/ External Power• NPN Output

SensorInternal
Circuit

SmartAXIS

Vcc +Output０V -Input Terminal (I*)

COM+
Sensor Power Supply/ External PowerS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3-9

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G• PNP Output
Internal
Circuit

SmartAXIS

OutputInput Terminal (I*)

COM

Sensor Output+
Sensor Power Supply/ External Power

• 2-wire Sensor
SmartAXISInternal
Circuit

Input Terminal (I*)

COM
-

+

Sensor Power Supply/ External Power

Output Terminal Wiring

Caution If output relays or transistors in the SmartAXIS or output modules should fail, outputs may remain on or off. For

output signals which may cause heavy accidents, provide a monitor circuit outside the SmartAXIS.
 Connect a fuse to the output module, selecting a fuse appropriate for the load.
 Use proper wires for output wiring.

UL1015 AWG22 or UL1007 AWG18
 When equipment containing the SmartAXIS is intended for use in European countries, insert an IEC 60127-approved

fuse to each output of every module for protection against overload or short-circuit. This is required when equipment
containing the SmartAXIS is destined for Europe.
 When driving an inductive load that emits noise like a magnet or a valve, to reduce noise and protect circuits, use adiode for the output on DC power type models and a surge absorber for the output on AC power type models.
 Turn off the power to the SmartAXIS when wiring input/output terminals.
 Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the SmartAXIS.
 Use the input/output terminals within the SmartAXIS ratings and specifications.
 Tighten mounting screws with torque of 0.5N·m (5 gf·cm).

3-10

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Output Protection Circuit
When a motor, solenoid, or similar inductive load is connected, the life of the contact is shortened due to the inrush current andcounter-electromotive force acting on the load. Set up a protection circuit to prevent this from happening. Choose a protection
circuit from A through D shown below, according to the power supply, and connect the protection circuit to the outside of theSmartAXIS.
For protection of the transistor output of the SmartAXIS modules, connect protection circuit C shown below to the transistor output
circuit.
Protection Circuit A

Inductive Load

Output Q
C

This protection circuit can be used when the load impedance is smaller
than the RC impedance in an AC load power circuit.
R: Resistor of approximately the same resistance value as the load
C: 0.1 to 1 µF

RCOM

Protection Circuit B
Surge Killer
Output Q

Inductive Load

R
COM

or

–

C

This protection circuit can be used for both AC and DC load power
circuits.
R: Resistor of approximately the same resistance value as the load
C: 0.1 to 1 µF+

Protection Circuit C

This protection circuit can be used for DC load power circuits.
Output Q

Inductive Load

Use a diode with the following ratings.
Reverse withstand voltage:

DiodePower voltage of the load circuit  10

Forward current:More than the load current

– +

COM

Protection Circuit D

Output Q

Inductive Load

This protection circuit can be used for both AC and DC load power
circuits.

Varistor
COM

– +
or

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3-11

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GPower Supply
This section describes how to connect a power supply to the SmartAXIS. The SmartAXIS is available in both AC and DC powertypes.

Caution Use a power supply of the rated value. Use of the wrong power supply may cause fire or malfunction.
 Ensure that the power voltage to the SmartAXIS does not exceed the allowable power voltage range described in the

power supply specifications. The SmartAXIS may run and stop repeatedly within this voltage range, particularly if thepower voltage turns on or off very slowly.
 Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the power line outside the SmartAXIS. This is required when equipment

containing the SmartAXIS is destined for Europe.

AC Power Type
Connect the power supply to the AC power types, as shown below.
Example: FT1A-*12**C
85 to 264V AC

Fuse

When Power Is Turned Off
The AC power types detect a power failure when the power voltage drops below 85V AC.
A momentary power interruption of 10ms or less is not recognized as a power failure when the power voltage is at the rated
voltage.
Inrush Current at Powerup
When the SmartAXIS is powered up, there is an inrush current of a maximum of 35A flows. Use a power supply with sufficient
capacity.

DC Power Type
Connect the power supply to the DC power types as shown below.
Example: FT1A-*12**A
20.4 to 28.8V DC

FuseWhen Power Is Turned Off
The DC power types detect a power failure when the power voltage drops below 20.4V DC.
A momentary power interruption of 10ms or less is not recognized as a power failure when the power voltage is at the rated
voltage.
Inrush Current at Powerup
When the SmartAXIS is powered up, there is an inrush current of a maximum of 30A flows. Use a power supply with sufficient
capacity.

3-12

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GPower Supply Wiring
When connecting the power supply, be sure to take care of the following: Use a stranded wire of UL1015 AWG22 or UL1007 AWG18 for power supply wiring. Make the power supply wiring as short as possible.
 Run the power supply wiring as far away as possible from motor lines.


is the protective ground terminal. To prevent electric shocks, ground the terminal with D-type ground (type 3: ground resistance of 100Ω
maximum).

is the functional ground terminal. To prevent malfunction or breakdown of the SmartAXIS due to noise, ground the terminal with D-typeground (class 3: ground resistance of 100Ω maximum).

 When connecting a stranded wire or multiple wires to a terminal block, use a ferrule.
 Use the SmartAXIS within the specifications of ratings and environmental conditions. Failure to do so may cause the

CautionSmartAXIS to break down or reduce product life.
 Be sure to connect the grounding wire to a proper ground, otherwise electrical shocks may be caused.
 Do not touch live terminals, otherwise electrical shocks may be caused.
 When connecting the power supply, tighten the terminal screws with torque of 0.5N·m (5kgf·cm).

Grounding
When grounding the power supply, be sure to take care of the following: Do not use the common ground for the SmartAXIS and motor equipment. The common ground can be used only when the length ofgrounding wires for those devices are the same.
 Use a ground wire of UL1007 AWG16.
 Use a thick wire for grounding the SmartAXIS and make the grounding wire as short as possible to make sure that noises from external

devices can be conducted to the ground effectively.
 As shown below, external devices generating noise must be separated from the SmartAXIS and grounded with the D-type ground (class 3).
 Make the length of the grounding wire for the SmartAXIS as short as possible.

SmartAXIS

Inverter orsimilar external
deviceD-type ground(class 3)

SmartAXISA

Inverter orsimilar external
deviceSmartAXIS

Inverter orsimilar external
deviceB
Length A = B

D-type ground(class 3)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3-13

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Terminal Connection
This section describes types of terminals and how to use them.
When connecting stranded wire or multiple solid wires to a terminal block, use appropriate ferrule for the terminal block.

Caution Do not touch live terminals, otherwise electrical shocks may be caused.
 When the power is on, terminals to which external devices are connected may be heated. Do not touch terminals

immediately after the power is turned off.
 Do not touch terminals immediately after the power is turned off, otherwise electrical shocks may be caused.
 When connecting a stranded wire or multiple solid wires to a screw terminal block, use a ferrule. Otherwise the wire

may slip off the screw terminal block.
 When using ferrules, insert a wire to the bottom of the ferrule and crimp the ferrule.

Terminals for Terminal Blocks
Crimp ferrules using an appropriate tool according to the size of ferrules. Cut the end of the wire to the same length or about 0.5mm longer than the ferrule.
Ensure that the core wire does not protrude at the end of the shield and there are no whiskers.

2-wire connection

1-wire connection

Cable (AWG 24 to 18)

Cable (AWG 22 to 18)

10 to 11 mm
Length of stripped wire
Single Wire:
AWG 16 to 12 (UL)
Stranded Wire: AWG 12 to 14 (JIS)

Correct

0 to 0.5 mm
DamageWhiskerCore wire is visible

Stripped wire is too short

The ferrules and crimping tools below can be used.
The recommended ferrules and crimping tools are manufactured by IDEC (top), Weidmüller (middle) or Phoenix Contact (bottom).
FerrulesQuantity of Cables
UL1007 AWG16UL1007 AWG18

UL1015 AWG22UL2464 AWG24

3-14

For 1-wireconnection

Model Number (Order Number)
IDEC

Weidmüller

Phoenix Contact

S3TL-H15-14WR (S3TL-H15-14WR)

H1.5/14D SW (9019120000)
H1.5/14 R (0463100000)

AI 1,5-8 BK (3200043)

For 1-wireconnection

S3TL-H10-14WY (S3TL-H10-14WY)

H1.0/14D R (9019080000)
H1.0/14 GE (0463000000)

AI 1-8 RD (3200030)

For 2-wireconnection

S3TL-J075-14WW(S3TL-J075-14WW)

H0.75/14D ZH GR (9037410000)
H0.75/14 ZH W (9037230000)

AI-TWIN 2×0,75-8 GY (3200807)

For 1-wireconnection

S3TL-H05-14WA (S3TL-H05-14WA)

H0.5/14D W (9019010000)
H0.5/14 OR (0690700000)

AI 0,5-8 WH (3200014)

For 2-wireconnection

S3TL-J05-14WA (S3TL-J05-14WA)

H0.5/14D ZH W (9037380000)
H0.5/14 ZH OR (9037200000)

AI-TWIN 2×0,5-8 WH (3200933)

For 1-wireconnection

S3TL-H025-12WJ (S3TL-H025-12WJ)

H0.25/12T GE (9021020000)

AI 0,25-8 YE (3203037)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Crimping Tools
Tool Name
Crimping Tool

Model Number (Order Number)
IDEC

Weidmüller

S3TL-CR06D (S3TL-CR06D)
S3TL-CR04T (S3TL-CR04T)

PZ 6 Roto L (1444050000)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Phoenix Contact
CRIMPFOX 6 (1212034)

3-15

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GSecuring the Panel Attachment USB Extension Cable
Using the panel attachment USB extension cable*1 makes it possible to perform maintenance on a SmartAXIS installed in a control
panel from the surface of the panel. When using the panel attachment USB extension cable, we recommend securing it to the USB
port cover with a cable tie*2 so that it does not come loose from the SmartAXIS.
This section describes the procedure to secure the USB extension cable to the USB cover.
1. Open the SmartAXIS USB port cover and plug the panel attachment USB extension cable into the USB port.

2. Wrap the cable tie around the USB port cover and the panel attachment USB extension cable.

3. The cable tie can also be inserted through the holes on the USB port cover.

4. Tighten the loop until it is the suitable size and trim the excess cable tie using wire cutters.
Note 1: We recommend the panel attachment USB extension cable (part no.: HG9Z-XCE21).
Note 2: HellermanTyton cable tie T18R-1000 is recommended.

3-16

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
I ntroduction
This chapter describes basic procedures for operating WindLDR, programming and maintenance software for the SmartAXIS Pro/
Lite series.
Note: SmartAXIS Touch series use WindO/I-NV3 software for programming. See the “SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual” for instructions for
programming and basic operation of WindO/I-NV3 with the Touch series.

Start WindLDR
1. Launch WindLDR.

■ Windows 10
Click Start button and then > All Apps > IDEC Automation Organizer > WindLDR.
■ Windows 8
Click WindLDR in the tiles on the Start screen.
■ Windows 7
Click Start and then Programs > IDEC Automation Organizer > WindLDR.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-1

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
PLC Selection
Before programming a user program on WindLDR, select a PLC type.
1. Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar, then select PLC Type.

The PLC Selection dialog box appears.

Press this button, then the same PLC will be selected
as default when WindLDR is started next time.

PLC Selection Option

SmartAXIS
Type No.

FT1A-12FT1A-H12RA
FT1A-B12RA
FT1A-H12RC
FT1A-B12RC

FT1A-24

FT1A-H24RA
FT1A-B24RA
FT1A-H24RC
FT1A-B24RC

FT1A-40

FT1A-H40RKA
FT1A-H40RSA
FT1A-B40RKA
FT1A-B40RSA
FT1A-H40RC
FT1A-B40RC

FT1A-48

FT1A-H48KA
FT1A-H48SAFT1A-B48KA
FT1A-B48SA
FT1A-H48KC
FT1A-H48SC
FT1A-B48KC
FT1A-B48SC

2. Select a PLC type in the selection box and the programming language to use.
3. Click OK.

PLC selection is now complete. For the procedure to create the ladder program, see "Create Ladder Program" on page 4-3. For
the procedure to create the ladder program, see "Create FBD Program" on page 4-7.

4-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Create Program
Create Ladder ProgramThis section describes the procedure for creating a simple ladder program in WindLDR.
Note: See SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual for details on basic and advanced instructions.

Sample User Program
Create a simple program using WindLDR. The sample program performs the following operation:
When only input I0 is turned on, output Q0 is turned on.
When only input I1 is turned on, output Q1 is turned on.
When both inputs I0 and I1 are turned on, output Q2 flashes in 1-sec increments.
Rung No.

Input I0

Input I1

1

ON

OFF

Output Q0 is turned ON.

Output Operation

2

OFF

ON

Output Q1 is turned ON.

3

ON

ON

Output Q2 flashes in 1-sec increments.

Note: One collection of a group of instructions that control output or advanced instructions is called a rung. WindLDR manages programs in rungunits. Function descriptions can be configured as rung comments for individual rungs.

Start WindLDR
From the Start menu of Windows, select Programs > IDEC Automation Organizer > WindLDR.
WindLDR starts and a blank ladder editing screen appears with menus and tool bars shown on top of the screen.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-3

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Edit User Program Rung by Rung
Start the user program with the LOD instruction by inserting a NO contact of input I0.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > A (Normally Open).

2. Move the mouse pointer to the first column of the first line where you want to insert a NO contact, and click the left mousebutton.

Note: Another method to insert a NO (or NC) contact is to move the mouse pointer where you want to insert the contact, and type A (or B).

The Normally Open dialog box appears.

4-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
3. Enter I0 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

A NO contact of input I0 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line.
Next, program the ANDN instruction by inserting a NC contact of input I1.
4. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > B (Normally Closed).
5. Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact, and click the left

mouse button.
The Normally Closed dialog box appears.

6. Enter I1 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

An NC contact of input I1 is programmed in the second column of the first ladder line.
At the end of the first ladder line, program the OUT instruction by inserting a NO coil of output Q0.
7. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > OUT (Output).
8. Move the mouse pointer to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil, and click the left

mouse button.

Note: Another method to insert an instruction (either basic or advanced) is to type the instruction symbol, OUT, where you want to insert the
instruction.

The Output dialog box appears.
9. Enter Q0 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

A NO output coil of output Q0 is programmed in the right-most column of the first ladder line. This completes programming forrung 1.

Continue programming for rungs 2 and 3 by repeating similar procedures.
A new rung is inserted by pressing the Enter key while the cursor is on the preceding rung. A new rung can also be inserted
by selecting Home > Append > Append a Rung.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-5

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
When completed, the ladder program looks like below.

To insert a new ladder line without
creating a new rung, press the down arrow
key when the cursor is on the last line orpress the right arrow key when the cursor
is at the right-most column of the last line.

4-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Create FBD ProgramThis section describes the procedure for creating a sample FBD program in WindLDR.
Note: For details on each FB, see the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

Create a program that operates in the following manner.
When both input I0 and input I1 are on, output Q0 turns on.

When either input I1 or input I2 is on, output Q1 continues to turn on and off in a one second cycle.
Circuit block

I0

I1

I2

Q0

ON

ON

―

Turn output Q0 on

―

OFF

ON

―

ON

OFF

Turn on and off the output Q1 continuously in a one
second cycle

Q1

ActionNote: The output FB and all the FBs connected on the left side of the input connector of the output FB are called the circuit block. The output stateof the output FB is the execution result of a single circuit block.

Insert input I0
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, click Home > Function Block > Terminal > I (Digital Input).

2. Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor and click the left mouse button.

Input I0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-7

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Insert the AND (logical AND) FB
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, click Home > Function Block > Basic > AND (Logical AND).

2. Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor and click the left mouse button.

AND B0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer.

4-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Connect input I0 and AND B0 with a connection line
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, click Home > Line > Draw Line.

2. Move the mouse pointer to the input I0 output connector.

3. Click the left mouse button and drag the line to the AND B0 input 1 connector.

4. Release the mouse button.

The output connector of the input I0 and the input 1 connector of the AND B0 are connected.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-9

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Insert output Q0 and connect it to the output connector of AND B0
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, click Home > Function Block > Terminal > Q (Digital Output).

2. Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor and click.

Output Q0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer.
3. Connect the output connector of AND B0 and input connector of the output Q0 with a connection line.

Connect them in the same manner as "Connect input I0 and AND B0 with a connection line" on page 4-9.

Insert input I1 and connect it to the input 2 of AND B0
Insert input I1 in the same manner as "Insert input I0" on page 4-7 and connect it to the input 2 of AND B0 with a connection linein the same manner as "Connect input I0 and AND B0 with a connection line" on page 4-9.

4-10

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Insert input I2 and XOR B1. Connect input I1 and I2 to the inputs 1 and 2 of XOR B1.

The output connector of the FB can be connected to multiple FB input connectors. Multiple output connectors of FBs cannot be
connected to a single input connector of an FB.

Insert special internal relay M8121, AND B2, and output Q1 and connect them.
Note: M8121 is a special internal relay that continuously turns on and off in a one second cycle. For details on the special internal relay, see "Special
Internal Relay Device Addresses" on page 7-2.

Creating the sample FBD program is now complete.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-11

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Convert Program
The program can be checked whether it contains any user program syntax error.
From the menu bar, select Home > Convert (Program group).
When the instruction/FB symbols are connected correctly, the program conversion is completed successfully. If any error is found,the errors are listed on the Info Window. Then, make corrections as necessary.

Convert Ladder Program

Convert FBD Program

4-12

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Protect Project
The ladder/FBD program created in WindLDR is managed as a project file.
You can set a password for your project and save it to protect the project file from being viewed or edited by a third party. Thissection describes the operating procedure to set a password to a project.
(application) button > Property.

1. Click

The Property Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click the Password tab, and in the Project Password group, select the Configure password to the project check box.

3. Set a password.
Note:• The length of the password is 4 to 15 characters.
• Use the Show Passwords check box to show or hide the password. When the Show Passwords check box is selected, the set password
is displayed.
• Manage the password appropriately so that third parties do not know it. If you forget the password of a project, you can no longer open thatproject file.
• A project with a password can only be downloaded to the SmartAXIS with the following system software versions.
SmartAXIS
Pro
Lite

System Software
Version 2.40 or later

4. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

Save Project
Select the WindLDR application button at the upper-left corner of the WindLDR screen, followed by Save, and type TEST01 in theFile Name field. Change the Folder or Drive as necessary.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-13

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Simulate Operation
Before downloading the user program, you can simulate the operation on the WindLDR screen without connecting the SmartAXIS.

Ladder Program
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Simulation. The Simulation screen appears.
2. To change an input status, place the mouse pointer on the input and right-click the mouse. In the pop-up menu, select Set or

Reset to set or reset the input.

Notes:
 The input status can also be changed by selecting the input and double-clicking on it.


4-14

To quit simulation, from the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Simulation.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CSFBD Program
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Simulation.
2. Double-click the input FB to change the state.

When you turn on both input I0 and input I1, output Q0 turns on.

When you turn on either input I1 or input I2, output Q1 continues to turn on and off in a one second cycle.

Notes:
To quit simulation, from the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Simulation.

 You can check the state of the input connectors and output connectors of each FB. When input connectors, output connectors, andconnection lines are in red, they are on. Blue indicates off.
 For details on the state of unconnected input connectors of the FBs, see the " SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-15

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Download Program
While WindLDR is running on a PLC, you can download the user program to the SmartAXIS.
User programs can be downloaded to the SmartAXIS from WindLDR using USB or Ethernet. This section describes the all theprocedures from configuring communication settings to downloading a user program to the SmartAXIS via USB.
To use a USB, the SmartAXIS USB port must be connected to a computer using a USB cable.
Windows computer

SmartAXIS Pro

USB port

USB cable
HG9Z-XCM42 USB maintenance cable

Type A plug

Mini-B plug
USB port(USB 2.0 Mini-B connector)

Note: To communicate with the SmartAXIS via a USB connection, the dedicated USB driver must be installed in the computer. For the driver
installation procedure, see "How to install USB driver". Click ▼ to the right of theicon at the top right corner of the WindLDR window and click
How to install USB driver to display How to install USB driver.

1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Set Up.
2. The Communication Settings dialog box appears. Click the USB tab and then click OK.

The communication method is now set to USB. Next, download a user program.

3. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Download. The Download dialog box appears, then click OK. The user

program is downloaded to the SmartAXIS.

Note: The Download dialog box can also be opened by
selecting Home > Download.

Note: When downloading a user program, all values andselections in the Function Area Settings are also
downloaded to the SmartAXIS. For details on function
settings, see "Special Functions" on page 5-1.

4-16

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Monitor Operation
Another powerful function of WindLDR is to monitor the PLC operation on the computer. The input and output statuses of thesample program can be monitored in the ladder diagram.

Ladder Program
From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on, the ladder diagram on the monitor screen looks as follows:

Rung 1:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,
output Q0 is turned off.
Rung 2:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,
output Q1 is turned off.
Rung 3:
When both input I0 and I1 are on,internal relay M10 is turned on.
M8121 is the 1-sec clock special
internal relay.
While M10 is on, output Q2 flashes
in 1-sec increments.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-17

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CSFBD Program
1. After the program is successfully downloaded, from the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.

The SmartAXIS state is displayed on the WindLDR screen.

WindLDR
2. Check the following operations.
When you turn on both input I0 and input I1, output Q0 turns on.

When you turn on either input I1 or input I2, output Q1 continues to turn on and off in a one second cycle.

Checking the operation is now complete.
Notes:
 You can check the state of the input connectors and output connectors of each FB. When input connectors, output connectors, andconnection lines are in red, they are on. Blue indicates off.
 For details on the state of unconnected input connectors of the FBs, see the " SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

Exit WindLDRWhen you have completed monitoring, you can exit WindLDR either directly from the monitor screen or from the editing screen. In
both cases, from the WindLDR application button, click Exit WindLDR.

4-18

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Start/Stop Operation
This section describes operations to start and stop the SmartAXIS and to use the stop and reset inputs.

Caution Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the SmartAXIS. Incorrect operation of the SmartAXIS may cause

machine damage or accidents.

Start/Stop Schematic
The start/stop circuit of the SmartAXIS consists of threeblocks; power supply, M8000 (start control special
internal relay), and stop/reset inputs. Each block can beused to start and stop the SmartAXIS while the othertwo blocks are set to run the SmartAXIS.

Power
Supply

M8000
Start Control
WindLDR

Stop
Input

Reset
Input

Start
PLC

Start/Stop Operation Using WindLDRThe SmartAXIS can be started and stopped using WindLDR run on a Windows computer connected to the SmartAXIS. When theStart button is pressed in the menu bar shown below, start control special internal relay M8000 is turned on to start the
SmartAXIS. When the Stop button is pressed, M8000 is turned off to stop the SmartAXIS.
1. Connect the computer to the SmartAXIS, start WindLDR, and power up the SmartAXIS.
2. Check that a stop input is not designated using Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Stop and Reset Inputs. See "Stop

Input and Reset Input" on page 5-4.

Note: When a stop input is designated, the SmartAXIS cannot be started or stopped by turning start control special internal relay M8000 on or off.

3. Select Online from the WindLDR menu bar.

The Online tab appears.

4. Click the Start button to start operation, then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned on.
5. Click the Stop button to stop operation, then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned off.

The PLC operation can also be started and stopped while WindLDR is in the monitor mode. Select Online > Monitor >Monitor and click the Start or Stop button.

Note: Special internal relay M8000 is a keep type internal relay and stores the status when power is turned off. M8000 retains its previous statuswhen power is turned on again. However, when the backup battery is dead, M8000 loses the stored status, and can be turned on or off asprogrammed when the SmartAXIS is powered up. The selection is made in Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Run/Stop Selection at
Memory Backup Error. See "Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error" on page 5-5.

The backup duration is approximately 30 days (typical) at 25°C after the backup battery is fully charged.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4-19

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Start/Stop Operation Using the Power Supply
The SmartAXIS can be started and stopped by turning power on and off.
1. Power up the SmartAXIS to start operation.
2. Turn power on and off to start and stop operation.

Order of Powerup and Powerdown
To turn the power on, turn on the SmartAXIS and I/O sides atthe same time, or turn on the I/O side first, followed by the
SmartAXIS side.

ON

I/O Side PowerOFF

SmartAXIS Power

OFF

ON

To turn the power off, turn off the SmartAXIS and I/O sides atthe same time, or turn off the SmartAXIS side first, followed by
the I/O side.

0 sec or more

0 sec or more

Start/Stop Operation Using Stop Input and Reset Input
Any input terminal available on the SmartAXIS can be designated as a stop or reset input using the Function Area Settings. The
procedure for selecting stop and reset inputs is described "Stop Input and Reset Input" on page 5-4.
Note: When using a stop and/or reset input to start and stop operation, make sure that start control special internal relay M8000 is on. If M8000 isoff, the SmartAXIS does not start operation when the stop or reset input is turned off. M8000 is not turned on or off when the stop and/or reset
input is turned on or off.

When a stop or reset input is turned on during program operation, the SmartAXIS stops operation, and all outputs are turned off.
The reset input has priority over the stop input.

System Statuses at Stop, Reset, and Restart
The system statuses during running, stop, reset, and restart after stopping are listed below:

Mode

OutputInternal Relay, Shift
Register, Counter,
Data Register
Keep Type

Clear TypeSpecialInternal
Relay

Special Data
Register

NonMaintained
Data
Register

Timer
Current
Value

Run

OperatingOperatingOperatingOperatingOperatingOperatingOperating

Stop

OFF

Unchanged

Unchanged

See Chapter 7

Unchanged

Unchanged

Unchanged

RestartUnchanged

Unchanged

OFF/
Reset to zero

Unchanged

Unchanged

Unchanged

Reset to preset

Reset(Reset input ON)

OFF

OFF/
Reset to zeroOFF/
Reset to zero

Unchanged

Unchanged

OFF/
Reset to zero

Reset to zero

Power OFFOFF

Unchanged

Unchanged

See Chapter 7

Unchanged

OFF/
Reset to zero

Reset to zero

4-20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
I ntroduction
The SmartAXIS supports many features in addition to instructions/FB.
For functions that require advanced setup including the functions to upload, download, and protect user programs and the network
settings, first configure those settings on the Function Area Settings dialog, and then download the user program to the
SmartAXIS. Constant scan time and forced I/O can be used without advanced setup.
This chapter describes the SmartAXIS special functions, how to configure them, and examples of their use.

Function List
Function nameStop input
Reset input
Run/stop selection atmemory backup error
Run/stop selection at
power upKeep and clear devices
Data register ROM backup
High-speed counter
Catch inputInterrupt input
Frequency measurement
Input filter
Analog input
Timer interrupt
Forced I/O function
Communication ports
Memory cartridge
SD memory card
Backlight ON Time
Monitoring Ladder Program
Message Settings
32-bit data storage setting
User program protection
Watchdog timer settings
Constant scan time
Daylight savings time
Clock function
Network settings
Connection settings
Remote host list

Overview
The SmartAXIS can be started/stopped with a specified input.
The device values of the SmartAXIS can be cleared with a specified input.
Whether to start or stop the SmartAXIS when the SmartAXIS is powered up
after the "keep" data in the RAM has been lost can be specified.
Whether to start or stop the SmartAXIS regardless of the M8000 status when
the SmartAXIS is powered up can be specified.
Whether to clear or keep the device values, such as counter current values,
when the SmartAXIS starts running can be specified.
Initializes data registers with values backed up in ROM.
The high-speed counters can be used to count input pulses from rotary
encoders or proximity switches regardless of the scan time.
The catch input can be used to receive short pulses from sensors regardlessof the scan time.
When a quick response to an external input is required, such as in positioning
control, the interrupt input can call a subroutine to execute an interrupt program.
The pulse frequency of input signals to input terminals can be counted
regardless of the scan time.
The input filter rejects short input pulses when the SmartAXIS is used with
input signals containing noises.
Analog voltage inputs, such as inputs from pressure sensors, can be read andstored in special data registers as digital values.
When executing the same program repeatedly regardless of the scan time isrequired, the timer interrupt can call a subroutine at specified time interval.
The inputs or outputs of the SmartAXIS can forcibly be turned on or off
regardless of the actual inputs and outputs status.
Communication mode and parameters for each communication port can be
configured for the SmartAXIS to communicate with external devices.
The user program in a memory cartridge can be downloaded to the ROM in
the SmartAXIS when the SmartAXIS is powered on.
DLOG and TRACE instructions/FBs can save the device values in CSV files andstore those files in an SD memory card inserted to the SmartAXIS.
SmartAXIS Pro LCD backlight on time setting
Settings for running the ladder program monitor on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD
Common settings for messages displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD with the
MSG instruction/FB
The order of upper and lower words for 32-bit data can be specified.
The user program in the SmartAXIS can be protected with a password against
the user program upload or download.
The watchdog timer monitors the SmartAXIS operation and the watchdog
time preset value can be changed.
The scan time of the SmartAXIS can be made constant by specifying theconstant scan time.
The internal clock of the SmartAXIS can automatically be adjusted according
to the configured daylight saving time period.
The SmartAXIS can operate according to the current date and time and be
used in applications, such as lighting or air conditioning.
Configuring the network settings of the SmartAXIS is required to connect the
SmartAXIS to the network.
Communication mode and parameters for the Ethernet communication can be
configured for each connection so that the SmartAXIS can communicate withother network devices over the Ethernet.
The remote host devices on the network that the SmartAXIS communicateswith can be registered and managed in the Remote Host List.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Reference
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-6

Setup location

Function area
settings

5-7
5-9

Special internal relays,
Special data registers

5-13
5-32
5-34
5-36

Function area
settings

5-38
5-39
5-41
5-43
5-46
5-49
5-52

Monitor
Function area
settings
Instructions/FB

5-57
5-58
5-60
5-62

Function area
settings

5-64
5-67
5-68
5-69
5-70
5-73
5-74
5-76

Special dataregisters
Function area
settings
Instructions/FB

Function area
settings

Remote host list

5-1

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Function Area Settings
Various special functions of the SmartAXIS are configured in the Function Area Settings of WindLDR PLC programming software.

From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

Function Description
Run/Stop Control

Configure the following run/stop control settings.
 Stop input
 Reset input
 Run/stop selection at memory backup error
 Run/stop selection at power up

Memory Backup

When the SmartAXIS starts running, device values in the RAM are kept or cleared. Configure the keep/
clear settings for the following devices.
 Internal relays
 Shift registers
 Counters Data registers

Input Configuration

Configure the inputs to use special functions, such as the input filters or high-speed counters.
 High-speed counter Catch input
 Interrupt input
 Frequency measurement
 Input filter
 Analog input
 Timer interrupt

5-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Communication Ports

Configure the communication ports for the SmartAXIS to communicate with external devices equippedwith RS232C or RS485 ports.
 Maintenance communication
 User communication
 Modbus RTU master/slave

Cartridges

Downloads the user program in a memory cartridge to the SmartAXIS module's ROM.

LCD Settings

Configure the LCD settings for the SmartAXIS.
 Backlight ON Time Monitoring Ladder Program Message Settings

Device Settings

Configure the order to store the upper and lower words for 32-bit data.

Program Protection

Applies the protection to the user program by configuring a password so unauthorized users cannot
inadvertently upload or download it.

Self Diagnostic

Configure the watchdog timer monitoring the operating status of the SmartAXIS.

Calendar & Clock

The SmartAXIS is equipped with an internal clock and its calendar data (year, month, day, day of theweek) and clock data (hour, minute, second) can be used in user programs. Daylight savings time canalso be configured for the internal clock.

Network Settings

Configure the network settings to connect the SmartAXIS to the network using the Ethernet port.

Connection Settings

Configure server/client communication used by the SmartAXIS Ethernet port.
 Maintenance communication server User communication server/client Modbus TCP communication server/client Remote I/O masterS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-3

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Stop Input and Reset Input
As described on "Start/Stop Operation" on page 4-19, the SmartAXIS can be started and stopped using a stop input or reset input,
which can be designated from the Function Area Settings menu. When the designated stop or reset input is turned on, theSmartAXIS stops operation. For the system statuses in the stop and reset modes, see "Start/Stop Operation Using the Power
Supply" on page 4-20.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing any ofthese settings.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Run/Stop Control.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Run/Stop Control appears.

2. Click the check box under the Stop and Reset Inputs.
Stop Input:

Click the check box on the left of Use Stop Input and type a desired input number available on the SmartAXIS in the Stop
Input field.

Reset Input:

Click the check box on the left of Use Reset Input and type a desired reset number available on the SmartAXIS in the
Reset Input field.

This example designates
input I0 as a stop input
and input I1 as a reset
input.

Resets all Function Area Settingsvalues to defaults.
Default:

No stop and reset inputs are designated.

3. Click the OK button.

5-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error
Start control special internal relay M8000 maintains its status when the SmartAXIS is powered down. After the SmartAXIS has
been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration, the data designated to be maintained during power failure is lost.
The Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error dialog box is used to select whether to start or stop the SmartAXIS whenattempting to restart operation after the “keep” data in the SmartAXIS RAM has been lost.
When memory backup error occurs, Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error is more preferred than Run/Stop Selection atPower Up.
When a built-in lithium battery is fully charged, data of internal relays, shift registers, counters, and data registers stored in the
RAM are maintained for approximately 30 days.
Since this setting relates to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing this setting.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Run/Stop Control.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Run/Stop Control appears.

2. Click the Run or Stop button.
Run (Default):

Click the button on the left to start the SmartAXIS at memory backup error.

Stop:

Click the button on the right to stop the SmartAXIS when attempting to start at memory backup error.
When the SmartAXIS does not start because of the Stop selection, the SmartAXIS cannot be started alone, then the
SmartAXIS can still be started by sending a start command from WindLDR to turn on start control special internal relay
M8000. For start/stop operation, see "Start/Stop Operation" on page 4-19.

Resets all Function Area Settingsvalues to defaults.

3. Click the OK button.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-5

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Run/Stop Selection at Power Up
Start control special internal relay M8000 maintains its status when the SmartAXIS is powered down. When powered up, theSmartAXIS is started or stopped according to the M8000 status. The Run/Stop Selection at Power Up is used to select whether tostart or stop the SmartAXIS regardless of the M8000 status when the SmartAXIS is powered up.
When a memory cartridge is installed on a SmartAXIS, the SmartAXIS is started or stopped according to the M8000 status of theSmartAXIS. The SmartAXIS can always be started regardless of the M8000 status by using Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.
WindLDR software is not needed to start the SmartAXIS.
Stop and Reset inputs have priority over start control special internal relay M8000. When the memory backup error occurs, theSmartAXIS is started or stopped according to Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error regardless of Run/Stop Selection atPower Up. For start/stop operation, see "Start/Stop Operation" on page 4-19.
Since this settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing thissettings.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Run/Stop Control.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Run/Stop Control appears.

2. Click the button under Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.
Keep Run/Stop State at Power Down (Default):
Click this button to keep the run/stop status at power down when the SmartAXIS is powered up.
Run (M8000 is turned on):Click this button to always start the SmartAXIS when the SmartAXIS is powered up.
Stop (M8000 is turned off):
Click this button to always stop the SmartAXIS when the SmartAXIS is powered up.

This example designates
Keep Run/Stop Status atPower Down.

Resets all Function Area Settingsvalues to defaults.

3. Click the OK button.

5-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Keep Designation for Internal Relays, Shift Registers, Counters, and Data Registers
The statuses of internal relays and shift register bits are usually cleared at startup. It is also possible to designate all or a block ofconsecutive internal relays or shift register bits as “keep” types. Counter current values and data register values are usually
maintained at powerup. It is also possible to designate all or a block of consecutive counters and data registers as “clear” types.
When the SmartAXIS is stopped, these statuses and values are maintained. When the SmartAXIS is reset by turning on adesignated reset input, these statues and values are cleared despite the settings in the Configure Keep/Clear Settings dialog box
shown below. The keep/clear settings in this dialog box are not maintained when restarting the SmartAXIS.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing any ofthese settings.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Memory Backup.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Configure Keep/Clear Settings appears.

2. Click the buttons under Internal Relay, Shift Register, Counter, and Data Register to clear all, keep all, or keep/clear specified

range as required.

Resets all Function Area Settingsvalues to defaults.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-7

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Internal Relay ‘Keep’ Designation
Clear All:

All internal relay statuses are cleared at startup (default).

Keep All:

All internal relay statuses are maintained at startup.

Keep Specified Range:

A specified range of internal relays are maintained at startup. Enter the start “keep” number in the left field andthe end “keep” number in the right field. The start “keep” number must be smaller than or equal to the end“keep” number.
Valid internal relay numbers are M0 through M1277. Special internal relays cannot be designated.

Start Keep Number

End Keep Number ( Start Keep Number)

When a range of M50 through M100 is designated as shown in the example above, M50 through M100 are keeptypes, M0 through M47 and M101 through M1277 are clear types.

Shift Register ‘Keep’ Designation
Clear All:All shift register bit statuses are cleared at startup (default).

Keep All:All shift register bit statuses are maintained at startup.

Keep Specified Range:

A specified range of shift register bits are maintained at startup. Enter the start “keep” number in the left field
and the end “keep” number in the right field. The start “keep” number must be smaller than or equal to the end“keep” number.
Valid shift register bit numbers are R0 through R127.
When a range of R17 through R32 is designated, R17 through R32 are keep types, R0 through R16 and R33
through R127 are clear types.

Counter ‘Clear’ Designation
Keep All:All counter current values are maintained at startup (default).

Clear All:All counter current values are cleared at startup.

Clear Specified Range:

A specified range of counter current values are cleared at startup. Enter the start “clear” number in the left field
and the end “clear” number in the right field. The start “clear” number must be smaller than or equal to the end“clear” number.
Valid counter numbers are C0 through C199.
When a range of C0 through C10 is designated, C0 through C10 are clear types, and C11 through C199 are keeptypes.

Data Register ‘Clear’ Designation
Keep All:All data register values are maintained at startup (default).

Clear All:All data register values are cleared at startup.

Clear Specified Range:

A specified range of data register values are cleared at startup. Enter the start “clear” number in the left field andthe end “clear” number in the right field. The start “clear” number must be smaller than or equal to the end“clear” number.
Valid data register numbers are D0 through D1999. Special data registers cannot be designated.
When a range of D100 through D1999 is designated, D0 through D99 are keep types, and D100 through D1999
are clear types.

For the range of data registers that support the keep designation, see Chapter 7 "Device Addresses" - "Device Addresses" on page7-1.
Notes:
 Relays and registers specified as Clear All or Clear Specified Range are cleared when the SmartAXIS starts operation. The values while

the power is off are retained until the power is turned on and operation is started.
 Keep/clear settings cannot be configured for special data registers. They operate the same as Clear All.
 Keep/clear settings cannot be configured for special internal relays. For operation when the power is shut off and when stopped, see Chapter

7 "Device Addresses" - "Special Internal Relays" on page 7-2.

5-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Data Register ROM Backup
This section describes data register ROM backup.

Data Register ROM Backup Overview

Data register ROM backup is a function to write data register values to ROM (non-volatile memory), and then read the values in
ROM and store them in data registers at the desired timing. The SmartAXIS stores the device values using an internal backup
battery (lithium secondary battery). However, if the backup battery is dead due to a long term power loss, a memory backup error
will occur and the device values will be lost. In this situation, if you use data register ROM backup, you can initialize the dataregisters with the values backed up in ROM. When a memory cartridge is installed, data is written to and read from the memory
cartridge.*1*1 When you use the Lite and a memory cartridge is not installed on the Lite, data register ROM backup cannot be used.

■Applicable data registers
The applicable data registers are as follows.
Model number
Data registers

12-I/O type24-, 40-, 48-I/O types

D0000 to D0399

D0000 to D1999■ROM region
The ROM region that is used is as follows.

Pro
Lite

Model
name

Not installed

Memory cartridge

Pro
None (The data register ROM backup cannot be used.)

Installed

Memory cartridge
Memory cartridge■Special devices
Special internal relays
Device
M8154
M8155

Description
When M8154 is on at the end of scan, the values of all data registers are written to ROM. After all values are written,
the execution status is stored in D8133 and M8154 turns off.
When M8155 is on at the end of scan, the values in the corresponding ROM are read and stored to the data registers
specified by D8184 (starting address to read) and D8185 (number of registers to read). After all values are read, theexecution status is stored in D8133 and M8155 turns off.

Special data registers
Device

D8133

D8184
D8185

Description
Stores the execution status for writing and reading.
1: Processing
2: Normal termination
3: Cannot access ROM
The following are possible causes: The memory cartridge is not properly installed.
 The ROM of Pro or the memory cartridge installed has failure.
 On the Lite, reading or writing is executed when the memory cartridge is not installed.
4: Invalid values are stored in D8184 (starting address to read) and D8185 (number of registers to read)This error occurs when reading values. The following are possible causes: The number of registers to read is 0.
 The start address to read exceeds the largest data register address.
 The start address to read + the number of registers to read exceeds the largest data register address.
5: Valid data could not be read from ROM
This error occurs when reading. The following are possible causes:
 No values are stored in the ROM.
 Writing values did not finish for a reason such as the power was turned off while writing values.
Stores the start address of the data registers to read.
The value that can be specified is 0 to 399 for the 12-I/O type and 0 to 1999 for the 24-, 40-, 48-I/O types.
Stores the number of data registers to read.
The value that can be specified is 1 to 400 for the 12-I/O type and 1 to 2000 for the 24-, 40-, 48-I/O types.

Note: When M8154 and M8155 are on in the scan end, writing and reading are executed in that order. After executing the read, the execution
status is stored in D8133, and M8154 and M8155 turn off.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-9

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Function Description
Writing the data register values to ROM
When M8154 is on at the end of scan, the values of all of the data registers are written to ROM. After writing values, the execution
status is stored in D8133 and M8154 turns off.
Example: 12-I/O model
Data registers

ROM

D0000

1234

D0000

111

D0001

2345

D0001

222

:

:

:

:

D0398

6789

D0398

888

D0399

7890

D0399

999

M8154 is ON
ROM

Data registers
D0000

1234

D0000

D0001

2345

1234

D0001

:

2345

:

:

:

D0398

6789

D0398

6789

D0399

7890

D0399

7890

400 words

Example: 24-, 40-, 48-I/O model
Data registers

ROM

D0000

1234

D0000

111

D0001

2345

D0001

222

:

:

:

:

D1998

6789

D1998

888

D1999

7890

D1999

999

M8154 is ON
ROM

Data registers

5-10

D0000

1234

D0001

2345

2000 words

D0000

1234

D0001

2345

:

:

:

D1998

6789

D1998

6789

D1999

7890

D1999

7890

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Reading the data register values from ROM
When M8155 turns on at the end of scan, the values in the corresponding ROM are read and stored in the data registers specified
by D8184 (start address to read) and D8185 (number of registers to read). After reading values, the execution status is stored in
D8133 and M8155 turns off.
Example 1: When reading the values of D0100 to D0179 (80 words) with a 12-I/O model, specify D8184=(100) and D8185=(80),and then turn on M8155.
Data registers

ROM

D0000

1234

D0000

111

D0001

2345

D0001

222

:

:

:

:

D0100

440

D0100

10

D0101

441

D0101

20

:

:

:

:

D0178

518

D0178

700

D0179

519

D0179

710

:

:

:

:

D0398

6789

D0398

888

D0399

7890

D0399

999

When D8184=(100)and D8185=(80),M8155 is on

Data registers

ROM

D0000

1234

D0000

111

D0001

2345

D0001

222

:

:

:

:

D0100

10

D0100

10

D0101

20

D0101

20

:

:

D0178

80 words

:

:

700

D0178

700

D0179

710

D0179

710

:

:

:

:

D0398

6789

D0398

888

D0399

7890

D0399

999

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-11

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Example 2: When reading the values of D0800 to D1499 (700 words) with a 24-/40-/48-I/O model, specify D8184=(800) andD8185=(700), and then turn on M8155.
Data registers

ROM

D0000

1234

D0000

111

D0001

2345

D0001

222

:

:

:

:

D0800

440

D0800

10

D0801

441

D0801

20

:

:

:

:

D1498

518

D1498

700

D1499

519

D1499

710

:

:

:

:

D1998

6789

D1998

888

D1999

7890

D1999

999

When D8184=(800)and D8185=(700),
M8155 is on

Data registers

5-12

ROM

D0000

1234

D0000

111

D0001

2345

D0001

222

:

:

:

:

D0800

10

D0800

10

D0801

20

D0801

20

:

:

D1498

700 words

:

:

700

D1498

700

D1499

710

D1499

710

:

:

:

:

D1998

6789

D1998

888

D1999

7890

D1999

999

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
High-Speed Counter
This section describes the high-speed counter for counting high-speed pulses from devices such as rotary encoders and proximity
switches. The high-speed counter is a function that counts high-speed pulses with the SmartAXIS hardware that cannot be read in
the execution of a normal user program. The high-speed counter has a comparator function to compare the current value and apreset value (target value). When the current value and the preset value match, an external output is turned on or an interrupt
program is executed. However, the interrupt program can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming
language.
The high-speed counter has a single-phase high-speed counter and a two-phase high-speed counter.
For the ladder program, to use the high-speed counter, the WindLDR function area settings, data registers, special internal relays,
and special data registers must be configured.
For the FBD program, WindLDR function area settings and high-speed counter (HSC) function block settings are required. For
details on the HSC function block, see Chapter 18 "The special FB" - "HSC (High-speed Counter)" in the "SmartAXIS FBDProgramming Manual".
The AC power type does not support the high-speed counter. In situations where the high-speed counter function is required, use
the DC power type.


Application example
This application example punches holes into a roll of paper at a regular interval. The two pulses (A-phase, B-phase) that carry
the phase difference output from the rotary encoder are counted by the SmartAXIS two-phase high-speed counter.
When the current value reaches the preset value, the specified external output turns on and the perforator punches a hole in theroll of paper.
Paper roll
Paper feed roller
Perforator
Pulse motor

Rotaryencoder

Two-phase pulses

High-speed pulse input

SmartAXIS

Output when count matches

High-speed counter operation modes
The high-speed counter has the following two operation modes:
 Single-phase high-speed counter Two-phase high-speed counter

High-speed counting modes
The high-speed counter has the following four counting modes:
 Adding counter (single-phase high-speed counter) Up/down selection reversible counter (single-phase high-speed counter) 2-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter) 4-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)

Example: The input allocation when external input group 1 is specified as a two-phase high-speed counter
External input
High-speed counter

I0

I1





I2


A-phaseB-phaseExternal clear input (Z-phase)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-13

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
High-speed Counter External Inputs
The SmartAXIS can use a maximum of six single-phase high-speed counters and a maximum of two two-phase high-speed
counters. The 12-I/O type can only use a maximum of four single-phase high-speed counters and a maximum of two dual-phasehigh-speed counters.
Single-phase high-speed counter
The 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types can use external inputs I6 and I7 as single-phase the high-speed counters.
The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I6 and I7 as single-phase high-speed counters. External inputs I6 and I7 are normal
inputs.
Group

4

5

6

External input

I0

1
I1

I2

2
I3

3
I4

I5

I6

I7

Single-phasehigh-speed
counter

Pulse input

Up/down
selection
input (Note)

Pulse input/
external
clear input

Pulse input

Up/down
selection
input (Note)

Pulse input/
external
clear input

Pulse input

Pulse input

Note: Can only be used when the counting mode is specified as the up/down selection reversible counter.

Two-phase high-speed counter
External inputs I0/I1 (group 1) and I3/I4 (group 3) can be used as two-phase high-speed counters. External inputs I2 and I5 canbe used as external clear inputs for group 1 and group 3. In this situation, external inputs I2 and I5 cannot be used as singlephase high-speed counters.
Group
External input
Two-phase
high-speed
counter

4

5

6

I0

1
I1

I2

2
I3

3
I4

I5

I6

I7

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)

External
clear input(Note)(Z-phase)

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)

External
clear input(Note)(Z-phase)——

Note: If not used as the external clear input (Z-phase), group 2 and group 4 can be used as single-phase high-speed counters.

5-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
High-Speed Counter Operation
The high-speed counter turns on an external output or executes an interrupt program when the current value matches the preset
value (target value).
The high-speed counter has two operation modes, the adding counter and the up/down selection reversible counter.
For how to configure the function to turn on an external output, see "Comparison Actions" on page 5-17.
Single-phase high-speed counter
Group 1, group 3 single-phase high-speed counter These groups support the adding counter and the up/down selection reversible counter that can count both up and down.
 These groups support 100 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
 When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, a comparison output turns on or an interrupt

program is executed.
 These groups support resetting the current value by the reset special internal relay or external clear input. When the reset is executed, thecurrent value returns to the reset value specified by the special data registers. For the reset input details, see "Reset input" on page 5-24.
Counting mode

Frequency

Adding counter

Group 1, 3: 100 kHz

Up/down selection
reversible counter

Group 1: 100 kHz
Group 3: 50 kHz

Group 2, group 4, group 5, group 6 single-phase high-speed counter These groups only support the adding counter.
 These groups support 100 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
 When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, an external output turns on or an interrupt programis executed.
 These groups only support the reset input via a special internal relay. When the reset is executed, the current value returns to the reset value

specified by the special data registers.
Counting mode
Adding counterFrequency
Group 2, 4, 5, 6: 100 kHz

Two-phase high-speed counter
Group 1, group 3 two-phase high-speed counter The two-phase high-speed counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input.
 These groups support 50 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
 Even higher speed counting is possible by specifying 2-edge count or 4-edge count.
 When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, an external output turns on or an interrupt programis executed.
 These groups support resetting the current value by the reset special internal relay or external clear input (Z-phase). When the reset is

executed, the current value returns to the reset value specified by the special data registers.
Group
Group 1
Group 3Frequency
2-edge count: 50 kHz
4-edge count: 25 kHz
2-edge count: 25 kHz
4-edge count: 12.5 kHz

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-15

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Counting mode
The high-speed counter as the following four counting modes.
Adding counter (single-phase high-speed counter)
The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.

Pulse input(I0, I2, I3, I5, I6, I7)

10

Current value

11

12

13

14

Up/down selection reversible counter (single-phase high-speed counter)
Up/down selection reversible counter can switch between addition and subtraction by pulse input with the up/down selection
input. When the up/down selection input is on, the counter counts up with the rise in pulse input. When the up/down selection
input is off, the counter counts down with the rise in pulse input.



Up/down selection
input (I1, I4)

Pulse input(I0, I3)

Current value

10

11

12

11

10

2-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase precedes the Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the A-phase, the counter counts
down with the rise and fall of the B-phase.

A-phaseB-phaseCurrent
value

0

1

2

3

4

3

2

1

0

4-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase precedes the Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the A-phase, thecounter counts down with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase.

A-phaseB-phaseCurrent
value

5-16

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

7

6

5

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

4

3

2

1

0

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Comparison Actions
The operating condition when comparing values is configured in the WindLDR High-speed Counter Settings, underComparison Action.
The action when comparing values is Comparison Output or Interrupt Program, so specify an external output number orlabel number when comparing. However, the interrupt program can only be used when ladder program is selected as the
programming language.
Operation
When the preset value and the current value are compared and the values match, the specified output is turned on or the interrupt
program is executed.
A maximum of six high-speed counter preset values can be configured. For one preset value, the current value is compared withthe same preset value each time.
When multiple preset values are configured, the preset value is changed each time the current value and preset value match.
For example, if four preset values are configured, when preset value 1 matches the current value, the comparison subject changes
to preset value 2  3  4 in order.
When the final preset value 4 matches the current value, the preset value returns to preset value 1 and the values are compared.
Preset value storage locations
The preset values during high-speed counter operation are stored as 2 words in special data registers.



Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Preset Value (Upper word)

D8052

D8058

D8064

D8070

D8136

D8142

Preset Value (Lower word)

D8053

D8059

D8065

D8071

D8137

D8143

Read/Write
R

Specify the data registers to store the preset values in WindLDR and store those preset values in the user program. Specify thestart address of the data registers to allocate the data registers to the individual settings in the comparison settings. When thehigh-speed counter is executed, the preset value with the number stored in Current Preset Value Number is active. The active
preset value number for each comparison is stored in Current Preset Value Number and the next active preset value number is
automatically stored in Next Preset Value Number. By changing the value of Next Preset Value Number in the user
program, the next active preset value number can be changed. The active preset value is stored for each group in the special dataregisters shown in the table above.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-17

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Example: Group 1, number of preset values is 3, set to device address D0
When the current value matches preset value 1, Current Preset Value Number becomes 2 and 3 is stored in Next Preset
Value Number.
When the device address is configured as D0, Current Preset Value Number is stored in D1 and Next Preset Value Number
is stored in D2.
For the group 1 preset value, the value of the data registers (D4, D5) allocated to preset value number 1 is stored in D8052 andD8053 as shown in the table above and it is compared to the current value.
Current value
and preset
value 1
matchedCurrent value
and preset
value 3matchedCounting state
Current Preset
Value Number
(D1)

0



1



2



3



1

Next Preset
Value Number
(D2)

1



2



3



1



2

Before the count action, set the
Next Preset Value Number andpreset value 1 to 3 to the countvalues with the initialize pulse.

Count
Action start

Current value
and preset
value 2
matchedCount
Before action

Preset value 1
is set to Current Preset
Value Number

Preset value 2
is set.

Preset value 3
is set.

RepeatOnce again, preset
value 1 is set.

Note: When the Next Preset Value Number preset value becomes active, the high-speed counter preset value during execution does notchange, even when the preset value for that preset value number is changed. When the current value and the current preset value match, thepreset value with the number stored in Next Preset Value Number becomes active. Changes to the Next Preset Value Number data registermust be performed before the preset value becomes active.

5-18

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Comparison operation flow
The comparison operation flow is as follows.
1. Start (run) the SmartAXIS.

For the first scan, Next Preset Value Number is set to the number for preset value 1 with the initialize pulse.
For the second scan, an I/O refresh is performed in END processing and the value of Next Preset Value Number is transferred
to Current Preset Value Number.
The content of Next Preset Value Number becomes the preset value n + 1 ("2" in this example).
When the number of preset values is 1, Next Preset Value Number is always "1".
The data register that stores the preset value (target value).
Specify the starting address.
The outputs (external outputs) when the values match.
Transfer

The preset value with the number that became active is thecomparison subject with the current value and is stored in the special
data registers.
Example: For group 1
Storage destination for the preset value that became active.
Stored by group.

Group

Group 1
(I0 to I1)

Preset Value(Upper word)

D8052

Preset Value(Lower word)

D8053

Read/Write

R/W

2. Start the high-speed counter count operation.

Turn on the gate input to start the count operation.
3. Compare the Current Preset Value Number preset value and the current value. When the current value and the preset

value match, the next number for the preset value becomes active and the high-speed counter continues counting.

Execute Comparison Output or Interrupt Program. (Comparison Output in this example)
 Turn on the comparison (special internal relay) for only one scan.
 Overwrite Current Preset Value Number with Next Preset Value Number and start the count with the preset value for Current Preset

Value Number.

 Add 1 to Next Preset Value Number.

4. When the procedure is executed up to preset value 6, repeat again from the beginning with preset value 1.
Note: The Current Preset Value Number data register cannot be written to. It is read-only. Next Preset Value Number and Preset Value 1
to Preset Value 6 can be read and written to.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-19

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Programming WindLDR
To use the high-speed counter, a normal external input must be specified as Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter in the
WindLDR Function Area Settings. The function for external inputs I0 to I7 on the SmartAXIS can be selected as normal input,
high-speed counter, catch input, interrupt input, and frequency measurement.
When using normal input, catch input, interrupt input, or frequency measurement, the high-speed counter cannot be used.
However, the interrupt program can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for the group to use the high-speed counter.

The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.

3. Configure the operation mode and the counting mode.

To use comparison actions, configure the comparison settings.

4. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Settings
Operation mode
For group 1 and group 3, you can select Single-phase High-speed Counter or Two-phase High-speed Counter.
When group 1 is selected as the high-speed counter, group 2 (I2) can be used as the external clear input.
When group 3 is selected as the high-speed counter, group 4 (I5) can be used as the external clear input.
The external inputs for group 2, group 4, group 5, and group 6 can only be used as single-phase high-speed counters.

Counting mode (single-phase high-speed counter)
When the single-phase high-speed counter is specified for Operation mode for group 1 or group 3, the counting mode can beselected as Adding counter or Up/down selection reversible counter. The adding counter can only be used for the group2, group 4, group 5, and group 6 high-speed counters.
Adding counter

The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.
Up/down selection reversible counter

Up/down selection reversible counter can switch between addition and subtraction with the up/down selection input. When theup/down selection input is on, the counter counts up with the rise in pulse input. When the up/down selection input is off, thecounter counts down with the rise in pulse input.
Counting mode (two-phase high-speed counter)
When the two-phase high-speed counter is specified for Operation mode for group 1 or group 3, the counting mode can beselected as 2-edge count or 4-edge count. The two-phase counter cannot be used for the group 2, group 4, group 5, andgroup 6 high-speed counters.
2-edge countThis counter counts at double the frequency of the input pulse.
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase precedes the Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the A-phase, the counter counts
down with the rise and fall of the B-phase.
4-edge countThis counter counts at quadruple the frequency of the input pulse.
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase precedes the Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the A-phase,the counter counts down with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase.
Comparison action
The comparison action is a function that compares the high-speed counter's current value with a preset value (target value).
It can use either the comparison output or an interrupt program. However, the interrupt program can only be used when ladderprogram is selected as the programming language.
 When Comparison Output is selected, the specified external output is turned on when the current value and the preset value match.
 When Interrupt Program is selected, the subroutine program with the specified label number is executed as the interrupt program when

the current value and the preset value match.

Overflow and underflow can also be used for the comparison conditions.
For details on the comparison actions, see "Comparison Actions" on page 5-17.
Comparison settings

When using the comparison output or the interrupt program as the comparison action for the high-speed counter, configure theexternal output number or the label number when there is a match. A maximum of six preset values can be specified for
Number of preset values (preset value number 1 to 6).
Tag name

This setting specifies the starting address of the data register region to store the preset values.
Device addressThis item shows the address of the data register specified by the tag name.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-21

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Number of preset values

You can configure a maximum of six preset values (target values) for the comparison action.
Notes :
 The preset value becomes active by the END processing in the second scan after the SmartAXIS starts operation. Store Preset Value in thedata registers with initialize pulse M8120 input.
 When the preset value (special data register) is changed before the comparison, the preset value currently being used for the comparison is

discarded in the program's END processing, and the comparison is performed with the newly configured preset value.
 Configure the settings so that an interval of 1 ms or more is present between instances of the preset value and the current value matching.If

this interval is less than 1 ms in length, the next Comparison ON status may be missed.

OutputWhen a comparison action is selected, these are the external outputs specified for preset value 1 to 6.
The external outputs that can be used as comparison outputs are listed by model as follows. Remote outputs cannot be
configured.
Model number

Comparison output

12-I/O type

Q0 to Q3

24-I/O type

Q0 to Q7

40-I/O type

Q0 to Q7, Q10 to Q17

48-I/O type

Q0 to Q7, Q10 to Q17, Q20 to Q21

Overflow

Select this check box to use overflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value exceeds 4,294,967,295).
Underflow

Select this check box to use underflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value falls below 0).
Note: When the comparison action is Comparison Output and either a preset value, overflow, or underflow has been enabled as a comparison
condition, the text box to enter the comparison output is enabled. The comparison output can be specified for each of these match conditions.


KeepAfter the current value matches the preset value, select to reset the current value to a reset value or to keep the value. Selectthis check box to keep the current value.



Use HSC Reset Input
Select this check box to reset the current value to a reset value with external input (high-speed counter reset input).
High-speed counter reset input can only be specified for group 1 and group 3.
Group

External input

Group 1

I2

Group 3

I5

When the high-speed counter reset input is turned on, the current value is reset to a reset value.
If the high-speed counter reset input is not used, I2 and I5 are normal inputs.
High-speed counter devices
The high-speed counter operates according to special internal relay and special data register settings. While the high-speed
counter is operating, the current value, control output, and operating status value are reflected in the special internal relays andspecial data registers with each scan.
The high-speed counter start and stop control signals and the current value, preset values, and reset values are allocated to thespecial internal relays and special data registers.

5-22

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Device allocation table
The devices used by the high-speed counter are as follows.
Special internal relay list
Group1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Comparison Output Reset

M8030

M8040

M8045

M8055

M8166

M8173

Gate Input

M8031

M8041

M8046

M8056

M8167

M8174

Reset Input

M8032

M8042

M8047

M8057

M8170

M8175

Reset Status

M8033

—

M8050

—

—

—

Comparison ON Status

M8034

M8043

M8051

M8060

M8171

M8176

Overflow

M8035

M8044

M8052

M8061

M8172

M8177

Underflow

M8036

—

M8053

—

—

—

Count Direction flag

M8037

—

M8054

—

—

—

Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Current Value (Upper word)

D8050

D8056

D8062

D8068

D8134

D8140

Current Value (Lower word)

D8051

D8057

D8063

D8069

D8135

D8141
D8142

Read/Write
R/W

R

Special data register list

Preset Value (Upper word)

D8052

D8058

D8064

D8070

D8136

Preset Value (Lower word)

D8053

D8059

D8065

D8071

D8137

D8143

Reset Value (Upper word)

D8054

D8060

D8066

D8072

D8138

D8144

Reset Value (Lower word)

D8055

D8061

D8067

D8073

D8139

D8145

Read/Write
R

R/W

When using the devices above with instructions/FB where the data type unit can be specified, specify the data type as double word
(D). When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to From Lower Word, the lower word is stored in
the first device.
Start/stop high-speed counter
The high-speed counter can be started and stopped per group by turning the gate input on or off.



Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Read/Write

Gate Input

M8031

M8041

M8046

M8056

M8167

M8174

R/W

Current value storage locations
The current value for the single-phase high-speed counter is stored in special data registers as 2 words per group.



Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Current Value (Upper word)

D8050

D8056

D8062

D8068

D8134

D8140

Current Value (Lower word)

D8051

D8057

D8063

D8069

D8135

D8141

Read/Write
R

When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to From Lower Word, the lower word is stored in thefirst device.
Comparison ON status
When the current value and the preset value match, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan.



Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Read/Write

Comparison ON Status

M8034

M8043

M8051

M8060

M8171

M8176

R

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-23

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Overflow
When the current value exceeds 4,294,967,295, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan. When the current value
overflows, it becomes 0.



Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Read/Write

Overflow

M8035

M8044

M8052

M8061

M8172

M8177

R

Underflow
When the current value falls below 0, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan. When the current value underflows, it
becomes 4,294,967,295.



Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Read/Write

Underflow

M8036

—

M8053

—

—

—

R

Comparison output reset
When the special internal relay turns on, the comparison output selected on High-speed Counter Settings turns off.



Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Read/Write

Comparison Output Reset

M8030

M8040

M8045

M8055

M8166

M8173

R/W

Reset input
When reset input is turned on, the current value returns to the reset value.



Reset input
Current value

N-1

N

N+1

Reset value (initial value)

Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Read/Write

Reset Input

M8032

M8042

M8047

M8057

M8170

M8175

R/W

Preset value, reset value storage locations
The preset value and the reset value for the high-speed counter are stored in special data registers as 2 words.



Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Preset Value (Upper word)

D8052

D8058

D8064

D8070

D8136

D8142

Preset Value (Lower word)

D8053

D8059

D8065

D8071

D8137

D8143

Reset Value (Upper word)

D8054

D8060

D8066

D8072

D8138

D8144

Reset Value (Lower word)

D8055

D8061

D8067

D8073

D8139

D8145

Read/Write

R/W

When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to From Lower Word, the lower word is stored in thefirst device.

5-24

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
HSC reset input and reset status
When the HSC reset input is enabled in group 1 or group 3, turn on HSC reset input I2 or I5 to return the current value to the reset
value.
In this situation, reset status turns on for only one scan.



HSC reset input

Reset status

Current value

One scan

N-1

N

N+1

1
(I0 to I1)

Group
HSC Reset Input
Reset Status

2(I2)

Reset value (initial value)
3(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Read/Write

I2

—

I5

—

—

—

—

M8033

—

M8050

—

—

—

R

To use the reset input with the group 1 or group 3 single-phase high-speed counter, use I2 (group 2) or I5 (group 4). When notusing I2 or I5 as a reset input, they can be used as normal input, high-speed counters, catch input, interrupt input, or frequency
measurements.
Count direction flag
These special internal relays maintain whether the group 1 or group 3 current value count is the adding direction or the subtracting
direction. When these special internal relays are on, they indicate the adding direction. When they are off, they indicate thesubtracting direction.



The flag operates as follows for each counting mode setting.
Count direction flag status

When the count direction flag changes

Adding counter Always the adding direction

 NoneUp/down
selection
reversible
counterCounting mode
Single-phasehigh-speed
counter

Adding direction when the up/down selection
input is on.
 Subtracting direction when the up/down
selection input is off.
Adding direction if the current value isincremented and reached to the preset valueor the current value overflows in the previous
comparison operation.
 Subtracting direction if the current value isdecremented and reached to the preset valueor the current value underflows in the previous
comparison operation.*1
 The default is the adding direction.

 When the up/down selection input status haschanged.



Two-phase
high-speed
counter

2-edge count /4-edge count When the current value and the preset value

are equal.
 When a current value overflow or underflow

has occurred.

*1 When operating as a two-phase high-speed counter, the count direction flag does not reflect the current adding/subtracting direction andindicates the adding/subtracting direction for the previous comparison.
Group

1(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3 to I4)

4
(I5)

5
(I6)

6
(I7)

Read/Write

Count Direction flag

M8037

—

M8054

—

—

—

R

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-25

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Timing chart 1
Single-phase high-speed counter (group 1) timing chart
Operating conditions

The counting mode is set to Up/down selection reversible counter and reset input (I2) is used.
One preset value is used, and when the values match, output Q1 turns on and the current value is kept.
Overflow and underflow are not used.
Current value

Reset value=2(D8554, D8555)

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Pulse input

I0

Up/down selection
input

I1

Reset input

I2

Reset status

M8033

Gate input

M8031

Preset value 1=6

One scanPreset value
Comparison ON status M8034
Preset value 1
Comparison output

Q1

Comparison output
reset

M8030

Down count

Up count

One scanReset

1. When reset input (I2) turns on, the reset value (D8054, D8055) is stored in the current value (D8050, D8051).

In this situation, reset status (M8033) turns on for only one scan.

2. When gate input (M8031) turns on, the counting begins.
3. The counting direction (count up/count down) is determined by the on/off state of the up/down selection input (I1), and thepulse input (I0) is counted. The current value is updated with each scan.

4. When the current value and preset value 1 (D8052, D8053) match, the preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) and Comparison

ON status (M8034) turn on. When the Keep check box is selected in the settings in the WindLDR High-speed Counter
Settings, the current value is kept.

5. Q1 maintains the on state until comparison output reset (M8030) turns on. M8034 turns on for only one scan.
6. When the gate output turns off, counting stops.
Note: High-speed counter usage precautions
The high-speed counter starts the count operation with the following two conditions: The SmartAXIS starts operation
 The gate input is turned on

To start the count operation, turn the gate input on from off while the SmartAXIS is running. When the gate input is already on and the SmartAXIS
is stopped, the count operation starts when the SmartAXIS is switched from stop to run.
When a user program is downloaded during the count operation, the count operation stops. The count operation will restart by setting the
SmartAXIS to run.

5-26

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Timing chart 2
Two-phase high-speed counter (group 1) timing chart
Operating conditions

The counting mode is set to 2-edge count and reset input (I2) is used.
Two preset values are used, and when preset value 1 matches, output Q1 turns on and the current value is kept.
When preset value 2 matches, output Q2 turns on and the current value is cleared.
Overflow and underflow are not used.
Current value

Preset value 2=14

Preset value 1=8

Reset value=4(D8554, D8555)

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

A-phaseI0

B-phase

I1

Reset input

I2

Reset status

M8033

Gate input

M8031

1

0

UP

DOWN

One scanPreset value
Comparison ON status M8034
Preset value 1
Comparison output

Q1

Preset value 2
Comparison output

Q2

Comparison output
reset

M8030

1

1

One scanOne scan

Reset
Reset

1. When reset input (I2) turns on, the reset value (D8054, D8055) is stored in the current value (D8050, D8051).

In this situation, reset status (M8033) turns on for only one scan.

2. When gate input (M8031) turns on, the counting begins.
3. When the A-phase pulse (I0) precedes the B-phase pulse (I1), the count goes up. When the B-phase pulse (I1) precedes theA-phase pulse (I0), the count goes down.

4. When the current value and preset value 1 (D8052, D8053) match, the preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) and setting

value match (M8034) turn on.
When preset value 1 matches, preset value 2 is stored in the preset value (D8052, D8053) as the new preset value andcounting continues.

5. The preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) maintains the on state until comparison output reset (M8030) turns on. M8034

turns on for only one scan.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-27

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Example program 1
Using the single-phase high-speed counter on the ladder program, this example program turns on external output Q2 when1000 pulses are counted.
Application description

When pulses are input to external input I0 and the count reaches 1000, external output Q2 is turned on.
In the WindLDR Function Area Settings, select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1.

In High-speed Counter Settings, configure the settings as follows.
External input: Group 1 (I0 to I1)

Operation mode

: Single-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode

: Adding Counter

Comparison Action: Comparison Output

Comparison settings
Tag name/device address : D0 (data register)

5-28

Number of preset values:1Comparison output: Q2 (external output when matched)

Preset value 1 (D4)

: 0 (upper word)

Preset value 1 (D5)

: 1,000 (lower word)

Keep: Cleared

Reset value (D8054): 0 (upper word)

Reset value (D8055): 0 (lower word)

Overflow: Cleared

Underflow: Cleared

Use HSC Reset Input: Cleared

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Program
M8120 (initialize pulse) is a special internal relay that turns on when the SmartAXIS runs.
MOV(D)
M8120
MOV(D)

S11000

D1D4

REP

S10

D1D8054

REP

D1D2

REP

MOV(W) S11

1st scanStore 1,000 in preset value 1 (D4, D5)Store the reset value in D8054, D8055

Store 1 in the next preset value number (D2)Turn off gate input (M8031)

M8031
Turn off M0
M0

M0

M8031

3rd scanDetect the rising edge of M0, turn on gate input (M8031)
Start high-speed counter counting in the END processing
after the 3rd scan is executed

2nd scan
M8120

M0

M8032

Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse, M0 and M8032 turn on
Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing
after the 2nd scan is executed
M8032 (reset input) is a special internal relay that stores the preset
value (D8054, D8055) in the current value (D8050, D8051).

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-29

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Example program 2
Using the two-phase high-speed counter, the pulses from a rotary encoder are input to the SmartAXIS and a continuous
workpiece is marked at a regular interval.
Application description• The rotary encoder pulses are input to external inputs
I0 and I1. A continuous sheet of paper is marked(holes are punched) at a regular interval (every 2,700
pulses).

Paper roll

Paper feed roller• The rotary encoder is directly connected to the paper
feed roller, and output pulses are counted by thehigh-speed counter and controlled.
• The cycle time is the time to count 2,700 pulses.
When the hole punch time is 0.5 seconds, theoperation condition is 2,700 pulse count time > 0.5
seconds.

Perforator
Rotary encoder

SmartAXIS

In WindLDR Function Area Settings, select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1.

In High-speed Counter Settings, configure the settings as follows.
External input: Group 1 (I0 to I1)

Operation mode

: Two-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode

: 4-edge Count

Comparison Action: Comparison Output

Comparison settings
Tag name/device address : D0 (data register)

5-30

Number of preset values:1Comparison output: Q2 (external output when matched)

Preset value 1 (D4)

: 0 (upper word)

Preset value 1 (D5)

: 2,700 (lower word)

Keep: Cleared

Reset value (D8054): 0 (upper word)

Reset value (D8055): 0 (lower word)

Overflow: Cleared

Underflow: Cleared

Use HSC Reset Input: Cleared

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Program
M8120 (initialize pulse) is a special internal relay that turns on when the SmartAXIS runs.
MOV(D)
M8120
MOV(D)

S12700

D1D4

REP

S10

D1D8054

REP

D1D2

REP

MOV(W) S11

1st scanStore 2,700 in preset value 1 (D4, D5)Store 0 in the reset value (D8054, D8055)

Store 1 in the next preset value number (D2)Turn off gate input (M8031)

M8031

Turn off M0
M0

3rd scan

SOTU
M0

M8031

Detect the rising edge of M0, turn on gate input (M8031)

2nd scan
SOTD
M8120

M0

M8032

TIM T05M8030

Q2

Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse, M0 and M8032 turn on
Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing
after the 2nd scan is executed
M8032 (reset input) is a special internal relay that stores the reset
value (D8054, D8055) in the current value (D8050, D8051).
When the current value becomes 2,700 pulses, comparison
output Q2 turns on
The timer starts and comparison output reset (M8030) turns on after
5 seconds

Current value
Preset value 1=2,700
2,700 pulses
Reset value 0

Comparison output Q2
Perforation time: 0.5 seconds

Note: In this example, Z-phase reset input is not used.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-31

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Catch Input
The catch input function is used to receive short pulses from sensor outputs regardless of the scan time. Input pulses shorter than
one scan time can be received. Six inputs I0, I2, I3, and I5 through I7 can be designated to catch a rising or falling edge of short
input pulses, and the catch input statuses are stored to special internal relays M8090 through M8095, respectively.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is used to designate inputs I0, I2, I3, and I5 through I7 as a catch input.
Normal input signals to input terminals are read when the END instruction is executed at the end of a scan.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing any ofthese settings.
Catch Input Specifications
Minimum Turn ON Pulse Width

5 µs

Minimum Turn OFF Pulse Width

5 µs

Note: Input filter settings have no effect on the catch inputs. For the input filter function, see "Input Filter" on page 5-38.

Catch Input Terminals and Special Internal Relays for Catch Inputs
Group

Catch Input No.

Special Internal Relay for Catch Input

Group 1

I0

M8090

Group 2

I2

M8091

Group 3

I3

M8092

Group 4

I5

M8093

Group 5

I6

M8094

Group 6

I7

M8095

Note: Only the 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types can use external inputs I6 and I7 as catch inputs. The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I6 and I7
as catch inputs.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Input Configuration appears.

Catch Input Rising/Falling
Edge Selection
Catch Input Rising Edge
Catch Input Falling Edge

2. Select Catch Input in the Groups 1 through 4 pull-down list boxes. The Catch Input dialog box appears.
5-32

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
3. Select Catch Input Rising Edge or Catch Input Falling Edge in the pull-down list.

Catching Rising Edge of Input Pulse
Note
Actual Input
Catch Input Relay(M8090-M8095)

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

1 scan time

END
Processed

Catching Falling Edge of Input Pulse
Note
Actual Input
Catch Input Relay(M8090-M8095)

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

1 scan time

END
Processed

Note: When two or more pulses enter within one scan, subsequent pulses are ignored.

Example: Maintaining Catch Input
When a catch input is received, the catch input relay assigned to a catch input is turned on for only one scan. This example
demonstrates a program to maintain a catch input status for more than one scan.
Input I2 is designated as a catch input using the Function Area Settings.
M8091
M0

M1

M0

When input I2 is turned on, special internal relay M8091 is turned on, and M0 is maintained in the selfholding circuit.
When NC input M1 is turned off, the self-holding circuit is unlatched, and M0 is turned off.
M0 is used as an input condition for the subsequent program instructions.

M0

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-33

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Interrupt Input
When a quick response to an external input is required, such as positioning control, the interrupt input can call a subroutine to
execute an interrupt program. The interrupt input can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming
language.
Six inputs I0, I2, I3, and I5 through I7 can be designated to execute interrupt at a rising and/or falling edge of input pulses. Whenan interrupt is initiated by inputs I0, I2, I3, and I5 through I7, program execution immediately jumps to a predetermined label
number stored in special data registers D8032 through D8035, D8037, and D8038 respectively. The Function Area Settings dialog
box is used to designate inputs I0, I2, I3, and I5 through I7 as an interrupt input, normal input, high-speed counter input, or catch
input.
Normal input signals to input terminals are read when the END instruction is executed at the end of a scan.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing any ofthese settings.
Interrupt Input Terminals, Special Data Registers, and Special Internal Relays for Interrupt Inputs
GroupInterrupt Input No.

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.

Interrupt Input Status

Group 1

I0

D8032

M8070

Group 2

I2

D8033

M8071

Group 3

I3

D8034

M8072

Group 4

I5

D8035

M8073

Group 5

I6

D8037

M8074

Group 6

I7

D8038

M8075

Note: Only the 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types can use external inputs I6 and I7 as interrupt inputs. The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I6 andI7 as interrupt inputs.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Input Configuration appears.

Interrupt Input Rising/
Falling Edge Selection
Interrupt at Rising Edge
Interrupt occurs when theinterrupt input turns on.
Interrupt at Falling Edge
Interrupt occurs when theinterrupt input turns off.
Interrupt at Both Edges
Interrupt occurs when theinterrupt input turns on or off.

2. Select Interrupt Input in the Groups 1 through 6 pull-down list boxes. the Interrupt Input dialog box appears.
3. Select an interrupt edge in the pull-down list for each group.

Disable and Enable Interrupts
The interrupt inputs I0, I2, I3, and I5 through I7 and timer interrupt are normally enabled while the SmartAXIS is running, and canalso be individually disabled using the DI instruction or enabled using the EI instruction. When interrupt inputs I0, I2, I3, and I5
through I7 are enabled, special internal relay M8070 through M8075 are turned on, respectively. See Chapter 16 "Interrupt Control
Instructions" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
5-34

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Example: Interrupt Input
The following example demonstrates a program using the interrupt input function, with input I2 designated as an interrupt input.
When the interrupt input is turned on, the input I0 status is immediately transferred to output Q0 using the IOREF (I/O refresh)
instruction before the END instruction is executed. For the IOREF instruction, See Chapter 15 "Refresh Instructions" in the"SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
MOV(W)
M8120

S1 –
0

D1 –
D8033

REP

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
D8033 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for interrupt input I2.

Main Program
END
LABEL
0
IOREF
M8125

S1
I0

M300

Q0
IOREF

M8125

S1
Q0
LRET

The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END instruction.
When input I2 is on, program execution jumps to label 0.

M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.
IOREF immediately reads input I0 status to internal relay M300.
M300 turns on or off the output Q0 internal memory.
Another IOREF immediately writes the output Q0 internal memory status to actual
output Q0.
Program execution returns to the main program.
Insert LRET at the end of the subroutine to return to the main program.

Notes for Using Interrupt Inputs and Timer Interrupt:

 When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt, separate the interrupt program from the main program using the END instruction at the endof the main program.
 When an interrupt program calls another subroutine, a maximum of 3 subroutine calls can be nested. If more than 3 calls are nested, a user

program execution error occurs, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED.
 When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt, include the label number of the interrupt program to be executed when an interrupt occurs.

The label numbers stored in data registers D8032 through D8035, D8037, and D8038 specify the interrupt programs for interrupt inputs I0,
I2, I3, and I5 through I7 and timer interrupt, respectively.
 When more than one interrupt input is turned on at the same time, interrupt program execution is given priority to inputs I0, I2, I3, I5, I6,

and I7, in that order. If an interrupt is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, the subsequent interrupt program is executed
after the prior interrupt is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot be executed simultaneously.
 Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.
 Interrupt programs cannot use the following instructions: SOTU, SOTD, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO, CNT, CDP, CUD,

CNTD, CDPD, CUDD, SFR, SFRN, WEEK, YEAR, MSG, DI, EI, XYFS, CVXTY, CVYTX, AVRG, PULS, PWM, RAMP, ZRN, ARAMP, DTML, DTIM,
DTMH, DTMS, TTIM, FIFOF, NDSRC, HOUR, TXD, RXD, ETXD, ERXD, DLOG, and TRACE.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-35

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Frequency Measurement
This section describes frequency measurement, which measures the frequency of pulses input to an external input. Frequency
measurement is a function that measures the frequency of pulses input to an external input.
These input pulses are processed with dedicated hardware device in SmartAXIS, so frequencies can be measured with no relation
to the scan time. Groups that do not use frequency measurement can be used as normal inputs, high-speed counters, catch input,
and interrupt input. The measurement results are stored in special data registers and they are updated with each scan.

Function Specification
The SmartAXIS external inputs are used by switching between normal input, high-speed counters, catch input, interrupt input, andfrequency measurement. To use frequency measurement, specify the relevant group as Frequency Measurement in the
WindLDR Function Area Settings.
The frequency measurement results are stored in the following special data registers (Read-only):
Group

1

2

3

4

5

6

External input

I0

I2

I3

I5

I6

I7

Frequency measurement
value (32 bits)

Upper word

D8050

D8056

D8062

D8068

D8134

D8140

Lower word

D8051

D8057

D8063

D8069

D8135

D8141

Frequency measurement range

1 Hz to 100 kHz

200 Hz to 100 kHz

Measurement errorLess than ±1%(Truncated after the decimal point)

Calculation cycle

Each scan time

Notes:
 If the input pulse cycle is longer than the scan time, the measurement results are updated at pulse cycle + 1 scan time.
 The data registers for the upper word and the lower word of the measurement value change according to the 32-bit data storage method

specified. For details, see "32-bit Data Storage Setting" on page 5-62.

Applicable Models
 The AC power type does not support frequency measurement. In situations where the frequency measurement function is required, use the

DC power type.
 Of the DC power types, only the the 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types can use external inputs I6 and I7 for frequency measurement. The 12-I/O

type cannot use external inputs I6 and I7 as the frequency measurement function.

5-36

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Programming WindLDR
To use frequency measurement, you must configure the Function Area Settings in WindLDR and download the user program to
the SmartAXIS. Frequency measurements will start when you download the user program and set the SmartAXIS to run.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Specify Frequency Measurement for the group to use frequency measurement.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-37

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Input Filter
The input filter function is used to reject input noises. The catch input function described in the preceding section is used to readshort input pulses to special internal relays. To the contrary, the input filter rejects short input pulses when the SmartAXIS is usedwith input signals containing noises.
Different input filter values can be selected for inputs I0 through I7 in four groups using the Function Area Settings. Selectable
input filter values to pass input signals are 0ms, and 3 through 15ms in 1ms increments. Default value is 3ms for all inputs I0
through I7. Inputs I10 and above on SmartAXIS are provided with a fixed filter of 3ms. The input filter rejects inputs shorter than
the selected input filter value minus 2ms.
Normal inputs require a pulse width of the filter value plus one scan time to receive input signals. When using the input filter
function, select Normal Input under Special Inputs on the Input Configuration dialog box in the Function Area Settings.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing any ofthese settings.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Input Configuration appears.

The columns displayed next to I0
indicate I0 to I7.

2. Select an input filter value for each group of inputs.

Input Filter Values and Input Operation
Depending on the selected values, the input filter has three response areas to reject or pass input signals.
Reject area:

Input signals do not pass the filter (selected filter value minus 2 ms).

Indefinite area:

Input signals may be rejected or passed.

Pass area:

Input signals pass the filter (selected filter value).

Example: Input Filter 8ms
To reject input pulses of 6ms or less, select input filter value of
8ms. Then input pulses of 8ms plus one scan time are accepted
correctly at the END processing.

5-38

6ms
Input

Rejected

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8ms + 1 scan
Indefinite

Accepted5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Analog Input
This section describes input analog signals such as those from pressure sensors.
The SmartAXIS is equipped with embedded analog inputs. This function acquires 0 to 10V DC voltage analog input by converting it
into 0 to 1000 digital values. The converted analog signals are stored in special data registers. External inputs that are notspecified as analog inputs are digital inputs.
For the on/off threshold value when digital input is specified, see "Product Specifications" on page 2-1.
Note: When analog input is configured as digital input, the input filter is active.

Analog input value storage locations
A maximum of eight analog inputs can be used. The converted analog signals are stored in special data registers (D8040 toD8047: read-only) as values between 0 and 1000. These values are updated with each scan.
Analog input (I)Special data register that stores the analog input
value

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

D8040

D8041

D8042

D8043

D8044

D8045

D8046

D8047

Analog Input Filter
The analog input data is averaged by the specified filter count. This can reduce rapid fluctuations in analog input.
The larger this value is set, the slower the tracking of the change in analog input becomes.
Count
0
1 to 255

Description
No filtering
The input value is set as the average value of n samples of analog input data. (n: Count)

When filtering, the input value is calculated with the equation below.
Total analog input values for filter count (n) worth of scans

Analog input value after filtering =Filter count n

Analog Input Allocation
The analog inputs are shared with the digital inputs. The allocation of analog inputs varies based on to the model.
12-I/O type
Input (I)

0

...

5

6

7

Analog input (AI)

—

—

—

0

1

Special data register that
stores the analog input
value

—

—

—

D8040

D8041

24-I/O type
Input (I)

0

...

13

14

15

16

17

Analog input (AI)

—

—

—

0

1

2

3

Special data register that
stores the analog input
value

—

—

—

D8040

D8041

D8042

D8043

40-I/O type
Input (I)

0

...

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

Analog input (AI)

—

—

—

0

1

2

3

4

5

Special data register that
stores the analog input
value

—

—

—

D8040

D8041

D8042

D8043

D8044

D8045

48-I/O type
Input (I)

0

...

25

26

27

30

31

32

33

34

35

Analog input (AI)

—

—

—

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Special data register that
stores the analog input
value

—

—

—

D8040

D8041

D8042

D8043

D8044

D8045

D8046

D8047

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-39

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Applicable Models
The number of inputs that can be used for analog input varies based on the model.
The AC power type does not support analog input. In situations where the analog input function is required, use the DC power
type.
Power supply voltage
Type

100 to 240V AC
12-I/O
type

Analog inputs

24-I/O
type

40-I/O
type
0

24V DC
48-I/O
type

12-I/O
type

24-I/O
type

40-I/O
type

48-I/O
type

2

4

6

8

Programming WindLDR
To use analog input, you must configure the Function Area Settings in WindLDR and download the user program to the SmartAXIS.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Specify Analog for the external input to use as analog input and configure Filter Count.

Click Default to set all the external inputs to digital.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-40

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Timer Interrupt
In addition to the interrupt input as described in the preceding section, all SmartAXIS have a timer interrupt function. When arepetitive operation is required, the timer interrupt can be used to call a subroutine repeatedly at predetermined intervals of 10
through 140ms.The timer interrupt can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is used to enable the timer interrupt and to specify the interval, from 10 to 140ms, toexecute the timer interrupt. When the timer interrupt is enabled, the program execution repeatedly jumps to the jump destination
label number stored in special data register D8036, while the SmartAXIS is running. When the interrupt program is completed, theprogram execution returns to the main program at the address where the interrupt occurred.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing any ofthese settings.
Special Data Register and Special Internal Relay for Timer Interrupt
Interrupt

Special Data Register for Timer Interrupt Jump
Destination Label No.

Special Internal Relay forTimer Interrupt Status

Timer Interrupt

D8036

M8144

Note: A label is the starting address of the program branch to jump to, and it is specified by the LABEL instruction.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Input Configuration appears.

2. Under the Timer Interrupt, click the check box to use the timer interrupt function.
3. Select an interval to execute the timer interrupt, from 10 to 140ms.

Disable and Enable Interrupts
The timer interrupt and interrupt inputs I0, I2, I3, and I5 through I7 are normally enabled while the SmartAXIS is running, and canalso be individually disabled using the DI instruction or enabled using the EI instruction. When timer interrupt is enabled, M8144 isturned on. When disabled, M8144 is turned off. See Chapter 16 "Interrupt Control Instructions" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder
Programming Manual".

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-41

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Example: Timer Interrupt
The following example demonstrates a program of using the timer interrupt function. The Function Area Settings must also becompleted to use the timer interrupt function as described on the preceding page.
MOV(W)
M8120

S1 –
0

D1 –
D8036

REP

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
D8036 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for timer interrupt.

Main Program
END

The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END instruction.

LABEL
0

While the SmartAXIS is running, program execution jumps to label 0 repeatedly atintervals selected in the Function Area Settings.
Each time the interrupt program is completed, program execution returns to the main
program at the address where timer interrupt occurred.

Interrupt Program
LRET

Insert LRET at the end of the subroutine to return to the main program.

Notes for Using Timer Interrupt and Interrupt Inputs:

 When using a timer interrupt or interrupt input, separate the interrupt program from the main program using the END instruction at the endof the main program.
 When an interrupt program calls another subroutine, a maximum of 3 subroutine calls can be nested. If more than 3 calls are nested, a user

program execution error occurs, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED.
 When using a timer interrupt or interrupt input, include the label number of the interrupt program to be executed when an interrupt occurs.

The label numbers stored in data registers D8032 through D8035, D8037, and D8038 specify the interrupt programs for interrupt inputs I0,
I2, I3, and I5 through I7 and timer interrupt, respectively.
 If an interrupt is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, the subsequent interrupt program is executed after the prior interrupt

is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot be executed simultaneously.
 Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.
 Interrupt programs cannot use the following instructions: SOTU, SOTD, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO, CNT, CDP, CUD,

CNTD, CDPD, CUDD, SFR, SFRN, WEEK, YEAR, MSG, DI, EI, XYFS, CVXTY, CVYTX, AVRG, PULS, PWM, RAMP, ZRN, ARAMP, DTML, DTIM,
DTMH, DTMS, TTIM, FIFOF, NDSRC, HOUR, TXD, RXD, ETXD, ERXD, DLOG, TRACE, and SCRPT.

5-42

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Forced I/O function
Inputs can be forced on/off regardless of the status of physical inputs, and outputs can be forced on/off regardless of the ladderlogic using the forced I/O function in WindLDR. The force input function can be used to monitor or online edit mode to test theladder logic without the need of wiring the input terminals or turning on the actual inputs. The force output function can be used
to turn on/off the outputs to the external devices.

Caution The forced I/O may cause unexpected operation of the SmartAXIS. Make sure of safety before forcing inputs or

outputs.

Devices
All the inputs and outputs of the SmartAXIS can be forced on/off individually.
Device Range

Type

Inputs

Outputs

12-I/O type

I0 to I7

Q0 to Q3

24-I/O type

I0 to I17, I40 to I75, I80 to I115, I120 to I155

Q0 to Q7, Q40 to Q61, Q80 to Q101, Q120 to Q141

40-I/O type

I0 to I27, I40 to I75, I80 to I115, I120 to I155

Q0 to Q17, Q40 to Q61, Q80 to Q101, Q120 to Q141

48-I/O type

I0 to I35, I40 to I75, I80 to I115, I120 to I155

Q0 to Q21, Q40 to Q61, Q80 to Q101, Q120 to Q141

Forced I/O Status
Events of the SmartAXIS and effects on the forced I/O settings are shown below.
EventsForced I/O Status
The force settings are retained. The forced inputs and outputs are kept on/off
even after the SmartAXIS is stopped, regardless of the status of M8025(maintain outputs while SmartAXIS is stopped).

When the SmartAXIS starts running
When the SmartAXIS is stopped.
When the SmartAXIS is powered up

The force settings are retained, but the force is suspended. If the battery isdead, the force settings are cleared.

When user program download is executed

The force settings are retained, and whether the force will be suspended or
not can be selected in the Download Program dialog box.

When Reset Input is turned on
When Clear All Devices is executed in the PLC Status dialog
box of WindLDR

The force settings are cleared.

When the system software download is executed
Note: Force function has no effect on high-speed counters, catch inputs, or interrupt inputs. The stop or reset input can be initiated using the force
function, but the force settings will be cleared as soon as the reset input is turned on.

Checking the Forced I/O Function Execution State
The state of the forced I/O function (running or stopped) can be checked with WindLDR, with the SmartAXIS module error status
LED (SmartAXIS Lite only), or with the RUN or STOP screen on the module's LCD (SmartAXIS Pro only). The forced I/O function
execution state while stopped cannot be checked with the module's power/run status LED. For the power/run status LED, see"Product Specifications" on page 2-1.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-43

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.

Online mode is activated.

2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Forced I/O.

The Forced I/O List dialog box appears and shows a list of forced inputs and outputs. I/O numbers and force I/O statuses canbe specified in this dialog box.
Force Release
Force OFF

RefreshForce ON

Start/Suspend ForceNew

3. Click the New button

Click the Force On button

and type an input or output number under Device in the list.
or Force Off button
to force on or off the designated input or output.

4. To start the forced I/O function, click the Start/Suspend Force button.

A signis displayed toshow input I0 is forced.

The forced I/O can be suspended temporarily by clicking the Start/Suspend Force button

5-44

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

again.

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
5. To suspend the forced I/O, click the Start/Suspend Force button.

Even though I0 is designated,
forced I/O is suspended andactual input status is read to the
SmartAXIS.

The forced inputs or outputs remain designated until the forced I/O designation is released.
6. To release the forced I/O designation, click the Force Release button.

Input I0 is released from theforced I/O designation. Even
when forced I/O is enabled, actual
input status is read to the
SmartAXIS.

Now input I0 works as a normal input.
Note: Make sure that all the forced inputs and outputs are released when the test using the forced I/O function is finished. Select Delete All fromthe right click menu in the Forced I/O List dialog box to release all the forced inputs and outputs at once.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-45

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Communication Ports
This section describes how to connect the SmartAXIS to other devices and how to communicate with them.
The SmartAXIS is equipped with a USB port, expansion communication ports (RS232C and RS485), and an Ethernet port. The
SmartAXIS can communicate with connected devices via maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus
communication, and remote I/O by configuring the port and communication method for connected devices.
Communication ports
All models are equipped with a USB port. The 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types are equipped with optional RS232C or RS485 expansion
communication ports. The 24-, 40-, and 48-I/O types are equipped with an Ethernet port.

USB port

Maintenance communication can be performed by connecting the SmartAXIS and a computer with a
USB cable.

Ethernet port

The SmartAXIS can communicate with Ethernet-compatible devices such as computers and operator
interfaces. Maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus communication, and remote I/O
are all possible.

Expansion communication ports

Maintenance communication, user communication, and Modbus RTU communication are all possible.

Communication functions
For details on the communications functions, see the chapter for each function.



Maintenance communication(Chapter 9)

Maintenance communication enables you to check the operating status and I/O status of theSmartAXIS, monitor and change device values, and download and upload user programs using acomputer or operator interface.

User communication(Chapter 10)

The SmartAXIS can communicate with external devices equipped with RS232C, RS485, or Ethernet
ports using user communication.

Modbus communication(Chapter 11)

The SmartAXIS can send and receive data with Modbus compliant devices on RS232C, RS485, or
Ethernet port.

Communication Ports and Communication Methods
The communication methods supported by each communication port are as follows.
Communication Methods

USB Port

Expansion Communication Port
(port 2, 3)
RS485

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

System firmware
downloads
Maintenancecommunication

User program
downloads/uploads

Yes

Monitoring/changing
devices
User communication
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP
Remote I/O

5-46

MasterSlave
ClientServerMasterSlave

Ethernet Port

RS232CS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Expansion Communication Port Wiring Diagram
The mini-DIN connector pin assignments and signal names are as follows.

RS232C (FT1A-PC1)
Pin Number

Signal Name

Cable Color

Signal Direction

Peripheral Device(D-SUB)
RS232C

Cover

Port 2

Port 3

Shield—1

RS (RTS)RS (RTS)

Black



(DR)

2

ER (DTR)ER (DTR)

Yellow



(CTS)

3

SD (TXD)SD (TXD)

Blue



RD

4

RD (RXD)RD (RXD)

Green



SD

5

DR (DSR)DR (DSR)

Brown



6

SG

SG

Gray

7

SG

SG

Red

8

NC

NC

White

RS
SG

None

SG
NC

RS485 (FT1A-PC2)
Pin Number

Signal Name

Cable Color

Signal Direction

Peripheral Device(D-SUB)

Cover

Port 2

Port 3

Shield

—

RS485

1

A

A

Black



A

2

B

B

Yellow



B

3
4

Blue
Green

NC

NC

7

SG

SG

Red

—

SG

8

NC

NC

White

None

NC

5
6

NC

Brown
Gray

Note: Do not connect cables to NC. There is a risk of malfunction or failure.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-47

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Programming WindLDR
Configure the communication format according to the communication specifications of the device.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Communication Ports.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. In the Communication Mode pull-down list for the appropriate port, select the communication mode.

The configuration dialog that corresponds to the communication mode is displayed.

3. Change the settings on the configuration dialog according to the communication format for the destination device.

A user communication example is shown below.

4. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-48

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Memory Cartridge
This section describes the memory cartridge used to save SmartAXIS user programs.
A user program can be saved on the memory cartridge. Insert a memory cartridge into the SmartAXIS and the user program onthat memory cartridge is subject to priority execution over the user program in the SmartAXIS module's ROM. If a user program is
not present in the memory cartridge, the user program in the SmartAXIS module's ROM is executed.
Memory Cartridge
Equipped
Not equipped

User Program to Execute

The user program on the memory cartridge is executed.
The user program in the SmartAXIS module's ROM is executed.

Specifications
Name

Function/Purpose

Model Number

Memory cartridge

User program save memory(One user program can be saved)

FT1A-PM1

Downloading and uploading user programs
The user program on the memory cartridge can be downloaded to the SmartAXIS module when the SmartAXIS is powered withthe function area settings. Or when uploading to the memory card is configured with WindLDR, the user program can be uploaded
to the memory cartridge inserted in the SmartAXIS.
For the SmartAXIS Pro, the user program on the memory cartridge can be downloaded or uploaded to the SmartAXIS Pro modulewith the LCD and operation buttons.
Notes:
 Always turn the SmartAXIS off before removing or installing a memory cartridge. If the memory cartridge is inserted or removed with thepower on, SmartAXIS operation cannot be guaranteed. There is a risk of the product failing.
 The memory cartridge may break if dropped. Take care not to drop it when removing it.

SmartAXIS system firmware compatibility
If the user program on the inserted memory cartridge includes instructions/FB not supported by the SmartAXIS module's systemfirmware, a program error will occur. Update the SmartAXIS module's system firmware to the latest version with WindLDR.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-49

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Download Settings
The user program on the memory cartridge can be downloaded to the SmartAXIS module. If a user program already exists on the
SmartAXIS module, that user program will be overwritten.
First configure the user program to automatically download to the SmartAXIS module in the WindLDR function area settings, thendownload the user program to the memory cartridge. When a memory cartridge configured with download settings is inserted into
the SmartAXIS and the power is turned on, the user program on the memory cartridge is automatically downloaded to the
SmartAXIS. For the SmartAXIS Pro, the user program can also be downloaded using the LCD and operation buttons.

Programming WindLDR
Insert the memory cartridge into the SmartAXIS, turn the power on, and then connect the SmartAXIS to the computer(WindLDR).
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Cartridge.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the Enable Memory Cartridge Download check box.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings for the memory cartridge to download the user program to the SmartAXIS.

4. Download the user program from the memory cartridge that is inserted in the SmartAXIS.
5. Turn off the SmartAXIS power and remove the memory cartridge.
6. Insert the memory cartridge into the SmartAXIS you want to download the user program to, and turn the power on.

The user program on the memory cartridge is automatically downloaded to the SmartAXIS module.

5-50

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Upload Settings
The SmartAXIS module user program can be uploaded to the memory cartridge. First configure the settings for the memory
cartridge to automatically upload the user program from the SmartAXIS module in WindLDR. If a user program already exists on
the memory cartridge, the user program on the memory cartridge is deleted and the upload settings are configured. When amemory cartridge configured with upload settings is inserted in the SmartAXIS and the power is turned on, the user program on
the SmartAXIS module is automatically uploaded to the memory cartridge. The upload to the memory cartridge configured withupload settings is valid only one time. To upload the user program again, configure the settings for the memory cartridge toautomatically upload the user program. For the SmartAXIS Pro, the user program on the SmartAXIS module can be uploaded tothe memory cartridge with the LCD and operation buttons. If a user program already exists on the memory cartridge, the user
program on the memory cartridge is deleted and the user program is uploaded.

Programming WindLDR
1. Insert the memory cartridge into the SmartAXIS, turn the power on, and then connect the SmartAXIS to the computer(WindLDR).

2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Upload > Memory Cartridge Upload.

The Memory Cartridge Upload dialog box is displayed.

Note: If the user program on the SmartAXIS to upload is password protected, click Password and enter the password.

3. Click OK.

The user program on the memory cartridge is deleted at this time.

4. Turn off the SmartAXIS power and remove the memory cartridge.

This concludes configuring the settings for the memory cartridge to upload the user program from the SmartAXIS.

5. Insert the memory cartridge with the completed upload settings into the SmartAXIS and turn the power on.

The user program is automatically uploaded from the SmartAXIS module to the memory cartridge.

Notes:In the following situations, a memory cartridge transfer error will occur. If the error occurs, the user program is not uploaded to the memory
cartridge, and SmartAXIS operation stops.
 When the SmartAXIS user program upload protection is set to Prohibited When the SmartAXIS user program password protection is set and the memory cartridge password does not match

For user program protection, see "User Program Protection" on page 5-64.

User Program Passwords
When password protection is configured for the SmartAXIS module user program, uploads and downloads only happen when the
password configured for the memory cartridge and the SmartAXIS module user program password match.
For user program protection, see "User Program Protection" on page 5-64.
Type

Password match

Password does not match

SmartAXIS Pro

Enter the password with the module's LCD andoperation buttons.

Enter the password with the module's LCD andoperation buttons.

SmartAXIS Lite

Automatic upload/download

Automatic upload/download not possible

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-51

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
SD Memory Card
This section describes how to save log data to the SD memory card and maintain the SD memory card.
The 40- and 48-I/O types SmartAXIS are equipped with an SD memory card slot, and SD memory cards with 32GB maximum
capacity can be used. Device values (log data) can be output to the SD memory card as CSV files using the DLOG (data log) andthe TRACE (data trace) instructions/FB. This enables log saved and analyzed when problems occur. The contents of the files saved
to the SD memory card can be checked on a computer. The files saved to the SD memory card can be uploaded using WindLDR.
Function

Description

Reference

Save log data

Specified device values can be saved to the SD memory card as CSV files using the DLOG
and TRACE instructions/FB.

5-52

SD memory card maintenancewith WindLDRThe SD memory card data can be read to a computer or deleted by using WindLDR. SD
memory card data can be managed and checked.

5-53

For the SD memory card hardware specifications, see "Product Specifications" on page 2-1.
Notes:
 Set the write-protect switch on the SD memory card to the off position before inserting it.
 Insert and remove the SD memory card in the direction indicated on the SmartAXIS module.
 Do not remove the SD memory card while it is being accessed. There is a risk of damage to the SD memory card and the data stored on it.

Save Log Data
Using the DLOG (data log) and the TRACE (data trace) instructions/FB, specified device values are saved to the SD memory cardas the log data (CSV files). The DLOG instruction/FB outputs the date and time and the device values of the specified devices to
the CSV file in the specified folder. The TRACE instruction/FB outputs the date and time and the device values of the previous
number of scans for the specified devices to the CSV file in the specified folder. For details on the DLOG and TRACE instructions,see Chapter 26 "Data Log Instructions" in the SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual. For details on the DLOG and TRACE FB,
see Chapter 16 "The data logging FB" in the SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual.
The SmartAXIS cannot write data to the SD memory card when its write-protect switch is on. Always set the write-protect switchof the SD memory card to off position before inserting it to the SmartAXIS.
CSV file output sample with the DLOG instruction/FB



Time

D0010

D0011

2011/09/07 15:40:00

12345

1

2011/09/07 15:41:00

1212

3

2011/09/07 15:42:00

345

4

CSV file output sample with the TRACE instruction/FB

Triggered at:

2011/09/07 15:40

Scan

D0010

D0011

D0012

Old

1

9

17

2

10

18

3

11

19

New

5-52

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
SD Memory Card Maintenance with WindLDR
You can browse and manipulate files on the SD memory card inserted in the SmartAXIS using Data File Manager of WindLDR.
Browse folders and files on the SD memory card.
Upload files on the SD memory card.
Delete folders and files on the SD memory card.
Format the SD memory card.

To browse and manipulate the files on the SD memory card inserted in the SmartAXIS using the Data File Manager, connect thecomputer and the SmartAXIS with either of these methods.
 Connect the USB port on the computer and the USB port on the SmartAXIS with a USB maintenance cable.
 Connect the Ethernet port on the computer and the Ethernet port on the SmartAXIS with an Ethernet cable.

Computer

To USB port
A plugTo USB port

SmartAXIS

Mini-B plug
USB maintenance cable

To Ethernet port

SD memory card

To Ethernet port
Ethernet cable

Notes:
 The Data File Manager cannot be used when an SD memory card is not inserted into the SmartAXIS.
 The Data File Manager cannot be used while the SmartAXIS is running.
 The Data File Manager uses the maintenance communication protocol of SmartAXIS, so it can be used only when the maintenancecommunication is possible. For example, the communication over Ethernet is not possible if the port number is different.
 The operating speed varies according the state of communications with the SmartAXIS and the capacity of the SD memory card.
 The Data File Manager cannot perform certain operations such as downloading files, creating folders, and changing file names.
 The basic restrictions of SD memory cards and the file system are the same as the restrictions for the DLOG and the TRACE instructions/FB.

Starting the Data File Manager
Operation procedure
1. Select Online > PLC > Maintenance > Data File Manager.

The Data File Manager dialog box opens.

Folderdetails view

Tree view

Execution log view

The execution log view shows the results of accessing and manipulating
files and folders on the tree view and the folder details view.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-53

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Exiting the Data File Manager
Operation procedure
1. Click X at the upper-right corner of the Data File Manager.

The Data File Manager exits.

Browsing folders
Operation procedure
1. In the address field, enter the folder path to the data.

The contents of the folder are displayed.

Toolbar
Address field
Folder details
view

Tree view
File nameLast modified
date and time

File size

Extension

Click on the tabs at the top to sortfiles/folders by type.

Click Refresh button on the toolbar to refresh the view with the latest status.
If you double click on a folder on the tree view or the folder details view in the Data File Manager, the contents of the folder are
displayed.

Deleting files and folders
Operation procedure
1. On the details view, right click on a file or folder and select Delete.
2. On the delete confirmation dialog, click Yes.

The file or folder is deleted.

Uploading files
Operation procedure
1. Click Upload button on the toolbar.

A dialog box is displayed for you to enter the location to save the selected files.

2. Enter the location and click OK.

The files uploaded from the SD card is saved to the specified location.

5-54

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Formatting the SD memory card
Operation procedure
1. Click Tools button on the toolbar.
Toolbar

2. Select Format SD Memory Card.

A warning message is displayed. To execute the format, click Yes, and then the format will be executed.

Notes:
 The volume label given to the SD memory card when formatted is fixed as "IDEC_FT1A."
 Formatting the SD memory card on the SmartAXIS is equivalent to formatting it with the quick format option in Windows.

File Structure
The save destination for log data varies depending on the instruction/FB. For the DLOG (data log) instruction/FB, the files are
saved under the DATALOG folder. For the TRACE (data trace) instruction/FB, the files are saved under the TRACE folder. The nameof folder storing files is specified in the DLOG and the TRACE instructions/FB.
SD memory card

DATA0001 (fixed)

DATALOG (fixed)

RESULT

20111201.csv
20111202.csv

Folder name

The folder name is specified by S1 of the DLOG instruction/FB. Any name witha maximum of eight single-byte alphanumeric characters can be specified.

File name

When the DLOG instruction/FB is executed, a CSV file is created with the date
(YYYYMMDD) as the file name.
(Example: 20111202.csv)

TRACE (fixed)

RESULT

20111210.csv
20111212.csv

Folder name

The folder name is specified by S1 of the TRACE instruction/FB. Any name witha maximum of eight single-byte alphanumeric characters can be specified.

File name

When the TRACE instruction/FB is executed, a CSV file is created with the date
(YYYYMMDD) as the file name.
(Example: 20111212.csv)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-55

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
SD Memory Card Status LED and SD Memory Card Status
The status LED turns on or flashes when the SD memory card is being formatted or during reading and writing.
SD memory card
status LEDOn

SD memory card state

Operation
The SD memory card
can be removed.

The standby state where the SD memory card can be written or read
 While the SmartAXIS is recognizing the SD memory card

Slow flashing(1 second interval)

 While the SmartAXIS is stopping the access due to SD memory card access stop

flag (M8076) turning on (slow flashing, then off)

Quick flashing(100 millisecond interval)

Do not remove the SD
memory card.

Reading from or writing to the SD memory card When an SD memory card is not inserted When an unsupported or unformatted SD memory card is insertedOff When access to the SD memory card is stopped by SD memory card access stop

flag (M8076)

The SD memory card
can be removed.

 When the SmartAXIS is turned off

Special Internal Relays for the SD Memory Card
The special internal relays (M8026 and M8027) turn on and off according to the installation status and the access state of the SD
memory card. Access to the SD memory card can be stopped by special internal relay M8076.
Address

M8026

M8027

M8076

Function

Description

Read/Write

This special internal relay turns on when the SD memory card has
been inserted into the SmartAXIS, the card has been recognized,
and the card is in a usable state. This special internal relay turns
off when the SD memory card is not inserted or when the SD
memory card is not recognized.

SD Memory Card Status

SD Memory Card Writing Flag

This special internal relay turns on when the SD memory card isbeing accessed.
This special internal relay turns off when the access has finished.

SD Memory Card Access Stop Flag

When this special internal relay changes from off to on, access to
the SD memory card is stopped. Once the access to the SD
memory card is stopped, insert the card into the SmartAXIS again
to make it accessible.

R

R/W

Note: R/W is the abbreviation for read/write. R/W indicates that the relay can be read and written. R indicates that the relay can only be read. W
indicates that the relay can only be written.

Timing Chart
The special internal relays turn on and off according to the installation status and the access state of the SD memory card asshown below.
Not
inserted Inserted

SD memory card insertedStandby state

Stop accessStandby state

SD memory card access state
Card being
recognized
SD memory card
access stop flag

M8076

SD memory card
statusM8026

SD memory card
writing flag

M8027

SD memory card
status LED

5-56

Reading /Writing

Accessstopping

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Slow
flashingOn

Quick
flashing

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

On

Slow
flashing

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Backlight ON Time
This section describes the function to change the backlight ON time for the SmartAXIS Pro.
Function Specification
When you press operation buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro, the LCD backlight is turned on. The backlight is turned off automaticallywhen there are no user operations. The backlight ON time can be configured with D8074 between 1 to 65,535 seconds. When thebacklight ON time is 0, the backlight is always ON. The default value is 10 seconds and can be configured in the Function Area
Settings dialog box of WindLDR.
Address
D8074

Description
Backlight ON Time

Read/Write
R/W

Notes
 The default value configured in the Function Area Settings is stored in D8074 once the user program downloaded is completed.
 If the backup battery is dead, the default value is stored in D8074.
 The backlight ON time can be configured with HMI function of SmartAXIS Pro. For details, see "Setting the LCD Backlight ON Time" on page

6-10.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > LCD Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select Always On or Turn off in in the backlight settings.

When you select Turn off in, enter the time period from the backlight is turned on until it is turned off. The time can be
configured between 1 and 65,535 seconds in increments of 1 second.

3. Click the OK button.

This concludes configuring the settings.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-57

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Monitoring Ladder ProgramThis section describes the function to monitor the ladder program on the LCD of the SmartAXIS.
The program monitor on the SmartAXIS Pro is only enabled when ladder program is selected as the programming language.
Function Specification
Two lines of the ladder program stored in the ROM can be displayed on the LCD. You can show the ladder program at the specified
line number by specifying it using the operation buttons. The SmartAXIS saves the monitored ladder line when ladder program
monitoring is finished, and you can resume to monitor the ladder program from the same ladder line.
You can display the details of instruction parameters or switch the on/off state of contacts using the operation buttons.
The ladder program can be monitored regardless of the Run/Stop status of the SmartAXIS.
Notes:
 The default value of the previously monitored ladder line number is one.
 The previously monitored ladder line number is lost at the following conditions: SmartAXIS Pro is powered up.
 A user program is downloaded to the SmartAXIS Pro.

In order to monitor the ladder program on the LCD of the SmartAXIS Pro, you need to configure settings using WindLDR.
There are two restrictions in creating the ladder programs that can be displayed on the LCD. Create ladder programs considering
those restrictions.
 A maximum of four ladder lines can be programmed in each ladder circuit.
 A maximum of eleven instructions can be programmed in each ladder line.

Programming WindLDR■Configuration at the start up of WindLDR
1. Launch WindLDR.

The Ladder Program Monitoring on FT1A dialog box is displayed.

2. Select Enabled (Default) and click the OK button.

5-58

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
■Configuration in the Function Area Settings
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > LCD Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the Enable ladder program monitoring on FT1A check box.
3. Click the OK button.

This concludes configuring the settings.

Note: The setting you select in the Ladder Program Monitoring on FT1A dialog box at the start up of WindLDR can be changed in the Function Area
Settings dialog box later.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-59

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Message Settings
The customized messages can be displayed on the LCD of the SmartAXIS Pro. This section describes the common settings,
character set, scroll, and blinking settings, for all messages to display.
Function Specification
Any messages can be displayed on the LCD of the SmartAXIS Pro using MSG (Message) instructions/FB.
The character set, scroll unit, scroll speed, and blinking speed are the common settings between all MSG instructions/FBs
programmed. Those common settings can be configured in the Message Settings of the Function Area Settings dialog box.
For details on the MSG instruction, see Chapter 13 "Display Instructions" in the SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual. For
details on the MSG FB, see Chapter 14 "The interface FB" - "MSG FB Common Settings" in the SmartAXIS FBD Programming
Manual.
■Character Set
The character set used for the messages can be configured.
Selection

Character Set

Languages usable in the MSG instruction/FB

EuropeanISO-8859-1 (Latin 1)

Italian, English, Dutch, Spanish, German, French

Japanese

Shift-JIS

Japanese

Chinese

GB2312Chinese (simplified)Cyrillic

ANSI 1251

Russian■Scroll Unit
The unit to scroll the texts can be configured.
1 character

Scrolls the text in 1 character units.

1 dot

Scrolls the text in 1 dot units.

■Scroll Speed
The speed to scroll the texts can be configured. The setting range is 500 to 1000 ms.
■Blinking Speed
The speed to blink the texts can be configured. The setting range is 500 to 1000 ms.

5-60

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > LCD Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Configure the character set, scroll unit, scroll speed, and blinking speed in the message settings.
3. Click the OK button.

This concludes configuring the settings.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-61

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
32-bit Data Storage Setting
When the double-word, long, or float data type is selected for the source or destination device, the data is loaded from or stored
to two consecutive data registers. The order of the two devices can be selected from the following two settings in the Function
Area Settings.
Setting

Description

From Upper Word (Default)

When a data register, timer, or counter is used as a double-word device, the high-word data is loaded fromor stored to the first device selected. The low-word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent
device.
This is identical with the 32-bit data storage of OpenNet Controller and FC4A/FC5A MicroSmart.

From Lower Word

When a data register, timer, or counter is used as a double-word device, the low-word data is loaded fromor stored to the first device selected. The high-word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent
device.

Devices
When the devices listed below are used as a double-word device, two consecutive devices are processed according to the 32-bit
data storage settings.
DeviceDevice Address

Data Register

D0 - D1999

Special Data Register

D8000 - D8199

Timer

T0 - T199

Counter

C0 - C199

Data: The following data composed of 32 bits is subject to this setting.
 Device values of advanced instructions/FB with the data processing units D (double word), L (long), F (float)
 Pulse output preset values and current values
 High-speed counter function current values, preset values, and reset values
 Frequency measurement values in frequency measurement
 Double word counter instruction/FB preset values

5-62

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Device Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Device Settings appears.

2. Under 32-bit Data Storage Setting, select From Upper Word or From Lower Word in the pull-down list.

Example: 32-bit Data Storage Setting
When data register D10 is designated as a double-word source device and data register D20 is designated as a double word
destination device, the data is loaded from or stored to two consecutive devices according the 32-bit data storage setting as
illustrated below.
Source Device

Destination Device
From Upper Word

From Upper WordHigh Word D10

4660(1234h)Low Word D11

22136(5678h)From Lower Word

Double-word Data
305419896(12345678h)

4660(1234h)High Word D20

22136(5678h)Low Word D21

From Lower Word

Low Word D10

22136(5678h)22136(5678h)Low Word D20

High Word D11

4660(1234h)4660(1234h)High Word D21

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-63

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
User Program Protection
This function protects the SmartAXIS user program from being modified, erased, or stolen by a third party.
You can configure the protection individually for uploading and downloading the user program in User Program Protection
under Program Protection. You can also configure the protection level for user programs in Security Mode under Program
Protection.
Mode

Description

Unprotected

The user program is unprotected.

Password protected

A password must be entered when downloading or uploading the user program.
The password is six to eight single-width alphanumeric characters, and it must include a minimum of one
number and one character.
One password can be set for one user program.
When applying password protection to both user program uploads and downloads, the same password is used.

Prohibited

The user program cannot be uploaded. Prohibited protection can only be configured for user program
uploads. User program downloads cannot be prohibited.

If the user program is protected, you will be prompted to enter your password when executing a download or an upload. The
download or upload can be executed by entering the correct password.
Note: Protection is also enabled when transferring user programs between the memory cartridge and the SmartAXIS.
For the SmartAXIS Lite, the password for the user program on the memory cartridge and the password for the user program on the SmartAXIS mustmatch. For the SmartAXIS Pro, the password must be entered with the LCD and operation buttons on the module.

Security Mode
Enhanced protection mode SV2 *1
Enhanced protection mode SV1 *1
Compatibility mode

Description
This mode generates a user program with higher protection level.
It is recommended to select a mode with a high SV value.
This mode generates a user program that can operate in the system software that
does not support Enhanced protection mode.

*1 SV stands for security version. The higher the SV number, the stronger the security.
Note: User program with Enhanced protection mode can only be downloaded to a SmartAXIS with the following system software versions.
SmartAXIS
Pro and Lite

Security Mode

System Software

Enhanced protection mode SV2

Version 2.50 or later

Enhanced protection mode SV1

Version 2.40 or later

Configure Compatibility mode when you use a SmartAXIS with a system software version lower than the one listed above.
Note: Before proceeding with the following steps, make sure to note the protect code, which is needed to disable the user program protection. If

the user program in the SmartAXIS is write- or read/write-protected, the user program cannot be changed without the protect code.
 If the user program is read-protected without using a password, the read protection cannot be temporarily disabled using the password, thus

the user program cannot be read out by any means. To disable the read protection, download another user program without user programprotection.

5-64

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Program Protection.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Program Protection appears.

2. Under User Program Protection, select required protect modes for Read Program and Write Program in the pull-down list.
Unprotected:

The user program in the SmartAXIS can be read and written without a password.

Password Protected:

Prevents unauthorized copying or inadvertent replacement of the user program.
This protection can be temporarily disabled using a predetermined password.

Prohibited:

Prevents copying of the user program completely.
This option is available for read protection only and can not be temporarily disabled using a password.

3. After selecting a required protect mode, enter a password of 6 through 8 ASCII characters from the key board in the New

Password field, and enter the same password in the Confirm Password field.

4. Configure Security Mode.

5. Click OK and download the user program to the SmartAXIS after changing any of these settings.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-65

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Disabling Protection
When the user program is password-protected against read and/or write, the protection can be temporarily disabled using
WindLDR.
If the user program is read-prohibited, the read protection cannot be disabled, thus the user program cannot be read by anymeans. To disable the read protection, download another user program without user program protection.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Download or Upload.

When the user program in the SmartAXIS is read and/or write protected, the Protect Error dialog box appears. When program
verification or online edit is attempted, the Protect Error dialog box appears.

2. Enter the password and click OK.

The user program protection is disabled only temporarily. When the SmartAXIS is powered up again, the protection designatedin the user program takes effect again.
To disable or change the protection permanently, change the protection settings and download the user program.

5-66

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Watchdog Timer SettingThis section describes watchdog timer setting.
A watchdog error occurs when the processing time for one scan exceeds the allowed time while the user program is running.
If a watchdog error occurs, the system is reset with the purpose of returning the system to normal operation.
If the watchdog error occurs frequently, you can assume that there is a hardware problem and that the SmartAXIS requires
replacement.
Some of the reasons why a watchdog timer will occur are problems with the SmartAXIS hardware and length of the processing
time in the program. If the processing time for one scan of the ladder program exceeds the time configured for the watchdog timer
on the ladder program, place an NOP (no operation) instruction in the ladder program. The watchdog timer is reset when the NOP
instruction is executed.
For FBD, the watchdog timer cannot be reset in the program.
Watchdog timer setting time
The watchdog timer setting time can be changed in the function area settings. Decide on the watchdog timer setting time in eitherof the following two ways.


Decide by user system specification
Determine the maximum on time (milliseconds) so the output signals do not stay on if the SmartAXIS loses control and set thatvalue as the watchdog timer setting time. However, if the ladder program processing time takes longer than the design
specification, use an NOP (no operation) instruction in the ladder program. For example, when the watchdog timer is set to
100ms and the maximum value for one scan is 120ms on the ladder program, insert an NOP instruction in the ladder program toensure that the error does not occur.

Match the program processing time
Check the maximum value for one scan (D8024) and set the watchdog timer value as a value with a safety margin added to the
maximum value.

Note: When changing the watchdog timer setting value, select an appropriate value that fully takes into consideration the safety of the system.
The maximum value of one scan while the SmartAXIS is running can be checked with special data register D8024.

Programming WindLDR
1. Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar, and then click Self Diagnostic.

The Function Area settings dialog box appears.

Watchdog Timer Settings
Select the watch dog timer setting between 100ms and 4000ms. The default time is 400ms.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-67

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Constant Scan Time
The scan time may vary whether basic and advanced instructions/FB are executed or not depending on input conditions to these
instructions/FBs. The scan time can be made constant by entering a required scan time preset value into special data register
D8022 reserved for constant scan time. When performing accurate repetitive control, make the scan time constant using thisfunction. The constant scan time preset value can be between 1 to 1,000ms.
The scan time error is ±1 ms of the preset value normally. When the data link or other communication functions are used, the scantime error may be increased to several milliseconds.
When the actual scan time is longer than the scan time preset value, the scan time cannot be reduced to the constant value.
Special Data Registers for Scan TimeIn addition to D8022, three more special data registers are reserved to indicate current, maximum, and minimum scan timevalues.
Note: R/W is the abbreviation for read/write. When R/W, it can be read and written. When R, it can only be read. When W, it can only be written.
D8022

Constant Scan Time Preset Value (1 to 1,000ms)

D8023

Scan Time Current Value (ms)D8024

Scan Time Maximum Value (ms)D8025

Scan Time Minimum Value (ms)

Example: Constant Scan Time
This example sets the scan time to a constant value of 500 ms.
MOV(W)
M8120

S1 –
500

D1 –
D8022

REP

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
When the SmartAXIS starts operation, the MOV (move) instruction stores 500 to special
data register D8022.
The scan time is set to a constant value of 500ms.

5-68

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Daylight Savings Time
This section describes the function that automatically adjusts the SmartAXIS time according to daylight savings time settings.
For regions where the SmartAXIS is used that implement daylight savings time, this function can automatically adjust the
SmartAXIS clock using the daylight savings time settings. When the time reaches the daylight savings start time, the clock is set anhour forward. When the time reaches the the daylight savings time end, the clock is set an hour back.
The SmartAXIS adjusts the clock for daylight savings time on the start day and the end day. However, the clock is also adjusted fordaylight savings time under the following conditions.
 When a user program was downloaded to the SmartAXIS.
 When the SmartAXIS power was turned on.

When the current time of the SmartAXIS' internal clock is set using WindLDR or the operator interface, the time is not adjusted fordaylight savings time, even if the time after it was set is within the daylight savings time period. Set the time to the time adjusted
for daylight savings time. The set date and time becomes the date and time after being adjusted for daylight savings time.

Programming WindLDR
Configure daylight savings time on the SmartAXIS.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Calendar & Clock.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the Enable daylight savings time check box.

3. Configure the start time and the end time. Specify the region using the Region list box.

If you select Custom, you are able to select any desired start time and end time.
RegionStart time

End time

CustomUser specified

User specified

USA or Canada

March, 2nd Sunday, 2:00 AM

November, 1st Sunday, 2:00 AM

EuropeMarch, last Sunday, 1:00 AM

October, last Sunday, 1:00 AM

Australia

October, 1st Sunday, 2:00 AM

April, 1st Sunday, 3:00 AM

4. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-69

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Clock Function
This section describes the internal clock function on the SmartAXIS.
This function enables you to control the time schedule for lighting or air conditioning equipment using the current time data stored
in special data registers. The internal clock data is backed up by a secondary lithium battery. The current time is reset when the
backup data is lost, so the current time will need to be set again.
Function

Description

Read clock

The current time (calendar, clock) is updated every 500 ms and automatically stored in the special dataregisters.

Set clockSets the current time (calendar, clock). Set the current time with WindLDR or a user program that uses the
special data registers.

Adjust function

When clock data adjust flag M8021 is turned on from off, the seconds for the current time are rounded up or
rounded down based on 30 seconds to correct the seconds data for the internal clock.
If the current seconds are between 0 and 29 seconds, the seconds are set to 0 when M8021 is turned on fromoff.
If the current seconds are between 30 and 59 seconds, the minutes are set to + 1 and the seconds are set to
0 when M8021 is turned on from off.

Calendar/clock error

M8013: This relay turns on if clock write processing or a clock adjust processing could not be executed
normally.
M8014: This relay turns on if an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read from the internal clock to thespecial data registers (D8008 to D8014).

Setting the Clock with WindLDR
Set the current time on the SmartAXIS with WindLDR.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.

WindLDR enters monitor mode.

2. Select Online > PLC > Status.

The PLC Status dialog box is displayed.

3. Click Change for Calendar.

The Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed. The current time on the computer is displayed in the dialog box as the initialvalue. The settings can also be changed as necessary.

4. Click OK.

The date and time configured in the dialog box is written to the SmartAXIS.

5-70

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Setting the Clock with a User Program
A user program can write the clock data from an operator interface without using WindLDR by using special data registers D8015
to D8021. Undefined values are stored in special data registers D8015 to D8021. Always store an appropriate value before turning
on M8016, M8017, or M8020.
Calendar Data Write Flag (M8016)
After writing data to the write calendar special data registers (D8015 to D8018), turn M8016 off to on to set the internal clock withthe data in D8015 to D8018 as the calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week).
Clock Data Write Flag (M8017)
After writing data to the write clock special data registers (D8019 to D8021), turn M8017 off to on to set the internal clock with thedata in D8019 to D8021 as the clock data (hour, minute, second).
Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag (M8020)
After writing data to the write calendar/clock special data registers (D8015 to D8021), turn M8020 off to on to set the internal
clock with the data in D8015 to D8021 as the calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week) and the clock data (hour, minute,second).
Calendar and clock data storage locations
The calendar/clock data is stored in the following special data registers.
Special data register

Description

Range

D8008

Year

D8009

Month

1 to 12

D8010

Day

1 to 31

Calendar/Clock
Current Data
(Read only)

D8011
D8012

Day of the week

0 to 6Hour

0 to 23

D8013

Minute0 to 59

D8014

Second0 to 59

D8015

Year

0 to 99

D8016

Month

1 to 12Day

1 to 31

D8017

Calendar/ClockNew Data(Write only)

D8018
D8019

Setting timing

0 to 99

Day of the week

0 to 6Hour

0 to 23

D8020

Minute0 to 59

D8021

Second0 to 59

Every 500 ms (Note)—

Note: If the scan time is 500 ms or longer, D8008 to D8014 are updated with each scan.

For the day of the week data, the values below are stored in the special data registers.
Day of the week

SundayMondayTuesday

WednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday

Value

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-71

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Example ladder program 1
This example sets the calendar and clock in a user program.
If you turn on M8020 with the new calendar/clock data set in the write-only data registers D8015 to D8021, the internal clock on
the SmartAXIS is updated with the current time (calendar, clock). In this example, the SmartAXIS internal clock is set to 9:35:00
on Tuesday February 21, 2012.

M8120

SOTU
I0000

MOV(W) S1 R
D1 R
D8008 D8015

REP7MOV(W) S1 12

D1 D0000REP

MOV(W) S1 2

D1 D0001

REP

MOV(W) S1 21

D1 D0002

REP

MOV(W) S1 2

D1 D0003

REP

MOV(W) S1 9

D1 D0004

REP

MOV(W) S1 35

D1 D0005

REP

MOV(W) S1 0

D1 D0006

REP

MOV(W) S1 R
D1 R
D0000 D8015

REP
4

M8120 is the initial pulse that turns on for only one scan at the start ofoperation.
When the SmartAXIS starts operating, the current calendar/clock data isstored in D8015 to D8021 and the new calendar/clock data is stored in D0 to
D6 with the MOV (move) instruction.

When external input I0 turns on, the new calendar data is stored in special
data registers D8015 to D8018.
Internal relay M0 turns on for one scan only.

M0000
SOTU
I0001

MOV(W) S1 R
D1 R
D0004 D8019

REP
3

When external input I1 turns on, the new clock data is stored in special dataregisters D8019 to D8021.
Internal relay M1 turns on for one scan only.

M0001
M0000

M8020

When external input M0 or M1 turns on, M8020 turns on and the calendar/
clock data is written to the internal clock.
(M8020: Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag)

REP
7

M8125 is a special internal relay that is always on during operation.
While the SmartAXIS is running, the current time (calendar, clock) is stored in
D10 to D16 with the MOV instruction.

M0001
MOV(W) S1 R
D1 R
D8008 D0010

M8125

Example ladder program 2
When I1 turns off to on, the seconds on the internal clock are corrected to 0 seconds.

SOTU
I0001

M8021

When input I1 turns on, clock data adjust flag M8021 turns on to correct the seconds on the internal clock.
Note: The internal clock backup time is approximately 30 days (25°C TYP). If the power loss time exceeds the backup time, the retained clock data
is lost and the current time is initialized as 00:00:00 on January 1, 2000.

5-72

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Network Settings
This section describes the network settings of the SmartAXIS.
These settings are used to configure the network to use the SmartAXIS Ethernet port. All SmartAXIS models are equipped with an
Ethernet port except for the 12-I/O type. Configure the SmartAXIS network settings in the same manner as the network settings
for a computer.
The network settings can be configured with either of the methods below.
 Automatically acquire an IP address (DHCP)A DHCP server must be present on the network where the SmartAXIS is located. The SmartAXIS automatically acquires its network settingsfrom the DHCP server. The network settings are acquired from the DHCP server when the user program is finished downloading and when
the SmartAXIS is turned on.
 Use the following IP addressEnter the SmartAXIS network settings as a fixed IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. The network settings are applied when theuser program is finished downloading. Consult the network administrator regarding the IP address to configure.
Note 1: The SmartAXIS default settings are: IP address 192.168.1.5, subnet mask 255.255.255.0, default gateway 0.0.0.0.
Note 2: When automatically acquiring an IP address using DHCP, the same IP address may not be assigned each time depending on the DHCP
server settings and the system configuration on the network where the SmartAXIS is operating. (Example: When using DHCP with two SmartAXIS
and automatically acquiring the IP addresses, the IP addresses for two SmartAXIS may be replaced.) When the SmartAXIS is incorporated in asystem configuration where it is a communication target, we recommend setting a fixed IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

Programming WindLDR
1. Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar, and then click Network Settings.

The Function Area settings dialog box appears.

2. Select Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) or Use the following IP address.

When Use the following IP address is selected, enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-73

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Connection Settings
This section describes the configurations of the SmartAXIS module for client/server connections..

Applications
The SmartAXIS supports Ethernet communication functions with a maximum of three connections. Using those connections,maintenance communication, Modbus TCP communication, user communication, and remote I/O communication can be used.
Those communications can be configured in the Function Area Settings dialog box.

Description of functions
The SmartAXIS has a maximum of three connections for the maintenance communication server, user communication server,
Modbus TCP communication server, user communication client, Modbus TCP communication client and remote I/O master.
To limit the access to the SmartAXIS, IP address flittering can be used. By specifying the IP address that can access the
SmartAXIS, anonymous access can be prevented.
Connection Status and Connected IP Address
The connection status of connections with remote hosts can be confirmed with special internal relays M8110 to M8112. When aconnection with a remote host is established, the corresponding special internal relay is turned on. When the connection is
disconnected, the corresponding special internal relay is turned off. The IP addresses of the remote hosts can be confirmed withspecial data registers D8110 to D8121.
Note: R/W is the abbreviation for read/write. When R/W, it can be read and written. When R, it can only be read. When W, it can only be written.

Special Internal Relays
Device Address

Description

M8110

Connection 1 Status

M8111

Connection 2 Status

M8112

Connection 3 Status

Details
While a connection is established with a remote host,the special internal relay will be on. When noconnection is established, it will be off.

Special Data Registers
Device Address

5-74

Description

D8110-D8113

Connection 1
Connected IP Address

D8114-D8117

Connection 2
Connected IP Address

D8118-D8121

Connection 3
Connected IP Address

Details
IP address is stored in the corresponding special dataregisters. For example, when the IP address isaaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, each value is stored as follows:
D8110=aaa, D8111=bbb, D8112=ccc, andD8113=ddd.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Connection Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select Communication Mode for the connection to use.

Configure the communication mode allocated to a maximum of three connections that can be used as client or server. Eachconnection can be set to a different port number. Set connections that are not used to Unused.
3. Select Maintenance Communication Server.

The Maintenance Communication Server dialog box is displayed.

4. Specify the parameters.

Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-75

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
Remote Host List
This chapter describes how to configure a list of network devices (remote hosts) in the network to which the SmartAXIS
communicates.

Applications
When the SmartAXIS accesses and communicates with other network devices in the network, the remote host device should bespecified. The remote host list is required to use the following functions: ETXD/ERXD Instructions (User communication over Ethernet)
 Modbus TCP Client Remote I/O Master

Description of Functions
The remote host consists of an IP Address or a Host Name and a Port Number.
When a remote host is specified with an IP address, and the SmartAXIS establishes connection with the remote host that has the
specified IP address and the corresponding port number, then communication is started.
When a remote host is specified with a host name, the SmartAXIS tries to obtain the IP address from the specified host nameusing the DNS server. If the IP address is successfully obtained, the SmartAXIS establishes connection with the remote host thathas the specified IP address and the corresponding port number, then communication is started.
For details about DNS server settings, see Network Settings in the Function Area Settings.

Programming WindLDR
1. Double-click on the Remote Host List in the Project Window.

The Remote Host List dialog box appears.

5-76

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S
2. Click New button or select an existing remote host and click Edit button.

The Remote Host dialog box appears.

IP Address:

Specify the remote host with an IP address.

Port Number:Specify the port number of the remote host. This port number is the TCP communication port number. It
differs from the SmartAXIS USB port number (port 1) and the expansion communication port numbers (port2, 3).

Comment:

The comment for the remote host can be assigned. The contents or the length of the comment has no effecton the SmartAXIS operation.

3. Configure the parameters in the Remote Host dialog box and then click on Add button.

A new remote host will be added in the Remote Host List dialog box. If you want to add additional remote hosts, repeat thesame procedure. After adding remote hosts has been completed, click on Close button.

4. If you want to delete an unused remote host, select that remote host in the Remote Host List dialog box and click on Delete

button.
Once a remote host is deleted, the remote host numbers of the following remote hosts are changed. As a result, the functions
referring to those remote hosts, such as Modbus TCP client, or User communication client, will be affected,

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

5-77

5: S P ECI AL F UN CTI ON S

5-78

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
I ntroduction
You can run and stop the user program, monitor device values, and modify settings on the SmartAXIS Pro by using the LCD andoperation buttons on the SmartAXIS. This chapter describes how to modify the user program and device values with the operation
buttons.
Function Description
The following functions can be used with SmartAXIS button operations.
TypeFunction

Description

Run/stop
operation

Switching run/stop

The program running state (run/stop) can be changed with theoperation buttons on the SmartAXIS.

Edit Program

Confirming/Clearing changed timer/counter preset values

Change timer/counter preset values or writes them to the user
program in the ROM.

Configurations

Slave Number/
Message Scroll/Blink
Menu Language/
LCD backlight ON time

Environment
settings
Calendar/Clock

Configures the calendar/clock of the SmartAXIS internal clock.

Device Monitor

Displays/modifies the specified device values.

Program Monitor

Displays the ladder program.
The on/off state of bit devices can be changed. This is only enabled
when ladder program is selected as the programming language.

Status Monitor

Displays the system software version, operating status, scan time, andprotection status.

Monitors

Message display

Error Monitor

Enables you to check errors that have occurred on the SmartAXIS.

Message display

Displays messages with pre-configured formats on the SmartAXIS LCD
using the MSG instruction/FB.

Uploading user program

The user program in the SmartAXIS can be transferred to the memory
cartridge.

Downloading user program

The user program on the memory cartridge can be transferred to the
SmartAXIS.

Stop Access

Stops the access to the SD memory card in order to remove the SD
memory card from the SmartAXIS.

FormatFormats the SD memory card.

Memory Cartridge

SD memory card

Some of the function area settings (slave number, message scroll
speed, scroll unit, blinking speed, and LCD backlight ON time) can be
modified.
The system menu language can also be changed.

Initial Screen
The screen below is displayed when the SmartAXIS is purchased and first turned on.

Power turned on

SmartAXIS

Standard screen

Stopped2000/JAN/01/SAT
00:00:00

Stopped2000/JAN/01/SAT
00:00:00

The default menu language is English. To switch the menu language to Japanese, see "Changing the Menu Language" on page 68.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-1

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
About the Menu Screen
This section describes SmartAXIS menu screen.
When switching from the standard screen to the system menu screen, the menu items are displayed on the LCD.
Standard Screen
The standard screen is the screen that is displayed after the SmartAXIS is turned on. It shows the current date, time, andoperating status (stopped/running).

StoppedRunning

2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

System Menu
You can execute operations, such as running and stopping the SmartAXIS, monitoring devices, and modifying the settings, on thesystem menu. The menu items displayed on the LCD differ according to the operating status (running/stopped) of the SmartAXIS.
StoppedRunning

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor

System Menu when SmartAXIS is stopped

The menu items displayed while the SmartAXIS is stopped are as follows.
 Run

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
Device Monitor
The symbol is displayed
Program Monitor when menu items continue below.
Status Monitor
Error Status

 Edit Program External Memory
 Configurations
 Device Monitor
 Program Monitor
 Status Monitor
 Error Status

System Menu while SmartAXIS is running

The menu items displayed while the SmartAXIS is running are as follows.
 Stop External Memory
 Device Monitor
 Program Monitor
 Status Monitor
 Error Status

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status

Message Screen
The SmartAXIS can display messages on the LCD using the MSG (message) instruction/FB. While the SmartAXIS is running, themessage is displayed when the input conditions of MSG (message) instructions/FB are ON. Multiple message screens with different
priorities can be switched and displayed with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Message screen

Priority: 0

㸨Insufficient parts㸨
Manu. Line Process 1
2012/JUL/10

6-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Priority: 1

Supply parts
Production countType A: 100 pcs.
Type B: 300 pcs.

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Basic Operations
This section describes how to use the SmartAXIS buttons.
The SmartAXIS Pro has the(up),(down),
used to operate the screens displayed on the LCD.

(left),(right),(ESC), and(OK) buttons, and these buttons are

Pushing the Switches
The operation of the buttons differs by how they are pressed. There are two ways to push the buttons, which are detailed below.
Press/Hold
Press (short press)
Press and hold (long press)

Operation
The switch is pressed for 0.1 seconds or more and less than three seconds and then released.
The switch is pressed for three seconds or more and then released.

(up),(down) buttons
Moves the cursor up and down to select menu items. These buttons are also used to modify numeric values and enter passwords.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status
Password:
****1
0

1
2
3
.
.
(left),(right) buttons
Moves the cursor left and right. These buttons are used to move the cursor while changing digits, entering password, or operatingon the ladder display screen.

Line Number:
00001 / 65535(ESC),(OK) buttons
Confirm menu items with the(OK) button. Return to the previous screen with the(ESC) button.

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Return to theprevious screen.

Confirm
menu items.

Do you want tostop PLC?
NoYes

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-3

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
List of Button Operations on the System Menu Screen

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
SwitchPress/Hold

Basic operation

Press

Moves the cursor up one line. If the cursor is at the start of the item list, nothing happens.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Moves the cursor down one item. If the cursor is at the end of the item list, nothing happens.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press
Press and hold
Press

Nothing happens.

Press and holdPress

Executes the function selected with the cursor (depending on the function, displays additional menus).

Press and hold

Nothing happens.

Press

Returns to the previous screen (the calling screen).

Press and hold

While pressing the(ESC) button, press the(OK) button to return to the top screen of the system menu.

List of Button Operations on the Ladder Monitor Screen
Ladder monitor screen
00001
I0000

SOTU

00002
M0000

Switch

6-4

M0001

M0002

Press/Hold

Basic operation

Press

Moves the cursor up one line. When the cursor is on the top line of the rung, nothing happens.

Press and holdMoves the cursor to the top line of one rung above. If the cursor is on the top rung, it moves the cursor to the
top line of that rung.

Press

Moves the cursor down one line. When the cursor is on the last line of the ladder, nothing happens.

Press and holdMoves the cursor to the top line of one rung below. If the cursor is on the bottom rung, it moves the cursor to
the top line of that rung.

Press

Moves the cursor once to the left. When the cursor is at the left edge of the line, nothing happens.

Press and holdMoves the cursor to the left edge. When the cursor is at the left edge of the line, nothing happens.

Press

Moves the cursor once to the right. When the cursor is at the right edge of the line, nothing happens.

Press and holdMoves the cursor to the right edge. When the cursor is at the right edge of the line, nothing happens.

Press

If the instruction selected by the cursor is a NO contact or a NC contact, toggles the on/off state. If the
instruction selected by the cursor is not a NO contact or a NC contact, nothing happens.

Press and hold

Displays the parameter details for the instruction selected with the cursor.

Press

Ends ladder monitor mode.

Press and holdNot valid.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
List of Button Operations after Executing a System Menu Item
System menu
(Ladder monitor line setting)Line Number:
00001 / 65535

SwitchMenu language selection

Menu Languages:
Japanese

Press/Hold

Basic operation

Press

Adds 1 to the number selected with the cursor.
Shows the item above the item selected with the cursor. If the top of the item list is displayed, nothing happens.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Subtracts 1 from the number selected with the cursor.
Shows the item below the item selected with the cursor. If the bottom of the item list is displayed, nothing
happens.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Moves the cursor once to the left.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Moves the cursor once to the right.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Confirms the modification.

Press and holdNot valid.

Press

Discards the modification.

Press and hold

While pressing the(ESC) button, press thescreen of the system menu.

(OK) button to discard the modification and return to the top

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-5

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Switching to the System Menu
This section describes how to switch to the system menu from the standard screen.
1. On the standard screen, while pressing the

In further descriptions, this is explained as "push the switches.

(ESC) button, press the(OK) button.
(ESC) +(OK) buttons". (1) and (2) in the diagram indicate the order to

SmartAXIS

StoppedStopped(1)

2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40(2)

The system menu is displayed.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
While the SmartAXIS is running, the top screen for the running system menu is displayed.
On the system menu screen, press the

6-6(ESC) +(OK) buttons to return to the standard screen.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Switching run/stop
You can run and stop the SmartAXIS with the button operations.
Running the SmartAXISThis section describes the steps to run the SmartAXIS.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Run and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations↓
The SmartAXIS is set to run.

Running
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40
CautionWhen setting the SmartAXIS to run by using the buttons on the SmartAXIS module, fully ensure the safety
before doing so.

Stopping the SmartAXISThis section describes the steps to stop the SmartAXIS.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Running
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Stop and press the(OK) button.

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
3. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want tostop PLC?
No
Yes↓
The SmartAXIS is set to stop.

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-7

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
SmartAXIS Environment Settings
When the SmartAXIS is stopped, you can configure the menu language, internal clock, slave number, and the scroll unit/speed andblinking speed for messages displayed with the message (MSG) instruction/FB. These cannot be configured while the SmartAXIS is
running.
Changing the Menu Language
When the SmartAXIS is stopped, you can change the menu language between Japanese, English, and Chinese. This cannot bechanged while the SmartAXIS is running. The menu language is set to English when the SmartAXIS is shipped from the factory, so
this section describes how to switch the language to Japanese.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

6WRSSHG-$16$7


The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Menu Languages and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Japanese with the(down) button, and then press the(OK) button to confirm.

Menu Languages:
Japanese Selectable menu languages

The menu languages that can be selected are as follows.
English/Japanese/Chinese Retaining the menu language setting

For system software version V2.20 and later, the menu language setting is retained in the ROM of the SmartAXIS. Even if the
backup battery is dead, it is not required to change the menu language again.

6-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Setting the Calender/ClockThis section describes how to adjust the internal clock in the SmartAXIS. This cannot be adjusted while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Clock with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select the year, month, or day to modify with the(left) andFor example, modify Day.

(right) buttons.

2012/10/10
13: 30: 40
5. Modify Day with the(up) and(down) buttons.

2012/10/11
13: 30: 40
6. From Day position, press the

For example, modify Minute.

(right) button to select the clock.

2012/10/11
13: 30: 40
7. Modify Minute with the(up) and(down) buttons.

2012/10/11
13: 35: 40
8. Press the(OK) button to confirm the modifications to the calendar/clock.

 Calendar/clock configuration range

The calendar/clock configuration range is as follows.
Year

Month

Day

Hour

MinuteSecond2000 to 2099

01 to 1200 to 3100 to 2300 to 59

00 to 59

Notes:
 When the date is modified, the day of the week automatically changes. The day of the week is not displayed on the configuration screen.
 If an invalid date is set, an error message is displayed. When the error message is displayed, press the

button to return to the configuration screen, and then set a valid date.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL(ESC) button or the

(OK)

6-9

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Setting the LCD Backlight ON Time
When the SmartAXIS operation buttons are pressed, the backlight turns on.
After an operation button is pressed and the backlight turns on, the backlight automatically turns off if the operation buttons are
not pressed. On the system menu, you can adjust the time from when the backlight turns on until it turns off.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Backlight with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(left) and(right) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons, and then press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Move the cursor with the

Backlight ON time:00010 s

5. Select the value with the(OK) button to set the backlight ON time.

Backlight ON time:
00020 s Backlight ON time configuration range

The backlight ON time configuration range is as follows.
0 to 65,535 seconds
Notes:
 The default backlight ON time is 10 seconds. The default value can be modified in WindLDR Function Area Settings dialog box. For details,

see "Backlight ON Time" on page 5-57.
 The backlight ON time can be changed by modifying the value of D8074.
 When the backlight ON time is set from the system menu, the value of D8074 is modified.
 The value of D8074 returns to the default value when the battery backup dies.
 If the backlight ON time is 0, the backlight is always on.

6-10

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Configuring the Slave Number
When the SmartAXIS is stopped, you can configure the slave number used in maintenance communication or Modbus RTU
communication. This cannot be configured while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Function with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Communications with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings

5. Select Slave Number with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Slave Number

The port selection screen is displayed.
6. Select Port 2 with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

For example, change the slave number of the port 2 to 1.

Port 2:0Port 3:0
7. Specify 1 with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Port 2:
1
Port 3:0 Selectable slave numbers

The slave numbers that can be selected are as follows.
Port 2

Port 30 to 255

0 to 255

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-11

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Notes:
 When the slave number is modified from the system menu, the value in the slave number type (constant/special data register) configured

with WindLDR is modified. The slave number type cannot be changed from the system menu.
 If the slave number type configured with WindLDR is Constant, when the slave number is modified from the system menu and the

button is pressed, the modified slave number is reflected in the function area settings for the user program. If Special Data Register, thevalues of D8027 and D8028 are modified. (The modification is not reflected in the function area settings for the user program.) The values of D8027 and D8028 return to the default values when the battery backup dies.
 The slave number configuration range differs according to the communication mode (maintenance communication/Modbus RTU slave).

If a value outside the configuration range is set, the following message is displayed. Press theto the configuration screen, and then set the correct slave number again.

(ESC) button or the

button to return

Port 2:Out of valid range
ࠉ 0
 For maintenance communication, see "Maintenance Communication via Expansion Communication Port" on page 9-3, and for Modbus RTU

slaves, see "Modbus Communication via RS-232C/RS-485" on page 11-1.

Configuring the Network Settings
When the SmartAXIS (24/ 40/ 48-I/O type) is stopped, you can configure the netwrok settings.
These cannot be configured while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Function with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Communications with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings

5. Select Network Settings with the

Slave Number
Network Settings
The network settings screen is displayed.
For example, change the IP address to 192. 168. 1. 6.
6-12

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
6. Select IP Address with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Network Settings
DHCP: OFFIP Address:
192.168. 1. 5
7. Specify 6 with the

IP Address:
192.168. 1.

8. Pressbutton.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

6(ESC) button to set the network settings, and then select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK)

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

The IP address is set to 192.168.1.6.
 Network settings configuration range

The network settings configuration range is as follows.
DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

ON/OFF

000.000.000.000 to
255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000 to
255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000 to
255.255.255.255

Notes:
 When DHCP is enabled, the network settings are automatically obtained and cannot be manually configured.
 You can monitor the current network settings from Status Monitor.

Modifying the Function Settings
Modifying the Scroll Speed

While the SmartAXIS is stopped, you can configure the scroll speed for messages displayed with the message (MSG) instruction/FB.
This cannot be configured while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. In step 4 of Configuring the Slave Number, select Message Settings and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings

2.

Select Scroll Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

3. Select Scroll Speed with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-character
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-13

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
4. Modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

For example, change the value to 700 ms.

Scroll Speed:
700 msScroll Unit:
1-character Selectable scroll speeds

The scroll speeds that can be selected are as follows.
500/600/700/800/900/1000 ms
Configuring the Scroll Unit

When the SmartAXIS is stopped, you can configure the scroll unit for messages displayed with the message (MSG) instruction/FB.
This cannot be configured while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. In step 3 of Modifying the Scroll Speed, select Scroll Unit and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-character
2. Modify the scroll unit with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-dot Selectable scroll units

The scroll units that can be selected are as follows.
1 character/1 pixel
Configuring the Blinking Speed

When the SmartAXIS is stopped, you can configure the blinking speed for messages displayed with the message (MSG)
instruction/FB. This cannot be configured while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. In step 2 of Configuring the Scroll Speed, select Blink Settings and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

2. Select Blinking Speed with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Blinking Speed:
500 ms3. Modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button. For example, change the value to 700 ms.

Blinking Speed:
700 ms Selectable blinking speeds

The blinking speeds that can be selected are as follows.
500/600/700/800/900/1000 ms
6-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Monitoring the SmartAXIS
Monitoring Device Values
You can check device values on the SmartAXIS. When you switch the SmartAXIS to the device monitor mode from the standard
screen, you can check device values, but you cannot modify them. To modify device values, run Device Monitor on the systemmenu. Device values can be monitored regardless of the SmartAXIS operating status (run/stop). This section describes the device
monitor mode when the SmartAXIS is running.
1. If you press the(left) and(right) buttons on the standard screen, the SmartAXIS switches to the device monitor modeand the device values can be monitored. Continue to press the(left) and(right) buttons to change the device type.

R
R
R
R

000, 0123456789
010, 0123456789
020, 0123456789
030, 0123456789

Running
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

I 0000,I 0010,I 0020,I 0030,01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

The device type changes in the order below.
I  Q  T  TC  TP  C  CC  CP  D (Data Register)  D (Special Data Register)  M (Internal Relay)  M (Special
Internal Relay)  R
2. Press the(up) and(down) buttons.
The device numbers change.

, 
,  
,  
,  
,,,,Shows the on/off state of the inputs (I).
Inverted inputs are on state.

 
 
 
 

Modifying Device Values
This section describes how to specify a device and modify that device value.
Modifying a Bit Device Value

This section describes an example of switching on M0012 while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Running
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Device Monitor with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the
The SmartAXIS switches to the Device Monitor mode.

(OK) button.

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
3. Select device type: M (internal relay) with the

0 flashes to indicate the focus is on M0000.

M 0000,M 0010,M 0020,M 0030,(left) and(right) buttons and press and hold the(OK) button.

01234567
01234567
01234567
012345S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-15

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
4. With the(up) and(down) buttons, select M0010.
0 flashes to indicate the focus is on M0010.

M 0000,M 0010,M 0020,M 0030,01234567
01234567
01234567
012345

5. Move the cursor to 2 with the

M 0000,M 0010,M 0020,M 0030,

M0012 turns on.

(right) button and press the(OK) button.

01234567
01234567
01234567
012345Modifying a Word Device Value
This section describes an example of changing D0002 to 500 while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Running
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40
The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Device Monitor with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the
The SmartAXIS switches to the Device Monitor mode.

(OK) button.

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
3. Select device type: D (Data Register) with the

D
D
D
D

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:
0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

(right) buttons and press and hold the

00100
00200
00300
00400

4. Select D0002 with the

D
D
D
D

(left) and(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

00100
00200
00300
00400

5. Move the digit with the(right) button and modify the value with the(up) and

Change Device Val.:
D 0000:00500
DEC (W)
6. Press the

'
'
'
'
6-16






(OK) button to confirm.





S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL(down) buttons.

(OK) button.

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Writing/Clearing TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values) in the User Program
Writing TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values)
Even if you modify TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values) with Device Monitor mode, those changes are notwritten to the user program in the ROM. To write the changed preset values to the ROM, you must stop the SmartAXIS andconfirm the changes. When you modify TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values) and attempt to leave Device
Monitor mode, the message below is displayed.

Timer/counter preset
values are changed.
1. Press the(ESC) button or the

When the SmartAXIS is running(OK) button to display the standard screen.

When the SmartAXIS is stopped

Running
T/C is changed
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

StoppedT/C is changed
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

When TP (timer preset values) and CP (counter preset values) differ from the device values in the ROM, T/C is changed isdisplayed on the standard screen.
When the SmartAXIS is running, put it to Stop mode. For the steps to stop the SmartAXIS, see "Switching run/stop" on page 6-7.
2. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

StoppedT/C is changed
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
3. Select Edit Program with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
4. Select T/C Preset Values and press the(OK) button.

T/C Preset Values

5. Select Confirm with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

T/C Change Status:
T/C is changed
Clear
Confirm
The changed preset values are written to the user program in the ROM.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-17

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Clearing TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values)
1. In step 5 of Writing TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values), select Clear with the

buttons, and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down)

T/C Change Status:
T/C is changed
Clear
Confirm

The changes made to the timer and counter preset values are deleted. The preset values of the user program in the ROM remain
as they are before those values are modified. The device values return to the values before they are modified.
Note: Using WindLDR, you can also write the preset values to the user program in the ROM. Select Online > Monitor > Start Monitor. SelectOnline > PLC > Status to display the PLC Status dialog box, and click the Confirm button under Timer/counter preset value modification
state. Once preset values are confirmed, they cannot be restored to their previous values, even if they are cleared.

Monitoring the User Program
You can monitor the ladder program while the SmartAXIS is running or stopped when ladder program is selected as the
programming language.
The on/off state of bit devices can also be modified.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

When the SmartAXIS is running

When the SmartAXIS is stopped

Running

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Program Monitor with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the

When the SmartAXIS is running

When the SmartAXIS is stopped

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor

External Memory
Configurations
Device Monitor
Program Monitor(OK) button.

The SmartAXIS switches to the Program Monitor mode.
3. Select Last Monitored Line with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Last Monitored Line
Go To...

4. The cursor can be moved with the(up),(down),(left), and(right) buttons.

00009
I0000

SOTU

M0000

M0001

00010
M0002

M0003

M0004

For details on the ladder program monitor, see Chapter 2 "Ladder Program Monitoring on the SmartAXIS" in the SmartAXIS Ladder
Programming Manual.
Note: When FBD program is selected as the programming language, Program Monitor and the System Menu items under it are not displayed on
the screen in step 2.

6-18

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Monitoring the SmartAXIS Status
You can check the SmartAXIS system software version, operating status, scan time, and protection status.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

When the SmartAXIS is running

When the SmartAXIS is stopped

Running

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Status Monitor with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the

When the SmartAXIS is running

When the SmartAXIS is stopped

External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor

Configurations
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor

3. The system version is displayed. Press the(down) button.

When the SmartAXIS is running

When the SmartAXIS is stopped

System Version:
1.00
Run/Stop Status:
Running

System Version:
1.00
Run/Stop Status:
Stopped4. The scan time is displayed. Press the

Scan Time:
Current㸸ࠉMaximum㸸ࠉ
Minimum㸸ࠉ(OK) button.

(down) button.

2 ms
4 ms
2 ms

5. The upload protection status is displayed. Press the(down) button.

Protection Status:
Read Program:
Prohibited
6. The download protection status is displayed.

Protection Status:
Write Program:
Password

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-19

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Checking/Clearing Error Information
When an error occurs while the SmartAXIS is running, an error message is displayed on the LCD. This section describes the steps
for checking the details and clearing the error.
1. When an error occurs, the following message is displayed.

When an error occurs while SmartAXIS
is running and the SmartAXIS stops

Error!
PLC is stopped.
Press OK button for
more details.
2. Press and hold theWhen an error occurs while SmartAXIS is
running and the SmartAXIS continues running

Error!
PLC is running.
Press OK button for
more details.

(OK) button. The error code is displayed.

General Error㸸 3
Execution Error㸸0
Clear Error
Error details can also be checked from Error Status on the system menu.
3. Select the error type with the(up) and
Only errors that have occurred are displayed.

(down) buttons and press theGeneral Error㸸 3Power failure
Watchdog Timer
4. Press the(ESC) button.

5. Select Clear Error with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

General Error㸸 3
Execution Error㸸0
Clear Error
6. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toclear error code?
No
Yes
General errors and user program execution error are cleared.
Note: For details on error information, see "Troubleshooting" on page 14-1.

6-20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL(OK) button.

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Checking Error Information from the System Menu
You can check error information from the system menu.
1. On the standard screen, press the

The system menu is displayed.

2. Select Error Status with the(ESC) +(up) and(OK) buttons.
(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status
3. The error code is displayed.

General Error㸸 3
Execution Error㸸0
Clear Error
4. Select the error type with the(up) and
Only errors that have occurred are displayed.

General Error㸸 3Power failure
Watchdog TimerS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-21

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Uploading/Downloading the User Program
While the SmartAXIS is stopped, you can upload the user program in the SmartAXIS to the memory cartridge. You can also
download the user program in the memory cartridge to the SmartAXIS.
Uploading the User Program (SmartAXIS to Memory Cartridge)
You can upload the user program in the SmartAXIS to the memory cartridge. This function cannot be used while the SmartAXIS is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Memory Cartridge with theMemory Cartridge
SD Card
4. Select PLC -> Cartridge with the

PLC -> Cartridge
Cartridge -> PLC
5. If the password is configured, you are prompted to enter the password.

Enter the password with the(up),(down),(left), and(right) buttons and press the

Password:***A

Entering the password is required for the following cases:(OK) button.

- The user program in the SmartAXIS is password-protected against the user program upload.
- The user program in the memory cartridge is password-protected against the user program download.

The confirmation screen is displayed.
6. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want to clear
program in cartridge?
NoYes
7. The screen below is displayed while the user program is uploaded. When the upload is finished, the screen in step 4 is displayed.

Notes:
 In either of the situations below, the password must be entered.
 The user program on the SmartAXIS has been password protected for program uploads.
 The user program on the memory cartridge has been password protected for program downloads.
 If an invalid password is entered in step 5, the screen below is displayed.

Password is incorrect.

Press the

6-22

(ESC) button or the(OK) button to return to step 4, and then enter the correct password in step 5.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Downloading the User Program (Memory Cartridge to SmartAXIS)
You can download the user program in the memory cartridge to the SmartAXIS. This function cannot be used while the SmartAXIS
is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Memory Cartridge with theMemory Cartridge
SD Card
4. Select Cartridge -> PLC with the

PLC -> Cartridge
Cartridge -> PLC
5. If the password is configured, you are prompted to enter the password.

Enter the password with the(up),(down),(left), and(right) buttons and press the

Password:***A

Entering the password is required for the following cases:(OK) button.

- The user program in the SmartAXIS is password-protected against the user program download.
- The user program in the memory cartridge is password-protected against the user program upload.

The confirmation screen is displayed.
6. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want to clear
program in PLC?
No
Yes
7. The screen below is displayed while the user program is downloaded. When the download is finished, the screen in step 4 isdisplayed.

Notes:
 In either of the situations below, the password must be entered.
 The user program on the SmartAXIS has been password protected for program uploads.
 The user program on the memory cartridge has been password protected for program downloads.
 If an invalid password is entered in step 5, the screen below is displayed.

Password is incorrect.

Press the(ESC) button or the(OK) button to return to step 4, and then enter the correct password in step 5.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-23

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Displaying Arbitrary Messages
The SmartAXIS can display messages on the LCD by executing the MSG (message) instruction/FB.
When the display conditions for multiple MSG instructions/FB are satisfied, the messages are displayed according to the priorities
set for the MSG instructions/FB. The message with the highest priority is displayed, out of all the MSG instructions/FB with the
inputs on, by pressing the(up) button on the standard screen. By further pressing the(up) button, the message with thenext highest priority is displayed.
Switching between Multiple Message Screens
1. On the standard screen, press the(up) button.

Running
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40
The message with the highest priority is displayed out of all the MSG instructions/FB with the inputs on.

Today's production countType A: 10000 pcs.
Type B: 30000 pcs.
2. Press the(up) button.
The message with the next highest priority is displayed.

*Insufficient parts*
Manu. Line Process 1
2012/07/10
3. Press the(down) button.

Today's production countType A: 10000 pcs.
Type B: 30000 pcs.
4. Press the(ESC) button to return to the standard screen.

For details on the MSG instruction, see Chapter 13 "Display Instructions" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
For details on the MSG FB, see Chapter 14 "The interface FB" in the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

6-24

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Maintaining the SD Memory Card
Access to the memory card inserted into the SmartAXIS can be stopped while the SmartAXIS is running or stopped. The memory
card inserted into the SmartAXIS can also be formatted while the SmartAXIS is stopped. The memory card cannot be formatted
while the SmartAXIS is running.
Stopping Access to the SD Memory Card
This section describes how to stop the access to the SD memory card with the button operations on the SmartAXIS.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Running
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the

When the SmartAXIS is running

When the SmartAXIS is stopped

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

3. Select SD Card with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(OK) button.

Memory Cartridge
SD Card

4. Select Stop Access with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Stop Access
Format5. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want to stop
SD card access?
NoYes
6. While the access to the SD memory card is being stopped, the screen below is displayed. When stopping the access is finished,

the screen in step 4 is displayed.

Notes:
 Set the write-protect switch on the SD memory card to insert into the SmartAXIS module to the off position.
 Insert and remove the SD memory card in the direction indicated on the SmartAXIS.
 Do not remove the SD memory card while the access to it is being stopped. There is a risk of damage to the SD memory card and the datastored on it. Check that the SD memory card access LED is off before removing the SD memory card from the SmartAXIS.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-25

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Format SD memory card with the SmartAXISThis section describes how to format the SD memory card in the SmartAXIS. In order to save the log data, format the SD memory
card in the SmartAXIS.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select SD Card with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Memory Cartridge
SD Card

4. Select Format with the

Stop Access
Format5. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toformat SD card?
NoYes
6. While the SD memory card is being formatted, the screen below is displayed. When the format is finished, the screen in step 4

is displayed.

6-26

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
Entering a Password
This section describes how to unlock the password protection configured in the user program for uploading and downloading by
WindLDR and the memory cartridge.
1. When the password screen is displayed, the cursor is on the first character.

Password:
0

2. With the(up) and(down) buttons, select an alphanumeric character.
Following 0 through 9, you can select A through Z and a through z.

Password:
11

3. Move the cursor to the second character with the(right) button.

Password:*0

4. With the(up) and(down) buttons, select an alphanumeric character.

5. Enter the password using the same steps and press the(OK) button.

Password:***A
When the correct password is entered, the menu for the next step is displayed.
Notes:
 The characters that can be entered on the password screen are as follows. However, the space cannot be used as a password.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z
 If you enter a wrong character, it can be deleted by selecting the space.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

6-27

6: HM I F UN CTI ON
System Menu Hierarchy Diagram
System menu

Menus that require a password

Stop
Run
Edit Program

T/C Preset Values

External Memory

Memory Cartridge

PLC -> Cartridge
Cartridge -> PLC

SD Card

Stop Access
FormatConfigurations

Function

Communications

Slave Number

Port 2
Port 3

Network Settings

DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

Clock

Message Settings

Scroll Settings

Scroll Unit

Menu Languages
Blink Settings

Backlight
Device Monitor

Blinking Speed

Specify Device

Program Monitor*1

Status Monitor

Scroll Speed

Last Monitored Line
Go To...
System Version
Run/Stop Status
Scan Time

Current
Maximum
Minimum

Protection Status

Read Program
Write Program

Network Settings

DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
MAC Address

Error Status

General Error
Execution Error
Clear Error*1 When FBD program is selected as the programming language, Program Monitor and the System Menu items under it are not displayed.

6-28

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
I ntroduction
This chapter describes device addresses available for the SmartAXIS. Special internal relays and special data registers are also
described.
The SmartAXIS is programmed using devices such as inputs, outputs, remote inputs, remote outputs, internal relays, timers,
counters, shift registers, and data registers.
Inputs (I) are relays to receive input signals through the input terminals.
Remote inputs (I) are relays to receive input signals from external devices connected to the remote I/O slaves.
Outputs (Q) are relays to send the processed results of the user program to the output terminals.
Remote outputs (O) are relays to send output signals to external devices connected to the remote I/O slaves.
Internal relays (M) are relays used in the CPU and cannot be outputted to the output terminals.
Special internal relays (M) are internal relays dedicated to specific functions.
Timers (T) are relays used in the user program, available in 1-sec, 100-ms, 10-ms, and 1-ms timers.
Counters (C) are relays used in the user program, available in adding counters and reversible counters.
Shift registers (R) are registers to shift the data bits according to pulse inputs.
Data registers (D) are registers used to store numerical data.
Special data registers (D) are dedicated to special functions.

Device Addresses
Available I/O numbers depend on the type of the SmartAXIS.
FT1A-12

DeviceDeviceAddress

FT1A-24
PointsDeviceAddress

FT1A-40
PointsDeviceAddress

16

I0 - I7
I10 - I17
I20 - I27

FT1A-48
PointsDeviceAddress

FT1A Touch
PointsDeviceAddress

Points24

I0 - I7
I10 - I17
I20 - I27
I30 - I35

30

I0 - I7

8

Input (I)*I0 - I7

8

I0 - I7
I10 - I17

Remote Input
(I)*

—

—

I40 - I75
I80 - I115
I120 - I15590

I40 - I75
I80 - I115
I120 - I15590

I40 - I75
I80 - I115
I120 - I15590

I40 - I75
I80 - I115
I120 - I155

90

Output (Q)*Q0 - Q3

4

Q0 - Q7

8

Q0 - Q7
Q10 - Q17

16

Q0 - Q7
Q10 - Q17
Q20, Q2118

Q0 - Q3

4

Remote Output
(Q)*

—

—

Q40 - Q61
Q80 - Q101
Q120 - Q141

54

Q40 - Q61
Q80 - Q101
Q120 - Q141

54

Q40 - Q61
Q80 - Q101
Q120 - Q141

54

Q40 - Q61
Q80 - Q101
Q120 - Q141

54

Internal Relay(M)*

M0 - M317

256

M0 -M1277

1024

M0 -M1277

1024

M0 - M1277

1024

M0 - M1277

1024

Special Internal
Relay (M)*

M8000 M8177

144

M8000 M8177

144

M8000 M8177

144

M8000 M8177

144

M8000 - M8177 144

Shift Register (R) R0 - R127

128

R0 - R127

128

R0 - R127

128

R0 - R127

128

R0 - R127

128

Timer (T)T0 - T99

100

T0 - T199

200

T0 - T199

200

T0 - T199

200

T0 - T199

200

Counter (C)C0 - C99

100

C0 - C199

200

C0 - C199

200

C0 - C199

200

C0 - C199

200

Data Register(D)*3

D0 - D399

400

D0 - D1999

Special Data
Register (D)D8000 D8199

200

D8000 D8199

*2

2000

D0 - D1999

200

D8000 D8199

*2

*2

2000

D0 - D1999

2000

D0 - D1999

2000

200

D8000 D8199

200

D8000 - D8199

200

Notes:*1 The least significant digit of input, output, internal relay, and special internal relay device address is an octal number (0 through 7). Upper digits
are decimal numbers.
*2 Out of data registers D0 through D1999, D1000 through D1999 cannot be designated as "keep" types. Retained in STOPRUN, but zeroed out
when the power is turned on.
*3 When you use data register ROM backup, you can initialize the data registers with the values backed up in ROM. For details, see Chapter 5"Special Functions" – “Data Register ROM Backup” on page 5-9.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7-1

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
Special Internal Relays
Special internal relays M8000 through M8177 are used for controlling the CPU operation and communication, and for indicating the
CPU statuses. All special internal relays cannot be used as destinations of advanced instructions.
Internal relays M300 through M335 are used to read input device statuses of the IOREF (I/O refresh) instruction.
Note: Do not change the status of reserved special internal relays, otherwise the SmartAXIS may not operate correctly.

Special Internal Relay Device Addresses
DeviceAddress

Description

Power
OFF

Read/
Write

Ladder

FBD

M8000

Start Control

Maintained

Maintained

Write

X

X

M8001

1-sec Clock Reset

ClearedCleared

Write

X

X

M8002

All Outputs OFF

ClearedCleared

Write

X

X

M8003

Carry (Cy) or Borrow (Bw)

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

M8004

User Program Execution Error

ClearedCleared

Read

X

X

M8005

Remote I/O Slave 1 Communication Error

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8006

Remote I/O Slave 2 Communication Error

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8007

Remote I/O Slave 3 Communication Error

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8010

In daylight saving time period (system version 1.10 or later)

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

X

―

―

―

―

―
X

M8011M8012— Reserved —M8013

Calendar/Clock Data Write/Adjust Error Flag

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

M8014

Calendar/Clock Data Read Error Flag

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

X

―

―

―

―

―

M8015

— Reserved —M8016

Calendar Data Write Flag

Operating

Cleared

Write

X

X

M8017

Clock Data Write Flag

Operating

Cleared

Write

X

X

M8020

Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag

Operating

Cleared

Write

X

X

M8021

Clock Data Adjust Flag

Operating

Cleared

Write

X

X

M8022

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 2)

ClearedCleared

Write

X

―

M8023

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 3)

ClearedCleared

Write

X

―

M8024

BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag

Maintained

Maintained

Read

X

―

M8025

Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X

M8026

SD Memory Card Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8027

SD Memory Card Writing Flag

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

ClearedClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8030

Comparison Output Reset

M8031

Gate Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8032

Reset Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

Reset Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8035

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8036

Underflow

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8037

Count Direction

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8040

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8041

Gate Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

Reset Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8043

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8044

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8045

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8046

Gate Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8047

Reset Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

Reset Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8052

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8053

Underflow

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8054

Count Direction

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8033
M8034

M8042

M8050
M8051

7-2

CPU
StoppedHigh-speed Counter (Group 1/I0)

High-speed Counter (Group 2/I2)

High-speed Counter (Group 3/I3)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
DeviceAddress

Description

CPU
Stopped

Power
OFF

Read/
Write

LadderFBD

ClearedClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8055

Comparison Output Reset

M8056

Gate Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

Reset Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8060

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8061

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

―

―

―

―

―
―

M8057

High-speed Counter (Group 4/I5)

M8062M8067— Reserved —M8070

Interrupt Input I0 Status

ClearedCleared

Read

X

M8071

Interrupt Input I2 Status

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

M8072

Interrupt Input I3 Status

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

M8073

Interrupt Input I5 Status

M8074

Interrupt Input I6 Status(ON: Allowed, OFF:
Prohibited)

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―
―

M8075

Interrupt Input I7 Status

ClearedCleared

Read

X

M8076

SD Memory Card Access Stop Flag

Operating

Cleared

Write

X

X

―

―

―

―

―

M8077

— Reserved —M8080

Interrupt Input I0 Edge

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

M8081

Interrupt Input I2 Edge

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

M8082

Interrupt Input I3 Edge

M8083

Interrupt Input I5 Edge

(ON: Rising, OFF: Falling)

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

M8084

Interrupt Input I6 Edge

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

M8085

Interrupt Input I7 Edge

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

―

―

―

―

―

M8086
M8087

— Reserved —M8090

Group 1/I0

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8091

Group 2/I2

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8092

Group 3/I3

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

Group 4/I5

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8094

Group 5/I6

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8095

Group 6/I7

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

―

―

―

―

―

Connection 1

ClearedCleared

Write

X

―

Connection 2

ClearedCleared

Write

X

―

Connection 3

ClearedCleared

Write

X

―

―

―

―

―

―

Connection 1(ON: Connected, OFF: Not
Connected)

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

X

Connection 2(ON: Connected, OFF: Not
Connected)

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

X

Connection 3(ON: Connected, OFF: Not
Connected)

Operating

Cleared

Read

X

X

―

―

―

―

―

M8093

Catch Input ON/OFF Status

M8096
M8097
M8100
M8101
M8102

— Reserved —User Communication
Receive Instruction Cancel
Flag

M8103M8107— Reserved —

M8110

M8111

Connection Status

M8112
M8113M8117— Reserved —M8120

Initialize Pulse

ClearedCleared

Read

X

X

M8121

1-sec ClockOperating

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8122

100-ms ClockOperating

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8123

10-ms ClockOperating

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8124

Timer/Counter Preset Value Changed

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8125

In-operation Output

ClearedCleared

Read

X

X

―

―

―

―

―

M8126
M8127

— Reserved —S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7-3

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
DeviceAddress
M8130
M8131
M8132

Description
Disconnect User
Communication Connection

M8133M8143
M8144

Power
OFF

Read/
Write

LadderFBD

Connection 1

Maintained

ClearedRead/WriteX―

Connection 2

Maintained

ClearedRead/WriteX―

Connection 3

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

―

―

―

―

―

―

ClearedCleared

Read

X

―

―

―

―

―

―
―

— Reserved —Timer Interrupt Status (ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited)

M8145M8147

CPU
Stopped— Reserved —M8150

Comparison Result 1

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

M8151

Comparison Result 2

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

―

M8152

Comparison Result 3

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

―

M8153
M8154
M8155

— Reserved —Data Register ROM Backup

M8156M8157

―

―

―

―

Write

Operating

ClearedRead/Write

X

X

Read

Operating

ClearedRead/Write

X

X

―

―

―

―

―

— Reserved —M8160

ESC Key + Up Key

ClearedCleared

Read

X

X

M8161

ESC Key + Down Key

ClearedCleared

Read

X

X

ESC Key + Left Key

ClearedCleared

Read

X

X

ESC Key +Right Key

ClearedCleared

Read

X

X

―

―

―

―

―

ClearedClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8162

Key Input Status

M8163
M8164
M8165

— Reserved —M8166

Comparison Output Reset

M8167

Gate Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

Reset Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8171

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8172

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8173

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8174

Gate Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

Reset Input

Maintained

ClearedRead/Write

X

X*

M8176

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8177

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

Read

X

X

M8170

M8175

High-speed Counter (Group5/I6)

High-speed Counter (Group 6/I7)*1 Read only when FBD program is selected as the programming method.

M8000 Start Control
M8000 is used to control the operation of the CPU. The CPU stops operation when M8000 is turned off while the CPU is running.
M8000 can be turned on or off using the WindLDR Online menu. When a stop or reset input is designated, M8000 must remain on
to control the CPU operation using the stop or reset input.
M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down. When the data to be maintained during power failure is broken after
the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration, the CPU restarts operation or not as selected in
Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error. For details on SmartAXIS Pro/Litestart control, see "Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error" on page 5-5.
M8001 1-sec Clock Reset
While M8001 is on, M8121 (1-sec clock) is turned off.
M8002 All Outputs OFF
When M8002 is turned on, all outputs and remote outputs go off until M8002 is turned off. Self-maintained circuits using outputs
also go off and are not restored when M8002 is turned off.
M8003 Carry (Cy) and Borrow (Bw) [Ladder program only]
When a carry or borrow results from executing an addition or subtraction instruction, M8003 turns on. M8003 is also used for thebit shift and rotate instructions. For the causes of carry (CY) and borrow (BW), when ladder program is selected as the
programming language, see Chapter 4 "Instructions Reference" – "Carry and Borrow" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming
Manual".

7-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
M8004 User Program Execution Error
When an error occurs while executing a user program, M8004 turns on. The cause of the user program execution error can bechecked using Online > Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Status > Error Status > Details.
For a list of Pro/Lite user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Error" on page 14-6.
M8005 Remote I/O Slave 1 Communication Error
When an error occurs during communication with remote I/O slave 1, M8005 turns on. When the error is cleared, M8005 turns off.
M8006 Remote I/O Slave 2 Communication Error
When an error occurs during communication with remote I/O slave 2, M8006 turns on. When the error is cleared, M8006 turns off.
M8007 Remote I/O Slave 3 Communication Error
When an error occurs during communication with remote I/O slave 3, M8007 turns on. When the error is cleared, M8007 turns off.
M8010 In Daylight Saving Time Period
When the daylight saving time is enabled, M8010 is turned on while in the daylight saving time period. When the daylight saving
tiem is disabled, M8010 is always off.
M8013 Calendar/Clock Data Write/Adjust Error Flag
When an error occurs while calendar/clock data is written or clock data is adjusted, M8013 turns on. If calendar/clock data is
written or clock data is adjusted successfully, M8013 turns off.
M8014 Calendar/Clock Data Read Error Flag
When an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read from the internal clock to the special data registers (D8008 to D8014),
M8014 turns on. If calendar/clock data is read successfully, M8014 turns off.
M8016 Calendar Data Write Flag
When M8016 is turned on, data in data registers D8015 through D8018 (calendar new data) are set to the internal clock.
M8017 Clock Data Write Flag
When M8017 is turned on, data in data registers D8019 through D8021 (clock new data) are set to the internal clock.
M8020 Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag
When M8020 is turned on, data in data registers D8015 through D8021 (calendar/clock new data) are set to the internal clock.
M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag
When M8021 is turned on, the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds. If seconds are between 0 and 29 for current time,
adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same. If seconds are between 30 and 59 for current time,
adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented by one.
M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 2) [Ladder program only]
When M8022 is turned on, all RXD2 instructions ready for receiving user communication through port 2 are disabled.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 3) [Ladder program only]
When M8023 is turned on, all RXD3 instructions ready for receiving user communication through port 3 are disabled.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8024 BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag [Ladder program only]
While the BMOV or WSFT is executed, M8024 turns on. When completed, M8024 turns off. If the CPU is powered down while
executing BMOV or WSFT, M8024 remains on when the CPU is powered up again.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8025 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped
Outputs are normally turned off when the CPU is stopped. M8025 is used to maintain the output statuses when the CPU is
stopped. When the CPU is stopped with M8025 turned on, the output ON/OFF statuses are maintained. When the CPU restarts,
M8025 is turned off automatically.
M8026 SD Memory Card Status
When an SD memory card is inserted into the SmartAXIS, M8026 turns on. When an SD memory card is not inserted, M8026 turnsoff.
M8027 SD Memory Card Writing Flag
While logging data is written to the SD memory card, M8027 turns on. When writing logging data is finished, M8027 turns off.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7-5

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
M8030-M8061 Special Internal Relays for High-speed Counter
Special internal relays used for the high-speed counter.
For details on the Pro/Lite high-speed counter, see "High-Speed Counter" on page 5-13.
M8070-M8075 Interrupt Input Status [Ladder program only]
Turns on when the corresponding user interrupt is allowed. When interrupt inputs are disabled, these internal relays are turned off.
M8070=Interrupt input I0 status, M8071=Interrupt input I2 status, M8072=Interrupt input I3 status
M8073=Interrupt input I5 status, M8074=Interrupt input I6 status, M8075=Interrupt input I7 status
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8076 SD Memory Card Access Stop Flag
Access to the SD memory card is stopped when M8076 is turned off to on.
M8080-M8085 Interrupt Input Edge (ON: Rising, OFF: Falling) [Ladder program only]This flag indicates whether the interrupt input is triggered with a rising edge or falling edge.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8090-M8095 Catch Input ON/OFF Status
When a rising or falling input edge is detected during a scan, the input statuses of catch inputs Group 1/I0 through Group 6/I7 at
the moment are set to M8090 through M8095, respectively, without regard to the scan status. Only one edge is detected in one
scan. For the catch input function, see "Catch Input" on page 5-32.
M8100-M8102 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag [Ladder program only]
When M8100, M8101, or M8102 is turned on, all ERXD instructions ready for receiving user communication through connection 1,
connection 2, or connection 3 are disabled, respectively.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8110-M8112 Connection Status
When SmartAXIS and a network device are connected via the maintenance communication server, user communication server/
client, or Modbus TCP server/client, the connection status turns on. When no network devices are connected, the connection
status turns off.
These relays are always off for the 12-I/O type (SmartAXIS without Ethernet port).
M8120 Initialize Pulse
When the CPU starts operation, M8120 turns on for a period of one scan.

1 scan time
M8120
Start

M8121 1-sec Clock
While M8001 (1-sec clock reset) is off, M8121 generates clock
pulses in 1-sec increments, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (500ms on and
500ms off).
M8122 100-ms Clock
M8122 always generates clock pulses in 100ms increments,
whether M8001 is on or off, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (50ms on and50ms off).
M8123 10-ms Clock
M8123 always generates clock pulses in 10ms increments,
whether M8001 is on or off, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (5ms on and5ms off).

500 ms

500 ms

M8121
1 sec
50 ms

50 ms

M8122
100 ms
50 ms

50 ms

M8123
100 ms

M8124 Timer/Counter Preset Value Changed
When timer or counter preset values are changed in the CPU module RAM, M8124 turns on. When a user program isdownloaded to the CPU from WindLDR or when the changed timer/counter preset value is cleared, M8124 turns off.
When a timer or counter is designated as a destination of an advanced instruction, the timer/counter preset value is also changed.
M8125 In-operation Output
M8125 remains on while the CPU is running.

7-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
M8130-M8132 Disconnect User Communication Connection [Ladder program only]
When SmartAXIS is connected to a remote host with the user communication client and a special internal relay corresponding to
the connection is turned off to on, the connection is disconnected. This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as
the programming language. Special internal relays M8130 through M8132 are allocated to connections 1 through 3, respectively.
These relays are enabled only when user communication client is used. These relays have no effect for the user communication
server. Nothing happens for the 12-I/O type (SmartAXIS without Ethernet port) when these relays are turned on.
M8144 Timer Interrupt Status [Ladder program only]
When timer interrupt is enabled, M8144 is turned on. When disabled, M8144 is turned off.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8150 Comparison Result 1 [Ladder program only]
When the CMP= instruction is used, M8150 is turned on when the value of device designated by S1 is greater than that of device
designated by S2 (S1 > S2). See Chapter 7 "Data Comparison Instructions" - "Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, and M8152
in CMP=" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
When the ICMP>= instruction is used, M8150 is turned on when the value of device designated by S2 is greater than that ofdevice designated by S1 (S2 > S1). See Chapter 7 "Data Comparison Instructions" - "Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, andM8152 in ICMP>=" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8151 Comparison Result 2 [Ladder program only]
When the CMP= instruction is used, M8151 is turned on when the value of device designated by S1 is equal to that of device
designated by S2 (S1 = S2). See Chapter 7 "Data Comparison Instructions" - "Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, and M8152
in CMP=" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
When the ICMP>= instruction is used, M8151 is turned on when the value of device designated by S3 is greater than that ofdevice designated by S2 (S3 > S2). See Chapter 7 "Data Comparison Instructions" - "Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, andM8152 in ICMP>=" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8152 Comparison Result 3 [Ladder program only]
When the CMP= instruction is used, M8152 is turned on when the value of device designated by S1 is less than that of device
designated by S2 (S1 < S2). See Chapter 7 "Data Comparison Instructions" - "Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, and M8152
in CMP=" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
When the ICMP>= instruction is used, M8152 is turned on when the value of device designated by S2 is less than that of device
designated by S1 and greater than that of device designated by S3 (S1 > S2 > S3). See Chapter 7 "Data Comparison Instructions"- "Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, and M8152 in ICMP>=" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
M8154: Write Data Register values to ROM
This special internal relay is used for the data register ROM backup. When M8154 is on at the end of scan, the values of all dataregisters are written to ROM. After writing values, the execution status is stored in D8133 and M8154 turns off. For details, see
Chapter 5 "Special Functions" – “Data Register ROM Backup” on page 5-9.
M8155: Read Data Register values from ROM
This special internal relay is used for the data register ROM backup. When M8155 turns on at the end of scan, the values in thecorresponding ROM are read and stored in the data registers specified by D8184 (start address to read) and D8185 (number ofregisters to read). After reading values, the execution status is stored in D8133 and M8155 turns off. For details, see Chapter 5"Special Functions" – “Data Register ROM Backup” on page 5-9.
M8160-M8163 Button Input Status
While the ESC button and direction buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro are simultaneously pressed, the corresponding special internal
relays M8160 through M8163 turn on. When no buttons are pressed, M8160 through M8163 turn off.
M8166-M8177 Special Internal Relays for High-speed Counter
Special internal relays used for the high-speed counter.
For details on the Pro/Lite high-speed counter, see "High-Speed Counter" on page 5-13.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7-7

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
Special Data Registers
Note: Do not change the data of reserved special data registers, otherwise the SmartAXIS may not operate correctly.

Special Data Register Device Addresses
Device Address

Description

Ladder

FBD

See
Page

D8000

Quantity of Inputs

When I/O initialized

X

X

7-11

D8001

Quantity of Outputs

When I/O initialized

X

X

7-11

D8002

SmartAXIS Type Information

Power-up

X

X

7-11

D8003

Memory Cartridge Information

Power-up

X

X

7-11

—

―

―

—

When error occurred

X

X

7-11
7-11

D8004

— Reserved —D8005

General Error Code

D8006

User Program Execution Error Code

D8007

When error occurred

X

X

—

―

―

—

— Reserved —

D8008

Year

Every 500 ms

X

X

7-11

D8009

Month

Every 500 ms

X

X

7-11

D8010

Day

Every 500 ms

X

X

7-11

Day of Week

Every 500 ms

X

X

7-11

Hour

Every 500 ms

X

X

7-11

D8013

MinuteEvery 500 ms

X

X

7-11

D8014

SecondEvery 500 ms

X

X

7-11

D8015

Year

—

X

X

7-11

D8016

Month

—

X

X

7-11

D8017

Day

—

X

X

7-11

Day of Week

—

X

X

7-11

Hour

—

X

X

7-11

D8020

Minute

—

X

X

7-11

D8021

Second

—

X

X

7-11

D8022

Constant Scan Time Preset Value(1 to 1,000 ms)

—

X

X

7-11

Scan Time Current Value (ms)Every scan

X

X

7-11

Scan Time Maximum Value (ms)At occurrence

X

X

7-11

Scan Time Minimum Value (ms)At occurrence

X

X

7-11

D8011
D8012

D8018
D8019

D8023
D8024
D8025

Calendar/Clock
Current Data
(Read only)

Calendar/ClockNew Data(Write only)

Scan Time
Data

D8026

Communication Mode Information (Port 2 and Port 3)

Every scan

X

X

7-12

D8027

Port 2 Slave Number

Every scan

X

X

7-12

D8028

Port 3 Slave Number

Every scan

X

X

7-12

D8029

System Software Version

Power-up

X

X

7-12

D8030

Communication Adapter Information

Power-up

X

X

7-12

D8031

Optional Cartridge Information

Power-up

X

X

7-12

D8032

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I0)

—

X

―

7-12

D8033

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I2)

—

X

―

7-12

D8034

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I3)

—

X

―

7-12

D8035

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I5)

—

X

―

7-12

D8036

Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.

—

X

―

7-13

D8037

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I6)

—

X

―

7-12

D8038

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I7)

—

X

―

7-12

D8039

SD Memory Card Capacity (Megabytes)

Every 1 sec

X

X

7-13

D8040

Analog Input Value (AI0)Every scan

X

X

7-13

D8041

Analog Input Value (AI1)

Every scan

X

X

7-13

D8042

Analog Input Value (AI2)

Every scan

X

X

7-13

D8043

Analog Input Value (AI3)

Every scan

X

X

7-13

D8044

Analog Input Value (AI4)

Every scan

X

X

7-13

D8045

Analog Input Value (AI5)Every scan

X

X

7-13

D8046

Analog Input Value (AI6)Every scan

X

X

7-13

D8047

Analog Input Value (AI7)

Every scan

X

X

7-13

—

―

―

—

D8048-D8049

7-8

Updated— Reserved —S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
Device Address

Description

D8050

High Word

D8051

Low Word

D8052
D8053
D8054

High-speed
Counter(Group 1/I0)

High Word
Low WordHigh Word

D8055

Low Word

D8056

High Word

D8057

Low Word

D8058
D8059
D8060

High-speed
Counter(Group 2/I2)

High Word
Low WordHigh Word

D8061

Low Word

D8062

High Word

D8063

Low Word

D8064
D8065
D8066

High-speed
Counter(Group 3/I3)

High Word
Low WordHigh Word

D8067

Low Word

D8068

High Word

D8069

Low Word

D8070
D8071
D8072

High-speed
Counter(Group 4/I5)

D8073
D8074

High Word
Low WordHigh Word
Low Word

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I0)

UpdatedEvery scan

Preset Value—

Reset Value—

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I2)

Every scan

Preset Value—

Reset Value—

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I3)

Every scan

Preset Value—

Reset Value—

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I5)Every scan

Preset Value—

Reset Value

—

FBD

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

See
Page
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13

Every scan

X

X

—

―

―

—

—

X

X

7-13

D8078

X

X

D8079

X

X

D8080

X

X

X

X

D8082

X

X

D8083

X

X

D8084

X

X

D8085

X

X

X

X

D8087

X

X

D8088

X

X

D8089

X

X

X

X

D8091

X

X

D8092

X

X

D8093

X

X

X

X

D8075-D8076
D8077

D8081

D8086

D8090

D8094

Backlight ON Time

Ladder— Reserved —Out of Analog Input Range Status

MAC Address (Read only)

Every 1 sec

IP Address (Current Data) Read only

Subnet Mask (Current Data) Read only

Default Gateway (Current Data) Read only

Every 1 sec

Every 1 sec

Every 1 sec

D8095
D8096-D8103— Reserved —

7-13

7-13

7-13

7-13

7-14

X

X

—

―

―

—

Every scan

X

―

7-14

D8104

RS232C Control Signal Status (Ports 2 and 3)

D8105

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Ports 2 and 3)

When sending/receiving data

X

―

7-14

D8106

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Ports 2 and 3)

When sending/receiving data

X

―

7-14

—

―

―

—

D8107-D8109— Reserved —S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7-9

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
Device Address

Ladder

FBD

D8110

X

X

D8111

X

X

X

X

D8113

X

X

D8114

X

X

D8115

X

X

X

X

D8117

X

X

D8118

X

X

D8119

X

X

X

X

D8112

D8116

D8120

Description

UpdatedConnection 1 Connected IP Address

Every 1 sec

Connection 2 Connected IP Address

Every 1 sec

Connection 3 Connected IP Address

Every 1 sec

D8121
D8122-D8129— Reserved —

7-14

7-14

7-14

X

X

—

―

―

—

D8130

Connection 1 Connected Port Number

Every 1 sec

X

X

7-14

D8131

Connection 2 Connected Port Number

Every 1 sec

X

X

7-14

D8132

Connection 3 Connected Port Number

Every 1 sec

X

X

7-14

When executing dataregister ROM backup
read and write

X

X

7-15

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

D8133

Data Register ROM Backup

Execution Status

D8134

High Word

D8135

Low Word

D8136
D8137
D8138

High-speed
Counter(Group 5/I6)

High Word
Low WordHigh Word

D8139

Low Word

D8140

High Word

D8141

Low Word

D8142
D8143
D8144

High-speed
Counter(Group 6/I7)

D8145

High Word
Low WordHigh Word
Low Word

D8146

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I6)

Every scan

Preset Value—

Reset Value—

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I7)

Every scan

Preset Value—

Reset Value

—

7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13

— Reserved —

—

―

―

—

D8148

Communication Error Status

When error occurred

X

X

7-15

D8149

Analog Input (AI10)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8150

Analog Input (AI11)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8151

Analog Input (AI12)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

Analog Input (AI13)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

Analog Input (AI14)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8154

Analog Input (AI15)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8155

Analog Input (AI16)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8156

Analog Input (AI17)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8157

Communication Error Status

When error occurred

X

X

7-15

D8158

Analog Input (AI20)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8159

Analog Input (AI21)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8160

Analog Input (AI22)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

Analog Input (AI23)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

Analog Input (AI24)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8163

Analog Input (AI25)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8164

Analog Input (AI26)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8165

Analog Input (AI27)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8147

D8152
D8153

D8161
D8162

7-10

See
Page

Remote I/O
Slave 1

Remote I/O
Slave 2S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
Device Address

Description

UpdatedLadder

FBD

See
Page

D8166

Communication Error Status

When error occurred

X

X

7-15

D8167

Analog Input (AI30)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8168

Analog Input (AI31)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8169

Analog Input (AI32)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

Analog Input (AI33)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

Analog Input (AI34)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8172

Analog Input (AI35)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8173

Analog Input (AI36)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

D8174

Analog Input (AI37)

Every scan

X

X

7-15

— Reserved —

—

—

—

—

Start Address to Read

—

X

X

7-15

Number of Registers to Read

—

X

X

7-15

— Reserved —

—

—

—

—

D8170
D8171

Remote I/O
Slave 3

D8175-D8183
D8184
D8185

Data Register
ROM Backup

D8186-D8199

D8000 Quantity of Inputs
The total of input points provided on the SmartAXIS is stored to D8000.
D8001 Quantity of Outputs
The total of output points provided on the SmartAXIS is stored to D8001.
D8002 SmartAXIS Type Information
Information about the SmartAXIS type is stored to D8002.
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 12-I/O type
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 24-I/O type
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 40-I/O type
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 48-I/O type
SmartAXIS Touch

D8003 Memory Cartridge Information
When an optional memory cartridge is installed on the SmartAXIS cartridge connector, information about the user program stored
on the memory cartridge is stored to D8003.
0:
1:
2:
3:
255:

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 12-I/O type
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 24-I/O type
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 40-I/O type
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 48-I/O typeThe memory cartridge does not store any user program.

D8005 General Error CodeSmartAXIS general error information is stored to D8005. When a general error occurs, the bit corresponding to the error occurredturns on.
The general error and user program execution error can be cleared by writing “1” to the most significant bit of D8005.
For details on Touch general error codes, see "Troubleshooting" on page 14-1.
D8006 User Program Execution Error CodeSmartAXIS user program execution error information is stored to D8006. When a user program execution error occurs, the error
code corresponding to the error occurred is stored to D8006.
For details on Pro/Lite user program execution error codes, see "User Program Execution Error" on page 14-6.
D8008-D8021 Calendar/Clock Data
D8008 through D8021 are used for reading calendar/clock data from the internal clock and for writing calendar/clock data to theinternal clock.
D8022-D8025 Scan Time Data
D8022 through D8025 are special data registers for checking the scan time and configuring the constant scan time.
For details on the SmartAXIS Pro/Lite scan time, see "Constant Scan Time" on page 5-68.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7-11

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
D8026 Communication Mode Information (Port 2 and Port 3)
Communication mode information of port 2 and port 3 is stored in D8026.
Bit
15

Bit
8

D8026

Bit
7

0

0

0

0

Port 3

0:
1:
2:
3:

Bit
0

Bit
4

0

0

0

0

Port 2

Maintenance Communication
User Communication
Modbus RTU Master
Modbus RTU Slave

D8027-D8028 Slave Number
The slave number is stored in D8027 and D8028 when the communication mode of port 2 and 3 is maintenance communication or
Modbus RTU slave.
The slave number can be specified with either a constant or a data register in the function area settings. When data register is
specified, the slave number can be changed by storing the slave number in D8027 and D8028.
D8027: Port 2 Slave Number
D8028: Port 3 Slave Number
For SmartAXIS Pro/Lite maintenance communication, see "Maintenance Communication via Expansion Communication Port" onpage 9-3. For Modbus RTU slaves, see "Modbus Communication via RS-232C/RS-485" on page 11-1.
D8029 System Software Version
The PLC system software version number is stored to D8029. This value is indicated in the PLC status dialog box called from the
WindLDR menu bar. Select Online > Monitor > Monitor, then select Online > Status. See "Troubleshooting" on page 14-1.
D8030 Communication Adapter Information
Information about the communication adapters installed on the port 2 and port 3 connectors is stored to D8030.
Bit
15

Bit
8

Bit
7

D8030

1

Bit
0

0

0

Port 3 Port 2

0:
1:

RS232C communication adapter is installed
RS485 communication adapter is installed or no communication adapter is installed

D8031 Optional Cartridge Information
Information about the optional cartridge installed on the SmartAXIS is stored to D8031.
Bit
15

Bit
8

Bit
7

D8031

1

Bit
0

0

0

SD memory card

0:
1:
2:
3:

Memory cartridge

No optional cartridge is installed
Memory cartridge is installed
SD memory card is installed
Memory cartridge and SD memory card are installed

D8032-D8035, D8037, D8038 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. [Ladder program only]
Jump destination label numbers for interrupt inputs are stored in these special data registers. To use interrupt inputs, store thelabel number that corresponds to the special data register allocated to the interrupt input.
D8032=I0, D8033=I2, D8034=I3, D8035=I5, D8037=I6, D8038=I7
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
For details on SmartAXIS Pro/Lite interrupt inputs, see "Interrupt Input" on page 5-34.

7-12

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
D8036 Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No. [Ladder program only]
The jump destination label number when the timer interrupt occurs is stored in D8036. To use the timer interrupt, store thecorresponding label number.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
For details on the SmartAXIS Pro/Lite timer interrupt, see "Timer Interrupt" on page 5-41.
D8039 SD Memory Card Capacity
The capacity of the inserted SD or SDHC (maximum size 32GB) memory card in megabytes is stored in D8039.
D8040-D8047 Analog Input Value
The analog input values (0 to 10V DC) to the analog input terminals are converted to digital values (0 to 1000) and stored in thecorresponding special data registers.
When the programming language is FBD, the linear conversion can be configured for each analog input (AI). Even when the linear
conversion is configured for the analog inputs, the special data registers store the analog values (0 to 1000) before the linear
conversion is applied.
D8040=AI0, D8041=AI1, D8042=AI2, D8043=AI3, D8044=AI4, D8045=AI5, D8046=AI6, D8047=AI7
D8050-D8073, D8134-D8145 High-speed Counter
These special data registers are used with the high-speed counter function and the frequency measurement function.
For details on the SmartAXIS Pro/Lite high-speed counter, see "High-Speed Counter" on page 5-13.
D8074 Backlight ON TimeThe backlight ON time is stored. The backlight ON time can be configured by changing the value in D8074 between 1 to 65535
seconds. When D8074 is 0, the backlight is always ON. The backlight ON time can also be changed with the HMI function. For
details, see "Backlight ON Time" on page 5-57.
D8077 Analog Input Out of Range Status
When an analog input value is 11V or higher, the corresponding bit of D8077 turns on. When an analog input value is lower than
11V, the corresponding bit of D8077 turns off.
The assignment of each analog input is as follows.
Bit
15

Bit
8

D8077

Bit
7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Bit
0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0
Analog Input AI0
Analog Input AI1
Analog Input AI2
Analog Input AI3
Analog Input AI4
Analog Input AI5
Analog Input AI6
Analog Input AI7

D8078-D8083 MAC Address (Read only)
MAC address of the SmartAXIS is stored in the special data registers in hexadecimal as shown below.
Example) MAC address: AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF
D8078=AAh, D8079=BBh, D8080=CCh, D8081=DDh, D8082=EEh, D8083=FFh
D8084-D8087 IP Address (Current Data) Read only
IP address of the SmartAXIS is stored in the special data registers as shown below.
Example) IP address: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8084=aaa, D8085=bbb, D8086=ccc, D8087=ddd
D8088-D8091 Subnet Mask (Current Data) Read only
Subnet mask of the SmartAXIS is stored in the special data registers as shown below.
Example) Subnet mask: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8088=aaa, D8089=bbb, D8090=ccc, D8091=ddd

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7-13

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
D8092-D8095 Default Gateway (Current Data) Read only
Default gateway of the SmartAXIS is stored in the special data registers as shown below.
Example) Default gateway: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8092=aaa, D8093=bbb, D8094=ccc, D8095=ddd
D8104 RS232C Control Signal Status (Port 2 and Port 3) [Ladder program only]
RS232C control signal status of port 2 and port 3 is stored in D8104.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
Bit
15

Bit
8

Bit
7

D8104

3

Bit
2

1

Bit
0

0

0

0

0

Port 3

Port 2

00:
01:
10:
11:

Both DSR and DTR are off
DSR is off, DTR is on
DSR is on, DTR is off
Both DSR and DTR are on

D8105 RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 2 and Port 3) [Ladder program only]
Special data register D8105 is used to control data flow between the SmartAXIS RS232C port 2 and port 3 and the remote terminal
depending on the DSR (data set ready) signal sent from the remote terminal.
Bit
15

Bit
8

Bit
7

D8105

5

4

Bit
3

2

1

Bit
0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Port 3

Port 2

000:
001:
010:
011:
100:
Others:DSR is not used for data flow control
When DSR is on, SmartAXIS can transmit and receive data
When DSR is off, SmartAXIS can transmit and receive data
When DSR is on, SmartAXIS can transmit data (busy control)
When DSR is off, SmartAXIS can transmit data
Same as 000

This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
D8106 RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 2 and Port 3) [Ladder program only]
Special data register D8106 is used to control the DTR (data terminal ready) signal to indicate the SmartAXIS operating status ortransmitting/receiving status.
This function cannot be used when FBD program is selected as the programming language.
Bit
15

Bit
8

Bit
7

D8106

3

Bit
2

1

Bit
0

0

0

0

0

Port 3

00:
01:
10:
11:

Port 2DTR is on (off while SmartAXIS is stopped)
DTR is off
DTR is on while SmartAXIS can receive data (auto switching)Same as 00

D8110-D8121 Connection (1 through 3) Connected IP Address
The IP address of the remote host accessing connection 1 through 3 is stored in special data registers.
Example) Connection 1 Connected IP Address: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8110=aaa, D8111=bbb, D8112=ccc, D8113=ddd
D8130-D8132 Connection Connected Port Number
When connections are established with other network devices, the port numbers of the connected network devices are stored inthese special data registers.
For FBD, a linear transformation can be configured for the analog input (AI). Even when a linear transformation is configured for
AI, the special data registers store the analog values (0 to 1000) before the linear transformation.
D8130 : Connection 1 Connected Port Number
D8131 : Connection 2 Connected Port Number
D8132 : Connection 3 Connected Port Number
7-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES
D8133 Data Register ROM Backup Execution Status
This special data register is used for the data register ROM backup. Stores the execution status for writing and reading.
1: Processing
2: Normal termination
3: Cannot access ROM
4: Invalid values are stored in D8184 (starting address to read) and D8185 (number of registers to read)
5: Valid data could not be read from ROM
For details, see Chapter 5 "Special Functions" – “Data Register ROM Backup” on page 5-9.
D8148, D8157, D8166 Remote I/O Communication Error Status
When a communication error occurs between the remote I/O communication slave and master, the details of the communication
error are stored in these special data registers.
D8148 : Remote I/O Slave 1 Communication Error Status
D8157 : Remote I/O Slave 2 Communication Error Status
D8166 : Remote I/O Slave 3 Communication Error Status
D8149-D8156, D8158-D8165, D8167-D8174 Remote I/O Analog Input Values
The analog input values (0 to 10 VDC) to the remote I/O analog inputs are converted to digital values (0 to 1000) and stored in thespecial data registers allocated to each remote I/O slave.
When the programming language is FBD, the linear conversion can be configured for each analog input (AI). Even when the linear
conversion is configured for the analog inputs, the special data registers store the analog values (0 to 1000) before the linear
conversion is applied.
 D8149=AI10, D8150=AI11, D8151=AI12, D8152=AI13, D8153=AI14, D8154=AI15, D8155=AI16, D8156=AI17
 D8158=AI20, D8159=AI21, D8160=AI22, D8161=AI23, D8162=AI24, D8163=AI25, D8164=AI26, D8165=AI27
 D8167=AI30, D8168=AI31, D8169=AI32, D8170=AI33, D8171=AI34, D8172=AI35, D8173=AI36, D8174=AI37

D8184 Data Register ROM Backup Start Address to Read
This special data register is used for the data register ROM backup and stores the start address of the data registers to read.
For details, see Chapter 5 "Special Functions" – “Data Register ROM Backup” on page 5-9.
D8185 Data Register ROM Backup Number of Registers to Read
This special data register is used for the data register ROM backup and stores the number of data registers to read.
For details, see Chapter 5 "Special Functions" – “Data Register ROM Backup” on page 5-9.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

7-15

7: D EVI CE A DDR ESSES

7-16

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
I ntroduction
The SmartAXIS provides dedicated instruction set for each programming language.
The instructions for ladder programs are divided into basic instructions, which perform sequencing, and advanced instructions,which perform moves, comparisons, Boolean computations, binary arithmetic operations, bit shifts, and other operations. For
details, see the SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual.
A series of function blocks are provided for FBD programming such as logical operation function blocks that perform logicaloperations, timer/counter function blocks to perform processing using timers and counter devices, and pulse output function
blocks that perform pulse output.

Ladder Program Instructions List
This section lists the ladder program instructions and describes their functions divided into basic instructions and advanced
instructions.

Basic Instruction List
SymbolName

Function

AND

And

Series connection of NO contact

AND LOD

And Load

Series connection of circuit blocks

ANDN

And Not

Series connection of NC contact

BPP

Bit PopRestores the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily

BPS

Bit Push

Saves the result of bit logical operation temporarily

BRD

Bit ReadReads the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily

CC=Counter Comparison (=)

Equal to comparison of counter current value

CC>=

Counter Comparison (>=)

Greater than or equal to comparison of counter current value

CDP

Dual Pulse Reversible Counter

Dual pulse reversible counter (0 to 65,535)

CDPD

Double-word Dual Pulse
Reversible Counter

Double-word dual pulse reversible counter (0 to 4,294,967,295)

CNT

Adding Counter

Adding counter (0 to 65,535)

CNTD

Double-word Adding Counter

Double-word adding counter (0 to 4,294,967,295)

CUD

Up/Down Selection
Reversible Counter

Up/down selection reversible counter (0 to 65,535)

CUDD

Double-word Up/Down
Selection Reversible Counter

Double-word up/down selection reversible counter(0 to 4,294,967,295)

DC=

Data Register Comparison (=)

Equal to comparison of data register value

DC>=

Data Register Comparison (>=)

Greater than or equal to comparison of data register value

END

End

Ends a program

JEND

Jump End

Ends a jump instruction

JMP

Jump

Jumps a designated program area

LOD

Load

Stores intermediate results and reads contact status

LODN

Load Not

Stores intermediate results and reads inverted contact status

MCR

Master Control ResetEnds a master control

MCS

Master Control Set

Starts a master control

OR

Or

Parallel connection of NO contact

OR LOD

Or LoadParallel connection of circuit blocks

ORN

Or NotParallel connection of NC contact

OUT

OutputOutputs the result of bit logical operation

OUTN

Output Not

Outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation

RST

Reset

Resets output, internal relay, or shift register bit

SET

Set

Sets output, internal relay, or shift register bit

SFR

Shift Register

Forward shift register

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-1

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Symbol8-2

Name

Function

SFRN

Shift Register Not

Reverse shift register

SOTD

Single Output Down

Falling-edge differentiation output

SOTU

Single Output Up

Rising-edge differentiation output

TIM

100-ms Timer

Subtracting 100-ms timer (0 to 6553.5 sec)

TIMO

100-ms Off-delay Timer

Subtracting 100-ms off-delay timer (0 to 6553.5 sec)

TMH

10-ms Timer

Subtracting 10-ms timer (0 to 655.35 sec)

TMHO

10-ms Off-delay Timer

Subtracting 10-ms off-delay timer (0 to 655.35 sec)

TML

1-sec Timer

Subtracting 1-sec timer (0 to 65535 sec)

TMLO

1-sec Off-delay Timer

Subtracting 1-sec off-delay timer (0 to 65535 sec)

TMS

1-ms Timer

Subtracting 1-ms timer (0 to 65.535 sec)

TMSO

1-ms Off-delay Timer

Subtracting 1-ms off-delay timer (0 to 65.535 sec)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Advanced Instruction List
Group
NOP

Move

Data Comparison

Binary Arithmetic

SymbolShift and Rotate

Valid Data Type
W

I

D

L

F
X

NOP

No Operation

MOV

Move

X

X

X

X

MOVN

Move Not

X

X

X

X

IMOV

Indirect Move

X

X

IMOVN

Indirect Move Not

X

X

BMOV

Block Move

X

IBMV

Indirect Bit Move

X

IBMVN

Indirect Bit Move Not

X

NSET

N Data Set

X

X

X

X

X

NRS

N Data Repeat Set

X

X

X

X

X

XCHG

ExchangeX

TCCST

Timer/Counter Current Value Store

X

CMP=

Compare Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<>

Compare Unequal To

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<

Compare Less Than

X

X

X

X

X

CMP>

Compare Greater Than

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<=

Compare Less Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

CMP>=

Compare Greater Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

ICMP>=

Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

LC=

Load Compare Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

LC<>

Load Compare Unequal To

X

X

X

X

X

LC<

Load Compare Less Than

X

X

X

X

X

LC>

Load Compare Greater Than

X

X

X

X

X

LC<=

Load Compare Less Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

LC>=

Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

ADD

Addition

X

X

X

X

X

SUB

Subtraction

X

X

X

X

X

MUL

Multiplication

X

X

X

X

X

DIV

Division

X

X

X

X

X

INC

Increment

X

X

X

X

DEC

Decrement

X

X

X

X

ROOT

Root

X

Sum (ADD)X

Sum (XOR)X

ANDWAND Word

X

X

ORW

OR Word

X

X

XORW

Exclusive OR Word

X

X

SFTL

Shift Left

SFTR

Shift Right

BCDLS

BCD Left Shift

WSFT

Word Shift

X

ROTL

Rotate Left

X

X

ROTR

Rotate Right

X

X

SUM

Boolean Computation

Name

X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X

X

X

“X” indicates that the instruction is supported.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-3

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Group

Data Conversion

Week Programmer
Interface

User Communication

Program Branching

Coordinate Conversion

Pulse

Dual / Teaching Timer

Symbol

Name

I

D

HTOB

Hex to BCD

X

X

BTOH

BCD to Hex

X

X

HTOA

Hex to ASCII

X

ATOH

ASCII to Hex

X

BTOA

BCD to ASCII

X

X

ATOB

ASCII to BCD

X

X

ENCO

EncodeDECO

DecodeBCNT

Bit Count

ALT

Alternate Output

CVDT

Convert Data Type

X

DTDV

Data Divide

X

DTCB

Data Combine

X

SWAP

Data SwapX

WEEK

Weekly Timer

YEAR

Yearly Timer

MSG

Message

TXD2Transmit 2

TXD3

Transmit 3

RXD2

Receive 2

RXD3

Receive 3

LABEL

Label

LJMP

Label Jump

LCAL

Label CallLRETLabel Return

DJNZ

Decrement Jump Non-zeroDI

Disable Interrupt

EI

Enable Interrupt

IOREF

I/O Refresh

HSCRF

High-speed Counter Refresh

XYFS

XY Format Set

X

X

CVXTY

Convert X to Y

X

X

CVYTX

Convert Y to X

X

X

AVRG

Average

X

X

PULS1

Pulse Output 1

PULS2

Pulse Output 2

PULS3

Pulse Output 3

PULS4

Pulse Output 4

PWM1

Pulse Width Modulation 1

PWM2

Pulse Width Modulation 2

PWM3

Pulse Width Modulation 3

PWM4

Pulse Width Modulation 4

RAMP1

Ramp Pulse Output 1

RAMP2

Ramp Pulse Output 2

ZRN1

Zero Return 1

ZRN2

Zero Return 2

ARAMP1

Advanced Ramp 1

ARAMP2

Advanced Ramp 2DTML

1-sec Dual Timer

DTIM

100-ms Dual Timer

DTMH

10-ms Dual Timer

DTMS

1-ms Dual Timer

TTIM

Teaching Timer“X” indicates that the instruction is supported.

8-4

Valid Data TypeW

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

X

X

L

F

X

X

X

X

X

X

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Group

Trigonometric Function

Logarithm / Power

File Data Processing

Clock

Ethernet Instructions
Data Logging
Script Instructions

SymbolName

Valid Data Type
W

I

D

L

F

RAD

Degree to RadianX

DEG

Radian to Degree

X

SIN

Sine

X

COS

CosineX

TAN

Tangent

X

ASIN

Arc SineX

ACOS

Arc Cosine

X

ATAN

Arc Tangent

X

LOGE

Natural Logarithm

X

LOG10

Common Logarithm

X

EXP

Exponent

X

POW

Power

FIFOF

FIFO Format

X

FIEX

First-In Execute

X

FOEX

First-Out Execute

X

NDSRC

N Data Search

X

TADD

Time Addition

TSUB

Time Subtraction

HTOS

HMS to Sec

STOH

Sec to HMS

HOUR

Hour Meter

ETXD

Transmit over Ethernet

ERXD

Receive over Ethernet

DLOG

Data Log

TRACE

Data Trace

SCRPT

Script

X

X

X

X

X

“X” indicates that the instruction is supported.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-5

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Advanced Instruction Applicable SmartAXIS
Applicable advanced instructions depend on the type of SmartAXIS as listed in the table below.
Group
NOP

Move

Data Comparison

Binary Arithmetic

Boolean Computation

Shift and Rotate

SymbolFT1A-12FT1A-24

FT1A-40

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

NOP

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

MOV

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DC

MOVN

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

IMOV

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

IMOVN

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

BMOV

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

IBMV

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

IBMVN

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

NSET

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

NRS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XCHG

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

TCCST

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CMP=

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<>

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CMP>

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<=

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CMP>=

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ICMP>=

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LC=

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LC<>

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LC<

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LC>

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LC<=

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LC>=

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ADD

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SUB

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

MUL

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DIV

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

INC

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DEC

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ROOT

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SUM

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ANDW

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ORW

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XORW

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SFTL

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SFTR

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

BCDLS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

WSFT

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ROTL

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ROTR

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

“X” indicates that the instruction is supported.

8-6

FT1A-48

ACS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE

Group

Data Conversion

Week Programmer
Interface

SymbolFT1A-12ACDCDC

FT1A-48AC

DC

FT1ATouch

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

HTOA

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ATOH

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

BTOA

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ATOB

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ENCO

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DECO

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

BCNT

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ALT

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CVDT

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DTDV

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DTCB

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SWAP

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

WEEK

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

YEAR

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

MSG

X (Note)X (Note)X (Note)X (Note)X (Note)X (Note)X (Note)X (Note)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

TXD3
RXD2

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LABEL

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LJMP

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LCAL

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LRET

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DJNZ

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DI

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

EI

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

IOREF

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

HSCRF
XYFS
Coordinate
Conversion

DC

HTOB

RXD3

Program Branching

FT1A-40
AC

BTOH

TXD2
User Communication

FT1A-24
AC

X

X

X

CVXTY

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CVYTX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

AVRG

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Note: MSG instructions can be used with Pro series only.
“X” indicates that the instruction is supported.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-7

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE

Group

SymbolFT1A-12ACDC

FT1A-24AC

DC

FT1A-40
AC

Trigonometric
Function

Logarithm / Power

File Data
Processing

Clock

Ethernet
Instructions
Data Logging
Script Instructions

AC

DC

PULS1

X

X

X

PULS2

X

X

X

PULS3

X
(Note1)

X

X

PULS4

X
(Note1)

X

X

PWM1

X

X

X

PWM2

X

X

X

PWM3

X
(Note1)

X

X

PWM4

X
(Note1)

X

X

RAMP1

X

X

X

RAMP2

X
(Note2)

X(Note2)

X(Note2)

ZRN1

X

X

X

ZRN2

X

X

X

ARAMP1

X

X

X

ARAMP2

X(Note2)

X(Note2)

X(Note2)

Pulse

Dual / Teaching
Timer

FT1A-48DC

FT1ATouch

DTML

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DTIM

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DTMH

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DTMS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

TTIM

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

RAD

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

DEG

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SIN

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

COS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

TAN

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ASIN

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ACOS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ATAN

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LOGE

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

LOG10

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

EXP

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

POW

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

FIFOF

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

FIEX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

FOEX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

NDSRC

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

TADD

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

TSUB

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

HTOS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

STOH

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

HOUR

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

ETXD

X

X

X

X

X

X

ERXD

X

X

X

X

X

X

DLOG

X

X

X

X

TRACE

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SCRPT

X

X

X

X

X

Note 1: When using RAMP1 in single-pulse output mode, PULS3 and PWM3 cannot be used. When using RAMP2 in single-pulse output mode,
PULS4 and PWM4 cannot be used.
Note 2: When using RAMP1 or ARAMP1 in dual-pulse output mode, RAMP2 or ARAMP2 cannot be used.
“X” indicates that the instruction is supported.

8-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
FB ListThis section lists the SmartAXIS FBs and describes their functions. For details, see the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

Input FBThis section describes the input FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions.
SymbolName and Diagram

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

Inputs ON/OFF information from an external device
to the SmartAXIS.

–

5-1

Special internal relays can be used as bit inputs forfunction blocks. Special function is allocated to eachspecial internal relay.
For details on the individual special internal relays,
see Chapter 7 "Device Addresses" - "Special Internal
Relays" on page 7-2.

–

5-2

Outputs ON/OFF state of a shift register device.

–

5-3

The analog input values (0 to 10V DC) for the analog
input terminals are converted to digital values (0 to1,000) and output. With the analog input linear
transformation function, the analog input value canbe linearly transformed within a range of -32,768 to
32,767.

–5-4Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

Outputs ON/OFF information from the SmartAXIS toan external device.

–

6-1

A bit unit function block used internally by the
SmartAXIS.

–

6-2

Digital Input
I

I

OUT

Special Internal Relay

SM

M

OUT

Shift Register
R

R

OUT

Analog Input

AI

AI

AOUT

Output FBThis section describes the output FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions.
SymbolName and Diagram
Digital Output

Q

IN

Q

OUT

Internal Relay
M

IN

M

OUT

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-9

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Logical Operation FBThis section describes the logical operation FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions. The logical operation FB performs logicaloperations on input signals and output the result.
SymbolName and Diagram

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

Logical AND
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

AND

OUT

Finds logical AND for a maximum of four input
signals (ON/OFF) and outputs the result.

–

7-1

&

OUT

Finds negative logical AND for a maximum of four
input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs the result.

–

7-2

≥1

OUT

Finds logical OR for a maximum of four input signals(ON/OFF) and outputs the result.

–

7-3

OUT

Finds negative logical OR for a maximum of four
input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs the result.

–

7-4

OUT

Finds negative logical OR for a maximum of four
input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs the result.

–

7-5

&

Negative Logical AND
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

NAND

Logical OR
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

OR

Negative Logical OR
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

NOR

≥1

Exclusive Logical OR
IN1
IN2

XOR

=1

Negative Exclusive Logical OR

=1

OUT

Finds negative exclusive logical OR for a maximum of
two input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs the result.

–

7-6

IN

1

OUT

Outputs the result of negating the input signal (ON/
OFF).

–

7-7

IN

SOTU

OUT

Turns on the output for one scan when the input
signal changes from off to on.

–

7-8

SOTD

OUT

Turns on the output for one scan when the input
signal changes from on to off.

–

7-9

TRUTH

OUT

The output against 16 bit patterns of the four input
signals can be configured as a truth table, and theoutput turns on or off according to those settings.

X

7-10

IN1
IN2

XNOR

Negation
NOT

Shot upSOTU

Shot down
SOTD

IN

Truth Table
TRUTH

8-10

IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Timer FBThis section describes the timer FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions. The timer FB uses the timer to compare the current value
and the preset value and output the result.
SymbolName and Diagram
On-delay Count Up Timer

TIMU

TRG

TIMU
100 ｍsOUT

On-delay Count Down Timer
TIMD

TRG

TIMD
100 msOUT

Off-delay Count Up Timer
TIMOU

TRG
RST

TIMOU
100 msOUT

Off-delay Count Down Timer
TIMOD

TRG
RST

TIMOD
100 msOUT

On/off-delay Timer
TIMCU

TRG
RST

TIMCU
100 msOUT

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

After the execution input turns on, the output turns
on when the on-delay time elapses. The current
value is incremented from zero to the preset value.

–

8-1

After the execution input turns on, the output turns
on when the on-delay time elapses. The current
value is decremented from the preset value to zero.

–

8-5

When the execution input is on, the output turns on.
After the execution input turns off, the output turns
off when the off-delay time elapses. The current
value is incremented from zero to the preset value.

–

8-7

When the execution input is on, the output turns on.
After the execution input turns off, the output turns
off when the off-delay time elapses. The current
value is decremented from the preset values to zero.

–

8-9

After the execution input turns on, the output turns
on when the on-delay time elapses. When theexecution input turns on, the output turns off when
the off-delay time elapses.

–

8-11

Single Shot Pulse
SPULS

TRG
RST

SPULS
100 msOUT

After the execution input turns on, the output turns
on for the configured time.

–

8-14

DTIM
100 msOUT

The output is turned on and off according to theconfigured ON and OFF time.

–

8-16

OUT

The output is randomly turned on for the configured
range of time.

–

8-19

Dual Timer
DTIM

EN

Random Pulse Output
RPULS

EN

RPULS
100 msS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-11

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CECounter FBThis section describes the counter FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions. The counter FB uses the counter to compare the countvalue and the preset value and output the result.
SymbolName and Diagram
Adding Counter

CNT

RST
UP

CNT

OUT

Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter
CUD

CUD

OUT

HOUR

OUT

PRST
CLK
U/D

Hour Meter
EN
RST

HOUR

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

When the clock input is turned on, the current value
is incremented by one. The output turns on when thecurrent value reaches the preset value.

–

9-1

When the clock input is turned on, the current value
is incremented or decremented by one according to
the up/down selection input. The current value iscompared with ON/OFF thresholds. The output turns
on or off according to the comparison result.

–9-3

Accumulates the ON duration of the input in hours,
minutes, and seconds.
The output turns on when the accumulated timereaches the configured time.

–

9-7

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
pageWith the rise of the execution input, the shift
registers are shifted to the specified shift direction.

X

10-1

Shift Register FBThis section describes the shift register FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions.
SymbolName and Diagram
Shift Register

SFR

SFR

TRG
RST
DI
DIR

OUT

Data Comparison FBThis section describes the data comparison FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions. The data comparison FB compares device
values, analog values, or constants and output the result.
SymbolName and Diagram

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manualpage

Two values are compared and the output turns on or
off according to the comparison result.

X

11-1

The comparison value and the ON/OFF thresholds
are compared and the output turns on or off
according to the comparison result.

X

11-3

The comparison value and the upper/lower limits arecompared and the output turns on or off according to
the comparison result.

X

11-5

Data Comparison
CMP

EN
DAT1
DAT2

CMP

OUT

STTG

OUT

Schmitt Trigger
STTG

EN
DATA
ON
OFF

Range Comparison
RCMP

8-12

EN
DATA
UL
LL

RCMP

OUT

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Data Conversion FBThis section describes the data conversion FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions.
SymbolName and Diagram

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

X

12-1

Alternate Output
TRG
SET
RST

ALT

ALT

OUT

Sets/resets the output.

Week Programmer FBThis section describes the week programmer FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions. The week programmer FB uses the internal
clock of the SmartAXIS to control the output according to the specified date and time.
SymbolName and Diagram
Weekly Timer
EN
INI

WEEK

WEEK

OUT

YEAR

OUT

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

Compares the specified day of the week, ON time,and OFF time with the current time and outputs theresult.

–13-1Compares the specified date and the current dateand outputs the result.

–

13-13

Yearly Timer
EN
INI

YEAR

Interface FBThis section describes the interface FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions.
SymbolName and Diagram

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

MSG

Displays data such as text and device values on the
LCD on the SmartAXIS Pro.

X

14-1

Message
MSG

EN

OUT

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-13

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Pulse Output FB
This section describes the pulse output FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions. The pulse output FB outputs pulses from the pulse
output port according to the specified settings.
SymbolName and Diagram

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

Outputs pulses at the specified frequency.

X

15-1

Outputs pulses at the specified frequency and duty
cycle.

X

15-6

Outputs pulses with the frequency change function.

X

15-11

Outputs pulses while the proximity signal is off.

X

15-21

Output pulses with the frequency change function
according to the settings configured in the frequency
table.

X

15-26

Function

Pulse Output

PULS

EN
INI

PULS

OUT

Pulse Width Modulation

PWM

EN
INI

PWM

OUT

Ramp Pulse Output

RAMP

OUT

ZRN

OUT

ARAMP

OUT

EN
INI
DIR

RAMP

Zero Return
EN
INI
DE

ZRN

Advanced Ramp
EN
INI
INT

ARMP

Data Logging FBThis section describes the data Logging FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions. The data Logging FB saves log data for devices to
the SD memory card.
SymbolName and Diagram
Data Log

DLOG

EN

DLOG

OUT

TRACE

OUT

Data Trace
TRACE

8-14

EN

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

Saves the values of the specified devices in thespecified data format as a CSV file on the SD
memory card.

–

16-1

Saves the values of the previous number of scans forthe specified device in the specified data format as a
CSV file on the SD memory card.

–

16-8

Function

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Script FBThis section describes the script FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions.
SymbolName and Diagram
Script

SCRPT

EN

SCRPT

OUT

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

Enables you to program complicated processing withthe script language that supports conditional
branching, logical operations, arithmetic operations,and functions.

–

17-1

Function

Outputinversion

FBD manual
page

Operates the high-speed counter configured in thefunction area settings. Turns on/off the high-speed
counter gate input/reset input.

X

18-1

With the rise of the set input, the output turns on
and is maintained. When the reset input turns on,
the output is reset.

X

18-3

Special FBThis section describes the special FB of the SmartAXIS and its functions.
SymbolName and Diagram
High-speed Counter

HSC

GT
RST
CLR

HSC

OUT

RSFF

OUT

RS Flip-flop
RSFF

SET
RST

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-15

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Advanced Instruction Applicable SmartAXIS
Function blocks
Group
Input

OutputLogicalOperation

Timer

Counter
Shift Register
Data
Comparison

Name
Digital Input
Special Internal Relay
Shift Register
Analog Input
Digital Output
Internal Relay

SymbolI
M
R
AI
Q

FT1A-12
AC
DC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Applicable SmartAXIS
FT1A-24
FT1A-40
AC
DC
AC
DC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

FT1A-48
AC
DC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

M

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Logical AND
Negative Logical AND
Logical OR
Negative Logical OR
Exclusive Logical OR
Negative Exclusive Logical OR
Negation
Shot up
Shot down
Truth Table
On-delay Count Up Timer
On-delay Count Down Timer
Off-delay Count Up Timer
Off-delay Count Down Timer
On/off-delay Timer
Single Shot Pulse
Dual Timer
Random Pulse Output
Adding Counter
Up/Down Selection Reversible
CounterHour Meter
Shift Register
Data Comparison
Schmitt Trigger
Range Comparison

AND
NAND
OR
NOR
XOR
XNOR
NOT
SOTU
SOTD
TRUTH
TIMU
TIMD
TIMOU
TIMOD
TIMCU
SPULS
DTIM
RPULS
CNT

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

CUD

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

HOUR
SFR
CMP
STTG
RCMP

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

Data
Conversion
Week
Programmer

Alternate Output

ALT

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Weekly Timer
Yearly Timer

WEEK
YEAR

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

Interface

Message

MSG

Pulse Output

PULS

Pulse Width Modulation

PWM

Ramp Pulse Output

RAMP

Zero Return

ZRN

Advanced Ramp

ARMP

Data Log
Data Trace
ScriptHigh-speed Counter
RS Flip-flop

DLOG
TRACE
SCRPT
HSC
RSFF

Pulse

Data Logging
ScriptSpecial

X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
X
―
―
―
―
―
X
X
(Note 2)
X
―
―
―
―
―
X
X
(Note 2)
X
X
X
―
―
―
―
―
(Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3)
―
―
―
―
―
X
X
X
X
X
X
―
―
―
―
―
(Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3)
―
―
―
―
X
X
X
X
―
―
―
―
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
―
X
―
X
―
X
―
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Note 1: The MSG FB can be used only with SmartAXIS Pro.
Note 2: When using RAMP1 in single-pulse output mode, PULS3 and PWM3 cannot be used. When using RAMP2 in single-pulse output mode,
PULS4 and PWM4 cannot be used.
Note 3: When using RAMP1 or ARAMP1 in dual-pulse output mode, RAMP2 or ARAMP2 cannot be used.

8-16

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE
Applicable Data Types
Data type

Function blocks

W

I

D

L

F

SymbolWord

Integer

Double word

Long

Float

Digital Input

I

―

―

―

―

―

Special Internal Relay

M

―

―

―

―

―

Shift Register

R

―

―

―

―

―

Analog Input

AI

―

X

―

―

―

Digital Output

Q

―

―

―

―

―

Internal Relay

M

―

―

―

―

―

Logical AND

AND

―

―

―

―

―

Negative Logical AND

NAND

―

―

―

―

―

Logical OR

OR

―

―

―

―

―

Negative Logical OR

NOR

―

―

―

―

―

Exclusive Logical OR

XOR

―

―

―

―

―

Negative Exclusive Logical OR

XNOR

―

―

―

―

―

Negation

NOT

―

―

―

―

―

Shot up

SOTU

―

―

―

―

―

Shot down

SOTD

―

―

―

―

―

Truth Table

TRUTH

―

―

―

―

―

On-delay Count Up Timer

TIMU

X

―

―

―

―

On-delay Count Down Timer

TIMD

X

―

―

―

―

Off-delay Count Up Timer

TIMOU

X

―

―

―

―

Off-delay Count Down Timer

TIMOD

X

―

―

―

―

On/off-delay Timer

TIMCU

X

―

―

―

―

Single Shot Pulse

SPULS

X

―

―

―

―

Dual Timer

DTIM

X

―

―

―

―

Random Pulse Output

RPULS

X

―

―

―

―

Adding Counter

CNT

X

―

X

―

―

Up/Down Selection Reversible
Counter

CUD

X

―

X

―

―

Hour Meter

HOUR

X

―

―

―

―

Shift Register

SFR

―

―

―

―

―

Data Comparison

CMP

X

X

X

X

―

Schmitt Trigger

STTG

X

X

X

X

―

Range Comparison

RCMP

X

X

X

X

―

Alternate Output

ALT

―

―

―

―

―

Week
Programmer

Weekly Timer

WEEK

―

―

―

―

―

Yearly Timer

YEAR

―

―

―

―

―

Interface

Message

MSG

X

X

X

X

X

Pulse Output

PULS

―

―

―

―

―

Pulse Width Modulation

PWM

―

―

―

―

―

Ramp Pulse Output

RAMP

―

―

―

―

―

Zero Return

ZRN

―

―

―

―

―

Advanced Ramp

ARMP

―

―

―

―

―

Data Log

DLOG

X

X

X

X

X

Data Trace

TRACE

X

X

X

X

X

Script

SCRPT

X

X

X

X

X

High-speed Counter

HSC

X

―

X

―

―

RS Flip-flop

RSFF

―

―

―

―

―

Group

Input

OutputLogicalOperation

Timer

Counter
Shift Register
Data
Comparison
Data
Conversion

Pulse

Data Logging
ScriptSpecialName

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

8-17

8: I N STR UCTI ON S / F UN CTI ON B LOCK S R EFER EN CE

8-18

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
I ntroduction
This chapter describes the SmartAXIS maintenance communication function.
Maintenance communication is a communication protocol dedicated for IDEC programmable controllers. It is used when WindLDR
or an IDEC operator interface communicates with the SmartAXIS.
Maintenance communication of SmartAXIS is available on USB port (WindLDR only), expansion communication ports, and Ethernet
port, allowing the optimum communication method to be selected for a variety of system configurations.

Maintenance Communication Functions
When performing maintenance communication with the SmartAXIS, the following functions can be used:
Function

Description

Download user programs

User programs created in WindLDR can be downloaded to the SmartAXIS.
See "Download Program" on page 4-16.

Upload user programs

User programs stored in the SmartAXIS can be uploaded to WindLDR.

Monitor/change device values

The user program and the device values of the SmartAXIS can be monitored and the device values can bechanged using WindLDR.
See "Monitor Operation" on page 4-17.

Download system software

System software can be downloaded to the SmartAXIS.
See "Upgrade SmartAXIS System Software" on page A-2.

Note: To use maintenance communication, see "Start WindLDR" on page 4-1 and perform setup.

Communication Ports Used For Maintenance Communication
SmartAXIS supports the following communication ports:
Type

USB Port(Port 1)

12-I/O type24-I/O type

Expansion Communication Ports (Note)

Ethernet Port

Port 2

Port 3

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

40-I/O type

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

48-I/O type

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Note: Communication cartridges are required in order to use expansion communication ports.

Maintenance communication supports the following functions on each communication port:
Communication
PortStandard/Option

No. of Ports

Communication Settings

USB port

Standard

1

None

Expansioncommunication
ports

Options
FT1A-PC1: EIA RS232C (Mini DIN)
FT1A-PC2: EIA RS485 (Mini DIN)
FT1A-PC3: EIA RS485(Terminal block)12-I/O type: 024-I/O type: 1
40-I/O type: 2
48-I/O type: 2

Function area settings
See "Maintenance Communication via
Expansion Communication Port" onpage 9-3.

Ethernet Port

12-I/O type: 24-I/O type: Standard
40-I/O type: Standard
48-I/O type: Standard

1

Function area settings
See "Maintenance Communication via
Ethernet Port" on page 9-5.

Communication
Port

Maintenance Communication Functions
Monitor/Change Device Values

Download/Upload
User Programs

Download System Software

USB port

Yes

Yes

Yes

Expansioncommunication
ports

Yes

No

No

Ethernet port

Yes

Yes

No

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9-1

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
Maintenance Communication via USB Port
Applicable SmartAXIS
FT1A-12FT1A-24

FT1A-40

FT1A-48

X

X

X

X

Using the USB port, it is possible to connect SmartAXIS to a computer on which WindLDR is installed, and monitor and change
device values, download and upload user programs, and download system software. Connect the computer and the SmartAXIS
using a USB cable (recommended cable: HG9Z-XCM42).

ComputerSmartAXIS
USB cable
HG9Z-XCM42 USB maintenance cable

USB port

Type A plug

Mini-B plug
USB port(USB 2.0 Mini-B connector)

Maintenance Communication Specifications for the USB Port
Item

Specifications/Functions

Cable

Recommended cable: HG9Z-XCM42

Maintenance communication
functionsMonitor/change device values
Download/upload user programs
Download system software

See the following pages for details on each maintenance communication function:
 Monitor/change device values: "Monitor Operation" on page 4-17
 Download/upload user programs: "Download Program" on page 4-16
 Download system software: "Upgrade SmartAXIS System Software" on page A-2

9-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
Maintenance Communication via Expansion Communication Port
Applicable SmartAXIS
FT1A-12FT1A-24

FT1A-40

FT1A-48—

X (Port 2)

X (Port 2 and 3)

X (Port 2 and 3)

By installing an RS232C or RS485 communication cartridge to a expansion communication port on the SmartAXIS, it is possible toconnect SmartAXIS to a computer or an operator interface with an RS232C or RS485 port, and monitor and change device valuesof SmartAXIS.
For details on communication cables, see "Cables" on page A-5.
SmartAXIS
Computer
ExpansionCommunication Port
Serial Communication Port
(RS232C/RS485)
Connection Cable

Maintenance Communication Specifications for Expansion Communication Ports
Item

Specifications/Functions

Communication cartridge

FT1A-PC1: RS232C communication cartridge (Mini DIN type)
FT1A-PC2: RS485 communication cartridge (Mini DIN type)
FT1A-PC3: RS485 communication cartridge (Terminal block type) (Note)

Cable

FC2A-KC4C: RS232C communication cable (Mini DIN type)
FC2A-KP1C: RS485 communication cable (Mini DIN type)

Maintenance communication
functionsMonitoring/changing device values

Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables.

See the following pages for details on the maintenance communication function:
 Monitor/change device values: "Monitor Operation" on page 4-17

Programming WindLDR
Configure the settings for maintenance communication.
Setting Procedure
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Comm. Ports.

The Function Area Settings dialog box appears.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9-3

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
2. In the Communication Mode pull-down list for Port 2, select Maintenance Protocol.

The Maintenance Communication (Port 2) dialog box appears.

3. Configure the parameters to match the communication settings of the computer or operator interface.

Baud Rate (bps):

115200bps (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200)

Data Bits:

7 (7 or 8)

Parity:Even (None, Even, Odd)

Stop Bits:

1 (1 or 2)

Receive Timeout (ms):500 (10 to 2550)

Slave Number

0 (0 to 31)
Slave number can be specified by either a constant or a data register.
Type

Details

Constant

Set within the range of 0 to 31

Data register

Store the slave numbers 0 to 31 in the following special data registers
Port 2: D8027
Port 3: D8028

Notes:
 Values not in parentheses are the default settings.
 The following configuration cannot be selected: Data Bits: 7, Parity: None

4. Click OK.

Configuring the maintenance communication for the expansion communication port is now complete.

9-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
Maintenance Communication via Ethernet Port
Applicable SmartAXIS
FT1A-12FT1A-24

FT1A-40

FT1A-48

—

X

X

X

Network devices such as computers or IDEC operator interfaces can communicate with SmartAXIS via Ethernet. External deviceson the network can monitor or change the device values and download or upload user programs.
It is possible to use the maintenance communication server and other communications simultaneously by assigning a separate
communication function such as a maintenance communication server or Modbus TCP communication to each of the threeconnections on the SmartAXIS.
ComputerComputer

WindLDRWindLDR

Operator interface

Connection 2
Ethernet

Connection 1

Connection 3

Maintenance Communication Server

SmartAXIS

Maintenance Communication Specifications for the Ethernet Port
Item

Specifications/Functions

Cable

LAN cable

Maintenance communication
functionsMonitor/change device values
Download/upload user programs

See the following pages for details on each maintenance communication function:
 Monitor/change device values: "Monitor Operation" on page 4-17
 Download/upload user programs: "Download Program" on page 4-16

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9-5

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
Programming WindLDRThis section describes the procedures to configure the maintenance communication server for the Ethernet port and communicate
with the SmartAXIS via Ethernet.
Configure Maintenance Communication Server
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Network Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box appears.

2. Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

3. Click Connection Settings.
4. In the Communication Mode pull-down list for the connection to configure, select Maintenance Communication Server.

The Maintenance Communication Server dialog box appears.

9-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
5. Set the parameters to match the communication settings of the PC or operator interface.

Local Host Port No.:

2101 (The port number that the SmartAXIS uses for the maintenance communication server)

Receive Timeout (ms):2000 (100 to 25500ms)

Allow Access by IP Address:

Disabled (Enabling this option makes it possible to prevent access from devices having any IP addresses
other than the one entered.)

Notes:
 Settings not in parentheses are the default values.
 The number of clients that can be connected to the SmartAXIS simultaneously is one client per connection. If connections 1 to 3 are all set tothe maintenance communication server, three clients can connect to the SmartAXIS at the same time.

6. Click OK.

This completes maintenance communications settings.

Download User Program and Confirm IP Addresses via USB Port
Before starting Ethernet communication, configure the function area settings and download the user program to the SmartAXIS via
USB.
7. Connect the PC and the SmartAXIS using a USB cable.
8. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Transfer > Download.

The Download dialog box appears.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9-7

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
9. Click OK.

The user program is downloaded to the SmartAXIS.

10. After the user program has been successfully downloaded, go to Monitor Mode to check the status of the SmartAXIS. SelectOnline > Monitor > Monitor from the WindLDR menu bar.

11. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Batch.

The Batch Monitor dialog box appears.

12. Confirm that the IP address entered in step 2 is correctly shown in D8084 to D8087.

Monitor SmartAXIS via the Ethernet
Monitor the SmartAXIS via Ethernet using WindLDR.
13. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Communication > Set Up.

The Communication Settings dialog box appears.

9-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
14. Select the Ethernet tab and click Browse.

The IP Address Settings dialog box appears.

15. Click New.

The Input IP Address dialog box appears.

16. Enter the IP address entered in step 2 and click OK.

17. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.

The IP Address Settings dialog box appears.

18. Select the IP address you entered and click OK.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

9-9

9: M AI N TEN AN CE C OM M UN I CATI ON
19. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > PLC > Status.

The PLC Status dialog box appears.

20. Check that the SmartAXIS module type and system software version are displayed correctly.

Configuring the initial Ethernet setup for the maintenance communication server is now complete. You can download and upload
user programs and monitor and change device values via Ethernet.

9-10

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
I ntroduction
This chapter describes user communication that converts the specified data to the data type for the external devices connected to
the SmartAXIS and sends and receives that data.
User communication allows the following two types of communication methods:
 Serial communication with an external device connected to the RS232C port or the RS485 port
 Ethernet communication with an external device connected by the Ethernet port

User Communication via Serial Communication
This section describes the user communication function for communication between the SmartAXIS and external devices with an
RS232C or RS485 port, such as a computer, modem, printer, or barcode reader. The SmartAXIS uses user communication
instructions for transmitting and receiving communication to and from external devices.

User Communication Overview
By installing a communication cartridge on the SmartAXIS expansion communication port, the SmartAXIS can communicate withtwo external devices simultaneously.
When using an RS485 communication cartridge, SmartAXIS modules can communicate with a maximum of 31 RS485 devices
using the user communication.
User communication transmit and receive instructions can be programmed to match the communication protocol of the equipment
to communicate with. Possibility of communication using the user communication mode can be determined referring to the user
communication mode specifications described below.

User Communication Mode Specifications
Type

RS232C User Communication

RS485 User Communication

Communication Port

Port 2 and Port 3

Port 2 and Port 3

Maximum Nodes

1 per port

31 maximum

Standards

EIA RS232CEIA RS485

Baud Rate

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps (Default: 115200)

Data Bits

7 or 8 bits (Default: 7) (Note)

ParityOdd, Even, None (Default: Even) (Note)

Stop Bits

1 or 2 bits (Default: 1)

Receive Timeout

10 to 2540ms (10ms increments) or none
(Receive timeout is disabled when 2550 ms is selected.)
The receive timeout has an effect when using RXD instructions.

Communication Method

Start-stop synchronization system

Maximum Cable Length

3m

Maximum Transmit Data

200 bytes

Maximum Receive Data

200 bytes

BCC Calculation

XOR, ADD, ADD-2comp *, Modbus ASCII *, Modbus RTU *(* For calculation examples, see "BCC Calculation Examples" on page 10-28.)200m

Note: The following configuration cannot be selected: Data Bits: 7, Parity: NoneS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-1

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
RS232C User Communication System Setup
To connect an RS232C communication device to port 2 or 3 on the SmartAXIS, use the user communication cable FC2A-KP1C. One
end of the user communication cable is not provided with a connector, and can be terminated with a proper connector to plug in tocommunicate with the RS232C port.
User Communication Cable
FC2A-KP1C
2.4m (7.87 ft.) long

RS232C Equipment
To RS232C PortTo Port 2
RS232C Communication Cartridge
FT1A-PC1

To Port 3

Attach a proper connector to the open
end of the cable referring to the cableconnector pinouts shown below.

Cable Connector Pinouts
Pin

AWG#

RTS (request to send)28

2

DTR (data terminal ready)28

3

TXD (transmit data)

28

Twisted

Color
Black
Yellow
Blue

4

RXD (receive data)

28

Green

5

DSR (data set ready)

28

Brown

6

SG (signal ground)

28

Gray

7

SG (signal ground)

26

Red

8

NC (no connection)

26

Cover

10-2

Port 2, Port 3

1—

Twisted—S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

White
ShieldSignal Direction

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
RS485 User Communication System Setup
Using the RS485 user communication, a maximum of 31 RS485 devices can be connected to the SmartAXIS.
When using port 2 or 3 for RS485 communication on the SmartAXIS, install the RS485 communication cartridge (FT1A-PC2 or
FT1A-PC3) to the expansion communication port.
Connect RS485 device to the RS485 terminals A, B, and SG of port 2 or 3 on the SmartAXIS using a shielded twisted pair cable asshown below. When using the RS485 communication cartridge (FT1A-PC2) to the expansion communication port, use the user
communication cable FC2A-KP1C. One end of the user communication cable is not provided with a connector, and can beterminated with a proper connector to plug in to communicate with the RS232C port.

31 devices maximum
RS485 Device
To Port 2
RS485 Communication Cartridge
FT1A-PC3

RS485 Device

To Port 3

RS485 Device
Shielded twisted pair cable
200 meters (656 feet) maximumCore wire 0.3 mm 2

To Port 2
RS485 Communication Cartridge
FT1A-PC2To Port 3

Cable Connector Pinouts
Pin

Port 2, Port 3

AWG#

Color

1

B

28

2

A

28

3

NC (no connection)

28

Blue

4

NC (no connection)

28

Green

TwistedBlack
Yellow

5

NC (no connection)

28

Brown

6

NC (no connection)

28

Gray

7

SG (signal ground)26

8

NC (no connection)

26

Cover

—

Twisted—S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Signal Direction

Red
White
Shield10-3

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Programming WindLDRWhen using the user communication function to communicate with an external RS232C or RS485 device, set the communication
parameters for the SmartAXIS to match those of the external device.
Note: Since communication parameters in the Function Area Settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the
SmartAXIS after changing any of these settings.

1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Communication Ports.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Communication Ports appears.

2. In the Communication Mode pull-down list for Port 2 and Port 3, select User Protocol. (Click the Configure button whenchanging previous settings.)
The User Protocol dialog box appears.

When 2550ms is selected in the Receive Timeout box, the receive timeout function is disabled.
3. Select communication parameters to the same values for the device to communicate with.
4. Click the OK button.

10-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Programming TXD Instruction Using WindLDR
The following example demonstrates how to program a TXD instruction including a start delimiter, BCC, and end delimiter using
WindLDR.
TXD sample program:

I0

SOTU

TXD
2

S1
12

D1
M10

D2
D100

Communication port:

Port 2

Transmit completion output:

M10

Transmit status register:

D100

Transmit data byte count:

D101

Data register contents:

D10

04D2h

= 1234D11

162Eh= 5678Transmit data example:
BCC calculation range
BCC ETX
STX “1”
“2”
“3”
“4”
“5”
“6”
“7”
“8” BCC(H)(L)(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (36h) (37h) (38h) (41h) (36h) (03h)Constant
(hex)

D10

D11

BCC

Constant(hex)

1. Start to program a TXD instruction. Move the cursor where you want to insert the TXD instruction, and type TXD. You can also

insert the TXD instruction by clicking the User Communication icon in the menu bar and clicking where you want to insert the
TXD instruction in the program edit area.
The Transmit instruction dialog box appears.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-5

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
2. Check that TXD is selected in the Type box and select Port 2 in the Port box. Then, click Insert.

The Data Type Selection dialog box appears. You will program source device S1 using this dialog box.

3. Click Constant (Hexadecimal) in the Type box and click OK. Next, in the Constant (Hexadecimal) dialog box, type 02 toprogram the start delimiter STX (02h). When finished, click OK.

4. Since the Transmit instruction dialog box reappears, repeat the above procedure. In the Data Type Selection dialog box, click

Variable (DR) and click OK. Next, in the Variable (Data Register) dialog box, type D10 in the DR No. box and click BCD to
ASCII to select the BCD to ASCII conversion. Enter 4 in the Digits box (4 digits) and 2 in the REP box(2 repeat cycles). When finished, click OK.

5. Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box, click BCC and click OK. Next, in the BCC dialog box, enter 1 in the Calculation

Start Position box, select ADD for the Calculate Type, click Binary to ASCII for the Conversion Type, and click 2 for the
Digits. When finished, click OK.

10-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
6. Once again in the Data Type Selection dialog box, click Constant (Hexadecimal) and click OK. Next, in the Constant(Hexadecimal) dialog box, type 03 to program the end delimiter ETX (03h). When finished, click OK.

7. In the Transmit instruction dialog box, type M10 in the destination D1 box and type D100 in the destination D2 box. When

finished, click OK.

Programming of the TXD2 instruction is complete and the transmit data is specified as follows:
BCC calculation range
BCC ETX
STX “1”
“2”
“3”
“4”
“5”
“6”
“7”
“8” BCC(H)(L)(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (36h) (37h) (38h) (41h) (36h) (03h)Constant
(hex)

D10

D11

BCC

Constant(hex)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-7

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Programming RXD Instruction Using WindLDR
The following example demonstrates how to program an RXD instruction including a start delimiter, skip, constant for verification,
BCC, and end delimiter using WindLDR. Converted data is stored to data registers D10 and D11. Internal relay M100 is used as
destination D1 for the receive completion output. Data register D1000 is used as destination D2 for the receive status, and dataregister D1001 is used to store the receive data byte count.
Receive data example:
BCC calculation range# St. # “0”BCC ETX
STX St.
“0”
“,”
“1”
“2”
“3”
“4”
“5” “CR” BCC
(H)
(L)
(H)
(L)
(02h) (00h) (10h) (30h) (30h) (2Ch) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh) (41h) (41h) (03h)Start Delimiter

Skip

Constantfor
Verification

S1
18

D1
M100

Stored to D10 and D11

BCC

End
Delimiter

RXD sample program:

I0

SOTU

RXD
2

D2
D1000

Communication port:

Port 2

Receive completion output:

M100

Receive status register:

D1000

Receive data byte count:

D1001

1. Start to program an RXD instruction. Move the cursor where you want to insert the RXD instruction, and type RXD. You canalso insert the RXD instruction by clicking the User Communication icon in the menu bar and clicking where you want to insert
the RXD instruction in the program edit area, then the Transmit dialog box appears. Click RXD to change the dialog box to the
Receive dialog box.
The Receive instruction dialog box appears.

2. Check that RXD is selected in the Type box and select Port 2 in the Port box. Then, click Insert.

The Data Type Selection dialog box appears. You will program source device S1 using this dialog box.

3. Click Constant (Hexadecimal) in the Type box and click OK. Next, in the Constant (Hexadecimal) dialog box, type 020010

to program the start delimiter STX (02h), Station No. H (00h), and Station No. L (10h). When finished, click OK.

10-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
4. Since the Receive instruction dialog box reappears, repeat the above procedure. In the Data Type Selection dialog box, click

Skip and click OK. Next, in the Skip dialog box, type 02 in the Digits box and click OK.

5. Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box, click Constant (Character) and click OK. Next, in the Constant (Character)dialog box, type , (2Ch) in the Character box to program a comma as a constant to verify. When finished, click OK.

6. Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box, click Variable (DR) and click OK. Next, in the Variable (Data Register) dialog

box, type D10 in the DR No. box and click ASCII to Binary to select ASCII to binary conversion. Enter 4 in the Digits box (4digits) and 2 in the REP box (2 repeat cycles). Click Variable, select HEX, and type 0D to designate a delimiter. When
finished, click OK.

Delimiter

7. Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box, click BCC and click OK. Next, in the BCC dialog box, enter 1 in the Calculation

Start Position box, select ADD for the Calculation Type, click Binary to ASCII for the Conversion Type, and click 2 for the
Digits. When finished, click OK.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-9

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
8. Once again in the Data Type Selection dialog box, click Constant (Hexadecimal) and click OK. Next, in the Constant(Hexadecimal) dialog box, type 03 to program the end delimiter ETX (03h). When finished, click OK.

9. In the Receive instruction dialog box, type M100 in the destination D1 box and type D1000 in the destination D2 box. When

finished, click OK.

Programming of the RXD instruction is complete and the receive data will be stored as follows:

10-10

D10

1234h

= 4660

D11

0005h

=5

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
RS232C Line Control Signals
While the SmartAXIS is in user communication mode, special data registers can be used to enable or disable DSR and DTR control
signal options for port 2 through port 3. The DSR and DTR control signal options cannot be used for port 1.
The RTS signal line of port 2 through port 3 remains on.
In the maintenance communication mode, DSR has no effect and DTR remains on.

Special Data Registers for Port 2 to Port 3 RS232C Line Control Signals
Special data registers D8104 through D8106 are allocated for RS232C line control signals.
Communication
Port

DR No.
D8104

Control signal status

Every scan

R

Port 2 to Port 3

D8105

DSR input control signal option

When sending/receiving data

R/W

D8106

DTR output control signal option

When sending/receiving data

R/W

Data Register Function

Data Register Value Updated

R/W

Control Signal Status D8104
Special data register D8104 stores a value to show that DSR and DTR are on or off at port 2 through port 3.
The data of D8104 is updated at every END processing.
Bit 15

D8104

3

2

1

0

0

0

0

0

Port 3

Port 2

D8104 2-bit Binary Value

DTR

DSR

Description

00

OFF

OFF

Both DSR and DTR are off
DSR is on

01

OFF

ON

10

ON

OFF

DTR is on

11

ON

ON

Both DSR and DTR are on

DSR Control Signal Status in RUN and STOP Modes
CommunicationMode

000 (default)

User
Communication
Mode

Maintenance Mode

DSR (Input) Status

D8105
3-bit Binary Value

RUN Mode

STOP ModeNo effect

No effect (TXD/RXD disabled)

001

ON:
OFF:

Enable TXD/RXD
Disable TXD/RXD

No effect (TXD/RXD disabled)

010

ON:
OFF:

Disable TXD/RXD
Enable TXD/RXD

No effect (TXD/RXD disabled)

011

ON:
OFF:

Enable TXD
Disable TXD

No effect (TXD/RXD disabled)

100

ON:
OFF:

Disable TXD
Enable TXD

No effect (TXD/RXD disabled)

 101

No effect

No effect (TXD/RXD disabled)—

No effect

No effect

DTR Control Signal Status in RUN and STOP Modes
Communication
Mode
User
Communication
Mode
Maintenance ModeDTR (Output) Status

D8106
2-bit Binary Value

RUN Mode

STOP Mode00 (default)

ON

01

OFF

10

RXD enabled:
RXD disabled:

11

ON

OFF

—

ON

ON

OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

OFF

10-11

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON SDSR Input Control Signal Option D8105
Special data register D8105 is used to control data flow between the SmartAXIS RS232C port 2 through port 3 and the remoteterminal depending on the DSR (data set ready) signal sent from the remote terminal. The DSR signal is an input to the SmartAXIS
to determine the status of the remote terminal. The remote terminal informs the SmartAXIS using DSR whether the remoteterminal is ready for receiving data or is sending valid data.
The DSR control signal option can be used only for the user communication through the RS232C port 2 to port 3.
The control status of each port is allocated as shown below:
Bit 15

D8105

5

4

3

2

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Port 3D8105
3-bit Binary Value
000

Port 2

Description
DSR is not used for data flow control. When DSR control is not needed, set 0 to D8105.
When DSR is on, the SmartAXIS can transmit and receive data.

001

DSR signal

ON
OFFTransmit/receive

Impossible

Possible

Impossible

Possible

Impossible

When DSR is off, the SmartAXIS can transmit and receive data.

010

DSR signal

ON
OFFTransmit/receive

Impossible

When DSR is on, the SmartAXIS can transmit data. This function is usually called “Busy Control” and is used forcontrolling transmission to a remote terminal with a slow processing speed, such as a printer. When the remoteterminal is busy, data input to the remote terminal is restricted.
011

DSR signal

ON
OFFTransmit

Impossible

Possible

Impossible

Possible

Impossible

When DSR is off, the SmartAXIS can transmit data.

100

DSR signal

ON
OFFTransmit
 101

10-12

Impossible

Same as D8105 = 000. DSR is not used for data flow control.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON SDTR Output Control Signal Option D8106
Special data register D8106 is used to control the DTR (data terminal ready) signal to indicate the SmartAXIS operating status ortransmitting/receiving status.
The DTR control signal option can be used only for the user communication through the RS232C port 2 to port 3.
The control status of each port is allocated as shown below:
Bit 15

D8106

3

2

1

0

0

0

0

0

Port 3D8106
2-bit Binary ValuePort 2

Description
While the SmartAXIS is running, DTR is on whether the SmartAXIS is transmitting or receiving data. While theSmartAXIS is stopped, DTR remains off. Use this option to indicate the SmartAXIS operating status.

00

SmartAXISDTR signal

StoppedRunning

StoppedON
OFF

Whether the SmartAXIS is running or stopped, DTR remains off.

01

SmartAXISDTR signal

StoppedRunning

StoppedON
OFF

While the SmartAXIS can receive data, DTR is turned on. While the SmartAXIS can not receive data, DTR remains off.
Use this option when flow control of receive data is required.
10

Receive
DTR signal

11

Impossible

Possible

Impossible

ON
OFF

Same as D8106 = 00.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-13

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
User Communication via Ethernet Communication
This section describes the Ethernet user communication. Ethernet user communication works on TCP/IP protocol. The SmartAXIS
can be used as a user communication client/server. With Ethernet user communication instructions (ETXD and ERXD instructions),
the SmartAXIS can exchange the data with devices on the network.
Except for the port number and the allocation of the user communication receive instruction cancel flags, Ethernet user
communication instructions (ETXD and ERXD instructions) are identical to TXD and RXD instructions. For details about TXD and
RXD instructions, see Chapter 25 "User Communication Instructions" in the SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual.

Ethernet User Communication Overview
The SmartAXIS can be used as an Ethernet user communication client/server. It can be used simultaneously with the maintenancecommunication server, Modbus TCP server, and Modbus TCP client.
When using the SmartAXIS user communication client, the SmartAXIS can access and communicate with the server devices using
the protocol of the server device. A maximum of three client connections of the SmartAXIS can be allocated to user
communication.
User communication client functions and configuration are described in “To use the SmartAXIS as a user communication client” onpage 10-15. User communication server functions and configuration are described in “User Communication Server” on page 10-19.
The SmartAXIS supports the TCP/IP protocol.
The SmartAXIS can send data to and receive data from devices on a network by using the ETXD (Ethernet user communicationtransmit) instruction and the ERXD (Ethernet user communication receive) instruction.
The SmartAXIS can be used as both an Ethernet user communication client and server.
Each of the three connections possessed by the SmartAXIS can be allocated to different types of communication. Ethernet user
communication can simultaneously use the maintenance communication server, Modbus TCP server, and Modbus TCP client.
[Ethernet communication example using three connections]Port number 2101 is
the maintenance communication
server port

Modbus TCP client for
remote host 1 using
connection 1

User communicationclient for remote host 2
using connection 2

Maintenance communication
server using connection 3

Ethernet user communication

Port number 502 is
the Modbus
communication
server port

PV

OUT
A1

AT

SV

A2
HB

MODE

OUT

Perform hostcommunication on
SmartAXIS
maintenancecommunication port
number 2101

Port number 6789 is
the data communication
server port

OFF

XXX - X00

SmartAXIS function area settings connection settings
Connection

10-14

Communication protocol

Remote host table

Other settings

Remote hostnumberIP address

Portnumber1

Modbus TCP client

Destination: Remote host 1

1

192.168.0.12

502

2

User communication client

Destination: Remote host 2

2

192.168.0.13

6789

3

Maintenance communication serverPort number: 2101

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
To use the SmartAXIS as a user communication client
Connect the SmartAXIS to the server device via the network and communicate with the server device using the Ethernet user
communication instructions.
A maximum of three connections can be allocated to user communication clients. The SmartAXIS can simultaneously connect toand communicate with three different server devices.
[When three connections are allocated to user communication client]Server device 1

Client device

Server device 3

Server device 2

Client device

Client device

Client device
Connection 2

Connection 1

Client device

Client device

Client device

Connection 3

SmartAXIS
User communication client

To use the SmartAXIS as a user communication server
The client devices connect to the SmartAXIS and the SmartAXIS communicates with the client devices using Ethernet user
communication instructions.
A maximum of three connections can be allocated to user communication servers. A maximum of three client devices cansimultaneously connect to and communicate with the SmartAXIS.
[When three connections are allocated to user communication server]
User communication server

SmartAXIS
Connection 1

Connection 3
Connection 2

Client device

Client device

Client device

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-15

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
User Communication Client
When a client connection is configured as the user communication client, the SmartAXIS communicates with the specified server
device according to the settings configured in the ETXD and ERXD instructions that are programmed for the client connection. The
remote host number and other communication settings can be configured in the Connection Settings tab in the Function Area
Settings dialog box.

Specifications (User Communication Client)
Item

User Communication Client

Remote host number
Establish connection
Disconnect connection
Number of remote hosts that the SmartAXIS
can communicate simultaneously
Receive timeout

1 to 255
 When ETXD/ERXD Instructions are executed When the SmartAXIS starts to run (Note 1)
 When the SmartAXIS is stopped
 When special internal relays (M8130 to M8132) are turned on

One remote host per a user communication client (Note 2)
100 to 25400 ms (100 ms increments); Default: 1000 ms (Note 3)

Note 1: Can be enabled or disabled in Function Area Settings, Connection Settings.
Note 2: The settings can be configured in the Connection Settings tab in the Function Area Settings dialog box.
Note 3: The receive timeout is enabled when using the ERXD instruction. To disable the receive timeout, set it to 25500 ms.

Establishing/Disconnecting User Communication Client Connections
When user communication clients are configured, connections are established on TCP/IP protocol. The connections are establishedwhen ETXD/ERXD instructions are executed or when the SmartAXIS has started to run (See Note 1 above). After a connection has
been established, the connection will be kept open until either the SmartAXIS is stopped or a special internal relay allocated to theconnection is turned on.
Device Address

Description

M8130

Connection 1 Disconnect

M8131

Connection 2 Disconnect

M8132

Connection 3 Disconnect

Operation
When the reply is turned on, the corresponding
connection is disconnected.

User Communication Client Receive Instruction (ERXD) Cancel Flag
The allocation of the user communication receive instruction cancel flags for each client connection is shown in the table below.
For details about the user communication receive instruction cancel flag, see Chapter 25 "User Communication Instructions" in the
SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual.
Device Address

10-16

Description

M8100

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Connection 1)

M8101

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Connection 2)

M8102

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Connection 3)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Programming WindLDR (User Communication Client)To use the user communication client, configure the user client communication settings in the Function Area Settings dialog box
and then download the user program to the SmartAXIS.
1. Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar, and then click Connection Settings.

The Function Area settings dialog box appears.

2. Select the User Communication Client as the communication mode for the client connection 1.

The User Communication Client dialog box appears.

Configure the remote host number and receive timeout. If you want the SmartAXIS to establish the connection when it starts torun, select “Make Connection when PLC starts.” Click OK button to close the dialog box.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-17

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
3. Edit the user program.

To insert Ethernet user communication instructions to the ladder editor, select the Ethernet user communication instructions(ETXD or ERXD instructions) in the Coil Selection dialog box.

The Ethernet User Communication Instruction dialog box appears.

Select ETXD (Transmit over Ethernet) to transmit data or ERXD (Receive over Ethernet) to receive data as the instruction type.
Select the client connection from 1 through 3 and designate S1, D1, and D2. Click OK button to close the dialog box.

M0

ETXD
C1

SOTU

S1
1

D1
M100

D2
D100

4. Download the user program.

The settings for the user communication client have been finished.

The specifications of Ethernet user communication instructions (ETXD and ERXD instructions) are identical to TXD and RXD
instructions. For details about TXD and RXD instructions, see Chapter 25 "User Communication Instructions" in the SmartAXIS
Ladder Programming Manual.

10-18

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
User Communication Server
When a server connection is configured as the user communication server, a client device can access and communicate with the
SmartAXIS. The SmartAXIS communicates with the client device according to the settings configured in the ETXD and ERXD
instructions that are programmed for the server connection. The local host number and other communication settings can be
configured in the Connection Settings tab in the Function Area Settings dialog box.

Specifications (User Communication Server)
Item

User Communication Server

Local host port number

2102 to 2104 (Can be changed between 0 and 65535)

Number of clients that can simultaneously
communicate with the SmartAXIS

One client per a user communication server (Note 1)

Receive timeout

100 to 25400 ms (100 ms increments) (Note 2)

Note 1: A maximum of three connections can be allocated to user communication servers, and a maximum of three client devices cansimultaneously connect to and communicate with the SmartAXIS.
Note 2: The receive timeout is enabled when using the ERXD instruction. To disable the receive timeout, set it to 25500 ms.

User Communication Server Receive Instruction (ERXD) Cancel Flag
The allocation of the user communication receive instruction cancel flags for each server connection is shown in the table below.
For details about the user communication receive instruction cancel flag, see Chapter 25 "User Communication Instructions" in the
SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual.
Device Address

Description

M8100

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Connection 1)

M8101

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Connection 2)

M8102

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Connection 3)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-19

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Programming WindLDR (User Communication Server)
To use the user communication server, configure the user communication server settings in the Function Area Settings dialog box
and then download the user program to the SmartAXIS.
1. Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar, and then click Connection Settings.

The Function Area settings dialog box appears.

2. Select the User Communication Server as the communication mode for the server connection 1.

The User Communication Server dialog box appears.

Configure the local host port number and receive timeout. If you want to restrict the access using IP address, configure theallowed IP address.

10-20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
3. Edit the user program.

To insert Ethernet user communication instructions to the ladder editor, select the Ethernet user communication instructions(ETXD or ERXD instructions) in the Coil Selection dialog box.

The Ethernet User Communication Instruction dialog box appears.

Select ETXD (Transmit over Ethernet) to transmit data and ERXD (Receive over Ethernet) to receive data as the instruction type.
Select the server connection from 1 through 8 and designate S1, D1, and D2. Click OK button to close the dialog box.

M0

ERXD
S1

SOTU

S1
1

D1
M100

D2
D100

4. Download the user program.

The settings for the user communication server have been finished.

The specifications of Ethernet user communication instructions (ETXD and ERXD instructions) are identical to TXD and RXD
instructions. For details about TXD and RXD instructions, see Chapter 25 "User Communication Instructions" in the SmartAXIS
Ladder Programming Manual.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-21

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
User Communication Error
When a user communication error occurs, an error code is stored in the data register designated as a transmit status in the TXD
instruction or as a receive status in the RXD instruction. When multiple errors occur, the final error code overwrites all preceding
errors and is stored in the status data register.
The status data register also contains transmit/receive status code. To extract a user communication error code from the status
data register, divide the value by 16. The remainder is the user communication error code. See Chapter 25 "User Communication
Instructions" in the SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual.
To correct the error, correct the user program by referring to the error causes described below:
User Communication Error Code
User
Communication
Error Code

10-22

Error Cause

Transmit/Receive Completion Output

1

Start inputs to more than 5 TXD instructions are on
simultaneously.

Transmit completion outputs of the first 5 TXD instructions
from the top of the ladder diagram are turned on.

2

Transmission destination busy timeout

The transmit completion output goes on.

3

Start inputs to more than 5 RXD instructions with a startdelimiter are on simultaneously.

Among the first 5 RXD instructions from the top of theladder diagram, receive completion outputs of RXD
instructions go on if the start delimiter matches the first
byte of the received data.

4

While a RXD instruction without a start delimiter is
executed, another RXD instruction with or without a startdelimiter is executed.

The receive completion output of the RXD instruction at asmaller address goes on.

5

While a RXD instruction with a start delimiter is executed,
another RXD instruction with the same start delimiter is
executed.

No effect on the receive completion output.

7

The first bytes of received data do not match the specified
start delimiter.

No effect on the receive completion output.
If incoming data with a matching start delimiter is received
subsequently, the receive completion output goes on.

8

When ASCII to binary or ASCII to BCD conversion is
specified in the receive format, any code other than 0 to 9
and A to F is received. (These codes are regarded as 0
during conversion.)

The receive completion output goes on.

9

BCC calculated from the RXD instruction does not matchthe BCC appended to the received data.

The receive completion output goes on.

10

Constants including the end delimiter code specified in the
RXD instruction do not match the received constants.

The receive completion output goes on.

11

Receive timeout between characters(After receiving one byte of data, the next byte is notreceived in the period specified for the receive timeout
value.)The receive completion output goes on.

12

Overrun error(Before the receive processing is completed, the next data
is received.)

The receive completion output goes off.

13

Framing error(Detection error of start bit or stop bit)

No effect on the completion output.

14

Parity check error(Error is found in the parity check.)No effect on the completion output.

15

A user communication instruction was used even though
the port settings or the connection settings were not set touser communication mode.

No effect on the completion output.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON SASCII Character Code Table
Upper
Bit
Lower
Bit

0
Decimal1
Decimal2
Decimal3
Decimal4
Decimal5
Decimal6
Decimal

7

0
NU

L

0

SO

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

DL
E

SP

0

@

P

`

p

16

32

48

64

80

96

112

!

1

A

Q

a

q

33

49

65

81

97

113

”

2

B

R

b

r

34

50

66

82

98

114

DC

#

3

C

S

c

s

19

35

51

67

83

99

115

$

4

D

T

d

t

36

52

68

84

100

116

%

5

E

U

e

u

37

53

69

85

101

117

&

6

F

V

f

v

38

54

70

86

102

118

’

7

G

W

g

w

H

DC

1

17

ST

X

DC

2

ET

1
2

18

X

3

3

EO D C
T
4
4

20

EN NA
Q
K
5

21

AC

S
K YN

6

BE

22

E
L TB

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

129

145

161

177

193

209

225

241

130

146

162

178

194

210

226

242

131

147

163

179

195

211

227

243

132

148

164

180

196

212

228

244

133

149

165

181

197

213

229

245

134

150

166

182

198

214

230

246

135

151

167

183

199

215

231

247

136

152

168

184

200

216

232

248

137

153

169

185

201

217

233

249

138

154

170

186

202

218

234

250

139

155

171

187

203

219

235

251

140

156

172

188

204

220

236

252

141

157

173

189

205

221

237

253

Decimal

7

39

55

71

87

103

119

8

BS CAN

(

8

H

X

h

x

Decimal

8

24

40

56

72

88

104

120

HT

EM

)

9

I

Y

i

y

9

25

41

57

73

89

105

121

A

LF

SU

*

:

J

Z

j

z

Decimal

10

26

42

58

74

90

106

122

B

VT

ES
C

+

;

K

[

k

{

Decimal

11

27

43

59

75

91

107

123

C

FF

FS

,

<

L

?

l

|

Decimal

12

28

44

60

76

92

108

124

D

CR

GS

-

=

M

]

m

}

Decimal

13

29

45

61

77

93

109

125

E

SO

RS

.

>

N

^

n

~

Decimal

14

30

46

62

78

94

110

126

142

158

174

190

206

222

238

254

F

SI

US

/

?

O

_

o

Decimal

15

31

47

63

79

95

111

127

143

159

175

191

207

223

239

255

9
Decimal

23

8B

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-23

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Sample Program – User Communication TXDThis example demonstrates a program to send data to a printer using the user communication TXD2 (transmit) instruction, with theoptional RS232C communication cartridge installed on the port 2 connector of the 24-I/O type SmartAXIS.

System Setup

Printer

RS232C Communication
Cartridge
FT1A-KP1C

To Port 2 (RS232C)

User Communication Cable 1C
FC2A-KP1C
2.4m (7.87 ft.) long
To RS232C Port

Attach a proper connector to the open
end of the cable referring to the cableconnector pinouts shown below.

Cable Connection and Pinouts
Mini DIN Connector Pinouts
Description
ShieldD-sub 9-pin Connector Pinouts
Color

Pin

Pin

—

Cover

1

NC

Description
No ConnectionNC

No Connection

Black

1

2

NC

No ConnectionNC

No Connection

Yellow

2

3

DATA

Receive Data

TXD

Transmit Data

Blue

3

4

NC

No ConnectionNC

No Connection

Green

4

5

GND

GroundDSR

Data Set Ready

Brown

5

6

NC

No ConnectionNC

No Connection

Gray

6

7

NC

No Connection

SG

Signal Ground

Red

7

8

BUSY

Busy Signal

NC

No Connection

White

8

9

NC

No Connection

The name of BUSY terminal differs depending on printers, such as DTR. The function of this terminal is to send a signal to remoteequipment whether the printer is ready to print data or not. Since the operation of this signal may differ depending on printers,
confirm the operation before connecting the cable.

Caution Do not connect any wiring to the NC (no connection) pins; otherwise, the SmartAXIS and the printer may not work

correctly and may be damaged.

Description of Operation

Printout Example

The data of counter C2 and data register D30 are printed every minute. A printout
example is shown on the right.

Programming Special Data Register
Special data register D8105 is used to monitor the BUSY signal and to control thetransmission of print data.
Special DR

D8105

Value

Description

3
(011)

While DSR is on (not busy), the SmartAXIS sends data.
While DSR is off (busy), the SmartAXIS stops data transmission.
If the off duration exceeds a limit (approx. 5 sec), a transmission busy
timeout error will occur, and the remaining data is not sent. The
transmit status data register stores an error code 2.

--- PRINT TEST --11H 00M
CNT2...0050
D030...3854--- PRINT TEST --11H 01M
CNT2...0110
D030...2124

The SmartAXIS monitors the DSR signal to prevent the receive buffer of the printer from overflowing. For the DSR signal, see "DSR
Input Control Signal Option D8105" on page 10-12.

10-24

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Setting User Communication Mode in WindLDR Function Area Settings
Since this example uses the RS232C port 2, select User Protocol for Port 2 in the Function Area Settings using WindLDR. See"Programming WindLDR" on page 10-4.

Setting Communication Parameters
Set the communication parameters to match those of the printer. See "Programming WindLDR" on page 10-4. For details of thecommunication parameters of the printer, see the user’s manual for the printer. An example is shown below:
Communication Parameters:
Baud rate:

9600 bps

Data bits:

8

Parity check:

None

Stop bits:

1

Note: The receive timeout value is used for the RXD instruction in the user communication mode. Since this example uses only the TXD instruction,
the receive timeout value has no effect.

Ladder Diagram
The second data stored in special data register D8014 is compared with 0 using the CMP= (compare equal to) instruction. Eachtime the condition is met, the TXD2 instruction is executed to send the C2 and D30 data to the printer. A counting circuit for
counter C2 is omitted from this sample program.
S1 –
3

D1 –
D8105

REP

S1 –
D8014

S2 –
0

D1 –
M0

REP

MOV(W)

S1 –
C2

D1 –
D31

REP

MOV(W)

S1 –
D8012

D1 –
D20

REP

D8012 hour data is moved to D20.

MOV(W)

S1 –
D8013

D1 –
D21

REP

D8013 minute data is moved to D21.

S1
73

D1
M1

D2
D0

TXD2 is executed to send 73-byte data through the RS232C port 2 tothe printer.

M8120
CMP=(W)
M8125
M0

M0

SOTU

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W)TXD
2

3  D8105 to enable the DSR option for busy control.
M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.
CMP=(W) compares the D8014 second data with 0.
When the D8014 data equals 0 second, M0 is turned on.
Counter C2 current value is moved to D31.

SP SP SP
–
–
–
SP
P
R
I
N
T
SP
T
20h 20h 20h 2Dh 2Dh 2Dh 20h 50h 52h 49h 4Eh 54h 20h 54h
E
S
T
SP
–
–
–
CR LF CR LF SP SP SP
45h 53h 54h 20h 2Dh 2Dh 2Dh 0Dh 0Ah 0Dh 0Ah 20h 20h 20h
D20 Conversion: BCDASCII Digits: 2 REP: 01
H
SP
48h 20h

D20 hour data is converted from BCD to ASCII, and 2 digits are sent.
D21 minute data is converted from BCD to ASCII, and 2 digits are sent.

D21 Conversion: BCDASCII Digits: 2 REP: 01
M CR LF CR LF
4Dh 0Dh 0Ah 0Dh 0Ah

D31 counter C2 data is converted from BCD to ASCII, and 4 digits are
sent.

SP SP SP
C
N
T
2
.
.
.
20h 20h 20h 43h 4Eh 54h 32h 2Eh 2Eh 2Eh
D31 Conversion: BCDASCII Digits: 4 REP: 01

D30 data is converted from BCD to ASCII, and 4 digits are sent.

CR LF SP SP SP
D
0
3
0
.
.
.
0Dh 0Ah 20h 20h 20h 44h 30h 33h 30h 2Eh 2Eh 2Eh
D30 Conversion: BCDASCII Digits: 4 REP: 01
CR LF CR LF
0Dh 0Ah 0Dh 0Ah

END

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-25

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Sample Program – User Communication RXD
This example demonstrates a program to receive data from a barcode reader with an RS232C port using the user communication
RXD2 (receive) instruction.

System Setup

RS232C Communication
Cartridge
FT1A-KP1C

To Port 2 (RS232C)

User Communication Cable
FC2A-KP1C
2.4m (7.87 ft.) long
To RS232C Port

Attach a proper connector to the open
end of the cable referring to the cableconnector pinouts shown below.

Mini DIN Connector Pinouts
Description
ShieldBarcode Reader

IDEC DATALOGIC
DS4600A

D-sub 25-pin Connector Pinouts
Color

Pin

Pin

—

Cover

1

FG

Description
Frame GroundNC

No Connection

Black

1

2

TXD1

Transmit DataNC

No Connection

Yellow

2

3

RXD1

Receive Data

TXD

Transmit Data

Blue

3

7

GND

GroundRXD

Receive Data

Green

4

NC

No Connection

Brown

5

NC

No Connection

Gray

6

SG

Signal Ground

Red

7

NC

No Connection

White

8

Caution Do not connect any wiring to the NC (no connection) pins; otherwise, the SmartAXIS and the barcode reader may notwork correctly and may be damaged.

Description of Operation
A barcode reader is used to scan barcodes of 8 numerical digits. The scanned data is sent to the SmartAXIS through the RS232C
port 2 and stored to data registers. The upper 8 digits of the data are stored to data register D20 and the lower 8 digits are stored
to data register D21.

Setting User Communication Mode in WindLDR Function Area Settings
Since this example uses the RS232C port 2, select User Protocol for Port 2 in the Function Area Settings using WindLDR. See"Programming WindLDR" on page 10-4.

Setting Communication Parameters
Set the communication parameters to match those of the barcode reader. See "Programming WindLDR" on page 10-4. For detailsof the communication parameters of the barcode reader, see the user’s manual for the barcode reader. An example is shown
below:
Communication Parameters:

10-26

Baud rate:

9600bps

Data bits:

7

Parity check:

Even

Stop bits:

1

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON S
Configuring Barcode Reader
The values shown below are an example of configuring a barcode reader. For actual settings, see the user’s manual for thebarcode reader.
Synchronization mode

Auto

Read mode

Single read or
multiple readCommunication parameter

Baud rate:
Parity check:

9600bpsEven

Data bits:
Stop bit:

7
1

Other communication settings

Header:Data echo back:
Output timing:
Data output filter:
Sub serial:

02h
No
Output priority 1
No
No

Terminator:
BCR data output:
Character suppress:
Main serial input:

03h
Yes
No
No

Comparison preset modeNot used

Device Addresses
M100

Input to start receiving barcode data

M101

Receive completion output for barcode data

M8120

Initialize pulse special internal relay

D20

Store barcode data (upper 4 digits)

D21

Store barcode data (lower 4 digits)

D100

Receive status data register for barcode data

D101

Receive data byte count data register

Ladder Diagram
When the SmartAXIS starts operation, the RXD2 instruction is executed to wait for incoming data. When data receive is complete,
the data is stored to data registers D20 and D21. The receive completion signal is used to execute the RXD2 instruction to wait foranother incoming data.
S
M100

M8120
M100

RXD
2

S1
10

D1
M101

D2
D100

At the rising edge of M100, RXD2 is executed to be ready for receiving data.
Even after M100 is reset, RXD2 still waits for incoming data.

R
M100
M101

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay used to set M100.

S
M100

When data receive is complete, M101 is turned on, then M100 is set to execute RXD2 toreceive the next incoming data.

R
M101
END

RXD2 Data
STX D20 B4 2 ETX(02h) Data Register (03h)
End Delimiter
D20, ASCII to BCD Conversion (4 digits), Repeat: 2Start Delimiter

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

10-27

10: U SER C OM M UN I CATI ON I N STR UCTI ON SBCC Calculation Examples
The SmartAXIS can use three new BCC calculation formulas of ADD-2comp, Modbus ASCII, and Modbus RTU for transmit
instructions TXD2 and TXD3 and receive instructions RXD2 and RXD3. These block check characters are calculated as described
below.
ADD-2compAdd the characters in the range from the BCC calculation start position to the byte immediately before the BCC, then invert theresult bit by bit, and add 1.
1. Add the characters in the range from the BCC calculation start position to the byte immediately before the BCC.
2. Invert the result bit by bit, and add 1 (2’s complement).
3. Store the result to the BCC position according to the designated conversion type (Binary to ASCII conversion or No conversion)and the designated quantity of BCC digits.

Example: Binary to ASCII conversion, 2 BCC digits
When the result of step 2 is 175h, the BCC will consist of 37h, 35h.
Modbus ASCII — Calculating the LRC (longitudinal redundancy check)Calculate the BCC using LRC (longitudinal redundancy check) for the range from the BCC calculation start position to the byte
immediately before the BCC.
1. Convert the ASCII characters in the range from the BCC calculation start position to the byte immediately before the BCC, inunits of two characters, to make 1-byte hexadecimal data. (Example: 37h, 35h  75h)

2. Add up the results of step 1.
3. Invert the result bit by bit, and add 1 (2’s complement).
4. Convert the lowest 1-byte data to ASCII characters. (Example: 75h  37h, 35h)
5. Store the two digits to the BCC (LRC) position.

If the BCC calculation range consists of an odd number of bytes, the BCC calculation results in an indefinite value. Modbus
protocol defines that the BCC calculation range is an even number of bytes.

Modbus RTU — Calculating the CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy checksum)
Calculate the BCC using CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy checksum) for the range from the BCC calculation start position to the byte
immediately before the BCC. The generation polynomial is: X16 + X15 + X2 + 1.
1. Take the exclusive OR (XOR) of FFFFh and the first 1-byte data at the BCC calculation start position.
2. Shift the result by 1 bit to the right. When a carry occurs, take the exclusive OR (XOR) of A001h, then go to step 3.

If not, directly go to step 3.

3. Repeat step 2, shifting 8 times.
4. Take the exclusive OR (XOR) of the result and the next 1-byte data.
5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 up to the byte immediately before the BCC.
6. Swap the higher and lower bytes of the result of step 5, and store the resultant CRC-16 to the BCC (CRC) position. (Example:

1234h  34h, 12h)

10-28

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
I ntroduction
The SmartAXIS supports the Modbus communications protocols.
When a communication cartridge is installed on the expansion communication port, Modbus RTU protocol can be used. The
SmartAXIS can communicate with hardware devices supporting Modbus RTU protocol via RS-232C/RS-485.
Modbus TCP protocol can also be used on the built-in Ethernet port. The SmartAXIS can communicate with hardware devices
supporting Modbus TCP protocol via Ethernet.

Modbus Communication via RS-232C/RS-485
Applicable SmartAXIS
FT1A-12FT1A-24

FT1A-40

FT1A-48

—

X

X

X

The SmartAXIS supports the Modbus RTU protocol and can be used as the Modbus RTU master and the Modbus RTU slave. Whenconfigured as a Modbus RTU master, the SmartAXIS can monitor and change the data of Modbus RTU slave devices. When the
SmartAXIS is configured as a Modbus RTU slave, the device data of the SmartAXIS can be monitored and changed from the
Modbus RTU master device.
For the Modbus RTU master function and how to configure it, see "Modbus Master Communication" on page 11-2. For the Modbus
RTU slave function and how to configure it, see "Modbus Slave Communication Specifications" on page 11-8.

Modbus RTU Master

Modbus RTU Slave 1

Modbus RTU Slave 31

Shielded 2-core twisted pair cable, total length 200 m

Notes:
 Modbus communication of the SmartAXIS does not support ASCII mode. Configure all the Modbus devices to communicate with as in RTU

mode.
 The 24-I/O type has one expansion communication port. The 40- and 48-I/O types have two expansion communication ports. The 12-I/O

type has no expansion communication port.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-1

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Modbus Master Communication
When configured as a Modbus master, the SmartAXIS sends communication requests to Modbus slaves to read/write data. Eachcommunication request is sent to a Modbus slave according to the configured request table.
Modbus master communication settings and request tables for Modbus slave stations can be programmed using the WindLDR
Function Area Settings. Communication with slave stations are performed in synchronism with user program execution, and thecommunication data are processed at the END processing in the order of request numbers specified in the request table. Whenrequest execution devices are designated, requests are executed only when the corresponding request execution device is turned
on. When request execution devices are not designated, all requests are executed continuously.

Modbus Master Communication Specifications
Item

Description

Baud Rate (bps)

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

Data Bits

8 bits (fixed)

Stop bits

1, 2 bits

ParityEven, Odd, None

Slave Number

1 to 247 (0: broadcast slave number) *1

Maximum Number of Slaves

31

Receive Timeout *2

10 to 2550 ms (in increments of 10 ms)

Timeout between Characters

10 ms

Transmission Wait Time

1 to 5000 ms (in increments of 1 ms)

Retry Cycles

1 to 10*1: A communication request becomes the broadcast when slave number 0 is specified. The broadcast communication request is received by all
Modbus RTU slaves. Modbus RTU slave does not reply to the broadcast communication. Broadcast can be used to write the same data to all
Modbus RTU slaves.
*2: Specifies the period of time before receiving a response frame from a slave.

Modbus Master Communication Start and Stop
When request execution devices are designated in the Modbus master request table, internal relays or data register bits as manyas the request quantity are allocated to execute Modbus master communication. The internal relays or data register bits areallocated in the order of requests. For example, when internal relay M0 is designated as the request execution device, M0 is
allocated to request No. 1, M1 to request No. 2, and so on. To execute a request, turn on the corresponding request execution
device.
When communication is completed, the request execution device turns off automatically. When it is required to send requests
continuously, keep the corresponding request execution device on using a SET or OUT instruction.
When request execution devices are not designated, all requests programmed in the request table are executed continuously.

Communication Completion and Communication Error
Modbus communication finishes when a read or write process is completed successfully or when a communication error occurs.
Communication error occurs when communication failure has repeated more than the designated retry cycles or when the masterstation does not receive response within the designated receive timeout period. When a communication error occurs, the request
is canceled and the next request is processed. When the error status data register is designated, the communication status of eachrequest can be confirmed.
Note: Modbus master processes a maximum of one Modbus request per scan.

11-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Communication Error Data
When Error Status is configured in the Request Table from the Function Area Settings, the error data of each request can be
confirmed.
Use a single DR for allcommunication requests

Error data of each communication request

Unchecked

Error data, the remote host number (high-order byte) and error code (low-order byte), of each request in theentire request table can be confirmed. Data registers as many as the quantity of requests are reserved forstoring error data. When an error occurs for a request, error data is stored to the corresponding data register.

CheckedA single data register is shared by all requests. When an error occurs for a request, error data is stored to thedata register and the old error data is overwritten.

Bit Allocation
Remote Host Number(high-order byte)

1 to 255

Error Code(low-order byte)

00h: Normal completion
01h: Function code error (unsupported function code)
02h: Access destination error (address out of range, address+device quantity out of range)
03h: Device quantity error, 1-bit write data error (specified device quantity of 1-bit write is unsupported)
12h: Frame length error (frame length of transmitted request exceeds range)
13h: BCC error (BCC does not match)
14h: Slave number error (received slave number is invalid)
16h: Timeout error (timeout occurs)

Communication Error Data of Each Request
Error data of each request in the entire request table can be confirmed. To confirm error data of each request, select to use Error
Status in the Request Table from the Function Area Settings and enter the data register number.
When Use a single DR for all communication requests is not selected, starting with the data register number, data registers as
many as the quantity of requests are reserved for storing error data. When an error occurs for a request, an error code is stored toa corresponding data register.
When Use a single DR for all communication requests is selected, the same data register is shared by all requests. When an error
occurs for a request, an error code is stored to the data register and the old value is overwritten.

Number of Requests in Modbus Master
The number of requests that can be programmed in a request table is shown in the table below:
Port
No. of requests

Port 2 and Port 3
255

Note: 8 bytes of the user program area are needed per each request.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-3

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Programming Modbus Master Using WindLDR
Modbus master communication is programmed for Modbus RTU mode using WindLDR. Since these settings relate to the user
program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing any of these settings.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Communication Ports.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Communication Ports appears.

2. In the Communication Mode pull-

down list for Port 2, select Modbus
RTU Master.

3. Click the Configure button for Port 2. The Modbus RTU Master Request Table appears.

11-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
4. Click the Communication Settings button. The Communication Settings dialog box appears. Change settings, if required.

Baud Rate (bps)

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

ParityEven, Odd, None

Stop Bits

1 or 2Retry Cycle

1 to 10

Receive Timeout

1 to 255 (10ms)

Transmission Wait Time

0 to 5000 (ms)

5. Click the OK button to return to the Modbus RTU Master Request Table. Designate requests under the Function Code. A

maximum of 255 requests can be entered in one request table.

Choose to use Request Execution Devices and Error Status data registers if necessary. When using Request Execution Devices
and Error Status data registers, enter the first number of the devices.

Notes for Editing the Request Table

Request execution devices and error status data registers are allocated in the order of request numbers. When deleting a request or changing theorder of requests, the relationship of the request to the request execution devices and error status data register is changed. If the internal relay
or data register is used in the user program, the device addresses must be changed accordingly. After completing the changes, download the user
program again.

6. When editing of the Master Request Table is complete, click the OK button to save changes.
7. Download the user program to the SmartAXIS.

Now, programming for the Modbus master is complete. Details about parameters and valid values are as follows.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-5

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Function Code
The Modbus RTU of the SmartAXIS supports eight function codes as listed in the table below. Supported function codes and valid
slave addresses vary with each Modbus slave device to communicate with. Configure the function codes according to thespecifications of the Modbus slave devices.
Function Code

Data Size

Slave Address

SmartAXIS as Modbus Slave

01 Read Coil Status

1 to 128 bits

000001 - 065535

Reads bit device statuses of Q (output), R (shift register),or M (internal relay).

02 Read Input Status

1 to 128 bits

100001 - 165535

Reads bit device statuses of I (input), T (timer contact), orC (counter contact).

03 Read Holding Registers

1 to 64 words

400001 - 465535

Reads word device data of D (data register), T (timer
preset value), or C (counter preset value).

04 Read Input Registers

1 to 64 words

300001 - 365535

Reads word device data of T (timer current value) or C
(counter current value).

05 Force Single Coil

1 bit

000001 - 065535

Changes a bit device status of Q (output), R (shift
register), or M (internal relay).

06 Preset Single Register

1 word400001 - 465535

Changes word device data of D (data register).

15 Force Multiple Coils

1 to 128 bits

000001 - 065535

Changes multiple bit device statuses of Q (output), R(shift register), or M (internal relay).

16 Preset Multiple Registers

1 to 64 words

400001 - 465535

Changes multiple word device data of D (data register).

Master Device Address
When function code 01, 02, 03, or 04 is selected to read data from Modbus slaves, designate the first data register or internal relay
number to store the data received from the Modbus slave. When function code 05, 06, 15, or 16 is selected to write data to
Modbus slaves, designate the first data register or internal relay number to store the data to write to the Modbus slave. Dataregisters and internal relays can be designated as the master device address.
Data Size and Word/Bit
Designate the quantity of data to read or write. The valid data size depends on the function code. When function code 01, 02, 05,
or 15 is selected, designate the data size in bits. When function code 03, 04, 06, or 16 is selected, designate the data size inwords. For valid data sizes, see the table above.
Slave No.
Designate slave numbers 0 through 247. The same slave number can be designated repeatedly for different request numbers
which can be 1 through 255. In the Modbus communication, slave number 0 is used for a broadcast slave number. The broadcast
can be used to write the same data to all Modbus slaves.
Slave Address
Designate data memory addresses of Modbus slaves. The valid slave address range depends on the function code. For valid slave
addresses, see the table above. The allocations of memory addresses vary with each Modbus slave device. Refer to manuals foreach Modbus slave device.
Request Execution Device
To use request execution devices, click the radio button for “Use” and designate the first internal relay in the Modbus RTU Master
Request Table. Devices used for executing requests are automatically listed in the table. To execute a request, turn on thecorresponding request execution device.
Data registers can also be designated as the Request Execution Device. When the first data register is designated as the Request
Execution Device, data register bits as many as the number of requests are allocated from the least significant bit of the first dataregister. Data register bits assigned as the execution relays are automatically listed in the Request Table.
When request execution devices are not designated, all requests programmed in the Request Table are executed continuously.
Error Status Data Register
To use error status data registers, click the radio button for “Use” and designate the first data register in the Modbus RTU Master
Request Table. Data registers used for storing error statuses are automatically listed in the table. When Use a single DR for allcommunication requests is selected, the first data register is shared by all requests.

11-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Processing Requests
The data for Modbus communication are processed between the master and slaves as shown below.
Bit Data at Slaves (Function Codes 01, 02, 05, and 15)
 Master Device Address: Internal Relay

Internal Relay (M)Modbus Address

Bit +0Bit +0Bit +1

Bit +1

Bit +2

Bit +2MasterSlave

 Master Device Address: Data Register

Data Register (D)Modbus Address

Word +0 b15

b14

...

b2

b1

b0

Bit +0Word +1 b15

b14

...

b2

b1

b0

Bit +1

b14

...

b2

b1

b0

Bit +2

Word +2 b15

Slave

MasterWord Data at Slaves (Function Codes 03, 04, 06, and 16)
 Master Device Address: Internal Relay

Internal Relay (M)Modbus Address

Bit +0 +15 +14

...

+2

+1

+0

Word +0

Bit +16 +31 +30

...

+18

+17

+16

Word +1

Bit +32 +47 +46

...

+34

+33

+32

Word +2
Slave

Master Master Device Address: Data Registerr

Data Register (D)Modbus Address

Word +0 b15

b14

...

b2

b1

b0

Word +0

Word +1 b15

b14

...

b2

b1

b0

Word +1

b14

...

b2

b1

b0

Word +2

Word +2 b15

Slave

MasterS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-7

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Modbus Slave Communication
Modbus slave communication can be configured by selecting Modbus RTU Slave for port 2 and port 3 in the WindLDR Function
Area Settings. When a Modbus slave receives a request from the Modbus master, the Modbus slave reads or writes data according
to the request. The request is processed at the END processing of the user program.
Modbus slaves do not reply to the Modbus master for the broadcast requests.

Modbus Slave Communication Specifications
Item

Description

Baud Rate (bps)

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

Data Bits

8 bits (fixed)

Stop bits

1, 2 bits

ParityOdd, even, none

Slave Number

Constant

1 to 247

Data register

The value in D8027 (port 2) or D8028 (port 3) is used

Timeout between Characters *1

1.5 characters minimum *2

Timeout between Frames *1

3.5 characters minimum *3*1: When timeout occurs, the SmartAXIS discards the received data and waits for the first frame of the next valid communication.
*2: For communication at 19200bps or higher, the timeout between characters needs to be a minimum of 0.75ms.
*3: For communication at 19200bps or higher, the timeout between frames needs to be a minimum of 1.75ms.

11-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Address Map
Modbus Device Name
Coil
(000000 and above)

Input Relay(100000 and above)
Input Register(300000 and above)
Holding Register(400000 and above)

Modbus Address
Map (Decimal) *1

Communication
Frame Address *2

SmartAXIS Device *3000001 - 000112

0000 - 006F

Q0 - Q141

000701 - 000828

02BC - 033B

R0 - R127

001001 - 002024

03E8 - 07E7

M0 - M1277

Applicable
Function Code1, 5, 15009001 - 009144

2328 - 23B7

M8000 - M8177

100001 - 100126

0000 - 007D

I0 - I155

101001 - 101200

03E8 - 04AF

T0 - T199 (timer contact)

101501 - 101700

05DC - 06A3

C0 - C199 (counter contact)2

300001 - 300200

0000 - 00C7

T0 - T199 (timer current value)

300501 - 300700

01F4 - 02BB

C0 - C199 (counter current value)

400001 - 402000

0000 - 07CF

D0 - D1999

408001 - 408200

1F40 - 2007

D8000 - D8199

43, 6, 16409001 - 409200

2328 - 23EF

T0 - T199 (timer preset value)

409501 - 409700

251C - 25E3

C0 - C199 (counter preset value)

3*1: Addresses generally used for Modbus communication. Calculation method of Modbus addresses for SmartAXIS devices are described below.
*2: These 4-digit addresses are used in the communication frame. To calculate the address used in communication frame, extract lower 5 digits of
the Modbus address, subtract 1 from the value, and convert the result into hexadecimal.
*3: Access within the device range for the SmartAXIS type used.

Calculating Modbus Addresses for SmartAXIS Devices
SmartAXIS Device

Calculating Modbus Address

M XXX X((1) – (4))  8 + (2) + (5)(2): Octal

I, Q, M(1): Decimal

Minimum
address

D XXXXX
R, T, C, D(3): Decimal

Minimum
address

SmartAXIS Device

OffsetMinimum Address (4)Input Register

Holding Register

Offset (5)Q0 - Q141

01

R0 - R127

0701

M0 - M1277

0

1001

8000

9001

I0 - I155

0100001

T0 - T199 (timer contact)

0101001

C0 - C199 (counter contact)

0101501

T0 - T199 (timer current value)0300001

M8000 - M8177
Input Relay

Example: M325
(32 – 0)  8 + 5 + 1001 = 1262
Modbus address: 1262
1262 – 1 = 1261 = 04ED
Communication frame address: 04ED
Example: D756
(756 – 0) + 400001 = 400757
Modbus address: 400757
Extract lower 5 digits  757
757 – 1 = 756 = 02F4
Communication frame address: 02F4((3) – (4)) + (5)Modbus Device Name
Coil

OffsetCalculation Example

C0 - C199 (counter current value)0300501

D0 - D1999

0400001

D8000 - D8199

8000

408001

T0 - T199 (timer preset value)0409001

C0 - C199 (counter preset value)0409501S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-9

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Programming Modbus Slave Using WindLDR
Modbus slave communication is programmed for Modbus RTU mode using WindLDR. Since these settings relate to the user
program, the user program must be downloaded to the SmartAXIS after changing any of these settings.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Communication Ports.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Communication Ports appears.

2. In the Communication Mode pull-down list for Port 2, select Modbus RTU Slave.

3. Click the Configure button. The Communication Parameters dialog box appears. Change settings, if required.

Modbus RTU Slave

Baud Rate
(bps)

9600
19200
38400
57600
115200

Data Bits

8

ParityEven, Odd, None

Stop Bits

1 or 2

Slave Number

Constant

1 to 247

Data register

The value in D8027 (port 2) or D8028 (port 3) isused

4. Click the OK button to save changes.
5. Download the user program to the SmartAXIS.

Now, programming for the Modbus slave is complete. Details about parameters and valid values are as follows.

11-10

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Communication Protocol
This section describes the communication frame format used for Modbus RTU communication.
Communication Frame Format
Request from Modbus MasterIdle
3.5 characters

Slave No.

Function Code

Data

CRC

1 byte1 byteSlave No.

Function Code1 byte1 byteSlave No.

Function Code +80H

Error CodeCRC

1 byte1 byte1 byte2 bytes

2 bytesIdle
3.5 characters

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

Idle
3.5 characters

Data

CRC
2 bytesIdle
3.5 characters

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

Idle
3.5 characters

Idle
3.5 characters

Note: Note: Idle means no data flowing on the communication line.

Communication Frame Format
RTU mode requires a minimum of 3.5-character-long idle time between frames to determine the beginning of a frame. The
SmartAXIS Modbus master sends requests at idle intervals of 5ms, which can be changed in the Function Area Settings dialog box.
Slave No.
The SmartAXIS can be assigned slave numbers 1 through 247. In the 1:1 communication using RS232C, the same slave number
must be set in the master and the SmartAXIS.
Slave No. 0 is reserved for broadcast slave number and is used to write the same data to all Modbus slaves. In this case, theModbus slaves do not send a reply to the master.
Modbus Communication NG Reply Error CodeOne of the following error codes is stored in NAK reply.
01h: Function code error (unsupported function code)
02h: Access destination error (address out of range, address+device quantity out of range)
03h: Device quantity error, 1-bit write data error
CRC
RTU mode uses CRC check codes.
 Modbus RTU Mode — Calculating the CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy checksum)

Calculate the BCC using CRC-16 for the range from the slave number to the byte immediately before the BCC. The generation
polynomial is: X16 + X15 + X2 + 1.
1. Take the exclusive OR (XOR) of FFFFh and the first 1-byte data at the slave number.
2. Shift the result by 1 bit to the right. When a carry occurs, take the exclusive OR (XOR) of A001h, then go to step 3.

If not, directly go to step 3.

3. Repeat step 2, shifting 8 times.
4. Take the exclusive OR (XOR) of the result and the next 1-byte data.
5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 up to the byte immediately before the BCC.
6. Swap the higher and lower bytes of the result of step 5, and store the resultant CRC-16 to the BCC (CRC) position. (Example:

1234h  34h, 12h)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-11

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Communication Format
This section describes the communication format for each function code from the slave number up to immediately before thecheck code.

Function Code 01 (Read Coil Status) and Function Code 02 (Read Input Status)
Function code 01 reads bit device statuses of Q (output), R (shift register), or M (internal relay). One through 128 consecutive bits
can be read out.
Function code 02 reads bit device statuses of I (input), T (timer contact), or C (counter contact). One through 128 consecutive bits
can be read out.
Communication Frame
Request from Modbus MasterSlave No.

Function Code

Address

No. of Bitsxxh

01h / 02h

xxxxh

xxxxh

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function CodeQuantity of DataFirst 8 Bits

Second 8 Bits

Last 8 Bitsxxh

01h / 02h

xxh

xxh

xxh

xxh

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function CodeError Codexxh

81h / 82hxxhCommunication Example
Read 15 bits starting at output Q10.
PurposeQ10  (1 – 0)  8 + 0 + 1 = 9
Modbus address: 9
9 – 1 = 8 = 8h
Communication frame address: 0008h

Condition

Slave No. 8
Q10 through Q27 binary data: 1234h

 RTU Mode

11-12

Request from Modbus Master08 01 0008 0010 (CRC)

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 01 02 34 12 (CRC)

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 81 xx (CRC)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Function Code 03 (Read Holding Registers) and Function Code 04 (Read Input Registers)
Function code 03 reads word device data of D (data register), T (timer preset value), or C (counter preset value). One through 64
consecutive words can be read out.
Function code 04 reads word device data of T (timer current value) or C (counter current value). One through 64 consecutive
words can be read out.
Communication Frame
Request from Modbus MasterSlave No.

Function Code

Address

No. of Words

xxh

03h / 04h

xxxxh

xxxxh

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function CodeQuantity of DataFirst High Byte

First Low Byte

Last Low Bytexxh

03h / 04h

xxh

xxh

xxh

xxh

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function CodeError Codexxh

83h / 84h

xxhCommunication Example
Read 2 words starting at data register D1710.

PurposeCondition

D1710  (1710 – 0) + 400001 = 401711
Modbus address: 401711
Extract lower 5 digits  1711
1711 – 1 = 1710 = 6AEhCommunication frame address: 06AEh
Slave No. 8
D1710 data: 1234h
D1711 data: 5678h

 RTU Mode

Request from Modbus Master08 03 06AE 0002 (CRC)

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 03 04 12 34 56 78 (CRC)

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 83 xx (CRC)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-13

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Function Code 05 (Force Single Coil)
Function code 05 changes a bit device status of Q (output), R (shift register), or M (internal relay).
Communication Frame
Request from Modbus MasterSlave No.

Function Code

Address

OFF: 0000h
ON: FF00h

xxh

05h

xxxxh

xxxxh

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function Code

Address

OFF: 0000h
ON: FF00h

xxh

05h

xxxxh

xxxxh

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function CodeError Code

xxh

85h

xxh

Communication Example
Force internal relay M1320 on.
PurposeM1320  (132 – 0)  8 + 0 + 1001 = 2057
Modbus address: 2057
2057 – 1 = 2056 = 808h
Communication frame address: 0808h

Condition

Slave No. 8

 RTU Mode

11-14

Request from Modbus Master08 05 0808 FF00 (CRC)

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 05 0808 FF00 (CRC)

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 85 xx (CRC)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Function Code 06 (Preset Single Register)
Function code 06 changes word device data of D (data register).
Communication Frame
Request from Modbus MasterSlave No.

Function Code

Address

New Data

xxh

06h

xxxxh

xxxxh

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function Code

Address

Acknowledge
Data

xxh

06h

xxxxh

xxxxh

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function CodeError Code

xxh

86h

xxh

Communication Example
Write 8000 to data register D1708.

PurposeCondition

D1708  (1708 – 0) + 400001 = 401709
Modbus address: 401709
Extract lower 5 digits  1709
1709 – 1 = 1708 = 6AChCommunication frame address: 06ACh
Slave No. 8

 RTU Mode

Request from Modbus Master08 06 06AC 1F40 (CRC)

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 06 06AC 1F40 (CRC)

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 86 xx (CRC)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-15

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Function Code 15 (Force Multiple Coils)
Function code 15 changes bit device statuses of Q (output), R (shift register), or M (internal relay). One through 128 consecutive
bits can be changed.
Communication Frame
Request from Modbus MasterSlave No.

Function
Code

Address

No. of Bits

Quantity of
Data

First
8 BitsSecond8 BitsLast
8 Bits

xxh

0Fh

xxxxh

xxxxh

xxh

xxh

xxh

xxh

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function Code

Address

No. of Bits

xxh

0Fh

xxxxh

xxxxh

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function CodeError Code

xxh

8Fh

xxh

Communication Example
Write the following bit statuses to internal relays M605 through M624.

Purpose

M610
(ON)

M611
(OFF)

M612
(ON)

M613
(ON)

M614
(OFF)

M620
(OFF)

M621
(OFF)

M622
(OFF)

M623
(OFF)

M624
(OFF)

M605 (LSB) through M614 (MSB) binary data: 6B
M615 (LSB) through M624 (MSB) binary data: 02
M605  (60 – 0)  8 + 5 + 1001 = 1486
Modbus address: 1486
1486 – 1 = 1485 = 5CDh
Communication frame address: 05CDh
Condition

Slave No. 8

 RTU Mode

11-16

Request from Modbus Master08 0F 05CD 0010 02 6B 02 (CRC)

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 0F 05CD 0010 (CRC)

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 8F xx (CRC)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

M605
(ON)

M606
(0N)

M607

M615
(OFF)

M616
(0N)

M617

(OFF)
(OFF)

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Function Code 16 (Preset Multiple Registers)
Function code 16 changes word device data of D (data register). One through 64 consecutive words can be changed.
Communication Frame
Request from Modbus MasterSlave No.

Function
Code

Address

No. ofWords

Quantity of
DataFirst High
Byte

First Low
Byte

Last Low
Byte

xxh

10h

xxxxh

xxxxh

xxh

xxh

xxh

xxh

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function Code

Address

No. of Words

xxh

10h

xxxxh

xxxxh

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

Slave No.

Function CodeError Code

xxh

90h

xxh

Communication Example
Write the following data to four data registers D1708 through D1711.
D1708(1234h)PurposeD1709(5678h)D1710(ABCDh)

D1711(EF01h)D1708  (1708 – 0) + 400001 = 401709
Modbus address: 401709
Extract lower 5 digits  1709
1709 – 1 = 1708 = 6AChCommunication frame address: 06ACh

Condition

Slave No. 8

 RTU Mode

Request from Modbus Master08 10 06AC 0004 08 12 34 56 78 AB CD EF 01 (CRC)

ACK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 10 06AC 0004 (CRC)

NAK Reply from Modbus Slave

08 90 xx (CRC)S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-17

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Modbus Communication via Ethernet Communication
Applicable SmartAXIS
FT1A-12FT1A-24

FT1A-40

FT1A-48

—

X

X

X

The SmartAXIS supports Modbus TCP clients and Modbus TCP servers. Connect the Ethernet port on the SmartAXIS to enable theSmartAXIS to communicate with Modbus TCP compliant devices.
When configured as a Modbus TCP client, the SmartAXIS can monitor and change the data memory of the network devices
supporting Modbus TCP server. A maximum of three connections can be allocated to Modbus TCP clients. Each connection cancommunicate with one Modbus TCP server device.
When the SmartAXIS is configured as a Modbus TCP server, the device data of the SmartAXIS can be monitored and changed from
Modbus TCP client devices. The SmartAXIS can allocate a maximum of three connections for Modbus TCP servers.
For the Modbus TCP client function and how to configure it, see "Modbus TCP Client" on page 11-19. For the Modbus TCP server
function and how to configure it, see "Modbus TCP Server" on page 11-24.

Ethernet
Ethernet hub

Modbus TCP Client

11-18

Ethernet hub

Modbus TCP Server 1

Modbus TCP Server 2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Modbus TCP Server 3

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Modbus TCP Client
When configured as a Modbus TCP client, the SmartAXIS sends communication requests to a Modbus TCP server to read/write
data. Each communication request is sent to a Modbus Server according to the configured request table.
Modbus TCP client communication settings and request tables for Modbus TCP servers can be configured using the WindLDR
Function Area Settings. The SmartAXIS communicate with the Modbus TCP servers according to those settings.
Communication with Modbus TCP servers are performed in sync with the user program execution, and the communication data isprocessed at the END, in the order of request numbers specified in the request table.

Modbus TCP Client Specifications
Parameter

Modbus TCP Client

Slave Number

1 to 247

Maximum Number of Servers

3 (one server per one connection)

Receive Timeout *1

100 to 25,500ms (in increments of 100ms)*1: Specifies the period of time before receiving a response frame from a server.

Modbus TCP Client Start and Stop
When request execution devices are designated in the Modbus TCP Client request table, internal relays or data register bits (asmany as the request quantity) are allocated to execute Modbus TCP Client communication. The internal relays or data register bits
are allocated in the order of requests. For example, when internal relay M0 is designated as the request execution device, M0 is
allocated to request No. 1, M1 to request No. 2, and so on. To execute a request, turn on the corresponding request execution
device.
When communication is completed, the request execution device turns off automatically. When it is required to send requests
continuously, keep the corresponding request execution device on using a SET or OUT instruction.
When request execution devices are not designated, all requests programmed in the request table are executed continuously.
Communication Completion and Communication Error
Modbus communication finishes when a read or write process is completed successfully or when a communication error occurs.
A communication error occurs when communication failure has repeated three times. When a communication error occurs, therequest is canceled and the next request is processed. When the error status data register is designated, the communication statusof each request can be confirmed.
Communication Error Data
When Error Status is configured in the Request Table from the Function Area Settings, the error data of each request can be
confirmed.
Use a single DR for allcommunication requests

Error data of each communication request

Unchecked

Error data, the remote host number (high-order byte) and error code (low-order byte), of each request in theentire request table can be confirmed. Data registers as many as the quantity of requests are reserved forstoring error data. When an error occurs for a request, error data is stored to the corresponding data register.

CheckedA single data register is shared by all requests. When an error occurs for a request, error data is stored to thedata register and the old error data is overwritten.

Bit Allocation
Remote Host Number(high-order byte)

1 to 255

Error Code(low-order byte)

00h: Normal completion
01h: Function code error (unsupported function code)
02h: Access destination error (address out of range, address+device quantity out of range)
03h: Device quantity error, 1-bit write data error (specified device quantity of 1-bit write is unsupported)
12h: Frame length error (frame length of transmitted request exceeds range)
13h: BCC error (BCC does not match)
14h: Slave number error (received slave number is invalid)
16h: Timeout error (timeout occurs)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-19

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Modbus TCP Communication Request Table
A maximum of 255 requests can be configured in the Modbus TCP Client Request Table.
Notes:
 10 bytes of the user program area are needed per each request.
 Request execution devices and error status data registers are allocated in the order of request numbers. When deleting a request or changing

the order of requests, the relationship of the request to the request execution devices and error status data register is changed. If theallocated internal relays or data registers are used in the user program, those device addresses must be updated accordingly.

11-20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Programming WindLDR (Modbus TCP Client)
In order to use the Modbus TCP client, configure the Modbus TCP client in the Function Area Settings dialog box and thendownload the user program to the SmartAXIS.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Connection Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box appears.

2. Select Modbus TCP Client as the communication mode for the connection 1.

The Modbus TCP Client Request Table dialog box appears.

3. Click on the Communication Settings button.

The Communication Settings dialog box appears. Configure the timeout and click OK button to close the Communication
Settings dialog box.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-21

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
4. Configure the requests of the Modbus TCP Client.

A maximum of 255 requests can be entered in one request table. Specify the Modbus TCP servers with the remote host numbers.
After all requests are configured, click OK button to close the dialog box.
Choose to use Request Execution Devices and Error Status data registers if necessary. When using Request Execution Devices andError Status data registers, enter the first number of the devices.

5. Download the user program to the SmartAXIS.

Programming for the Modbus TCP client is complete. Details about parameters and valid values are as follows.

Function Code
The Modbus TCP of the SmartAXIS supports eight function codes as listed in the table below. Supported function codes and valid
slave addresses vary with each Modbus server device to communicate with. Configure the function codes according to thespecifications of the Modbus server devices.

Function Code

Data Size

Slave Address

SmartAXIS as Modbus Slave

01 Read Coil Status

1 to 128 bits

000001 - 065535

Reads bit device statuses of Q (output), R (shift register), orM (internal relay).

02 Read Input Status

1 to 128 bits

100001 - 165535

Reads bit device statuses of I (input), T (timer contact), or C
(counter contact).

03 Read Holding Registers

1 to 64 words

400001 - 465535

Reads word device data of D (data register), T (timer preset
value), or C (counter preset value).

04 Read Input Registers

1 to 64 words

300001 - 365535

Reads word device data of T (timer current value) or C
(counter current value).

05 Force Single Coil

1 bit

000001 - 065535

Changes a bit device status of Q (output), R (shift register),or M (internal relay).

06 Preset Single Register

1 word400001 - 465535

Changes word device data of D (data register).

15 Force Multiple Coils

1 to 128 bits

000001 - 065535

Changes multiple bit device statuses of Q (output), R (shift
register), or M (internal relay).

16 Preset Multiple
Registers

1 to 64 words

400001 - 465535

Changes multiple word device data of D (data register).

11-22

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Master Device Address
When function code 01, 02, 03, or 04 is selected to read data from Modbus servers, designate the first data register or internal
relay number to store the data received from the Modbus server. When function code 05, 06, 15, or 16 is selected to write data to
Modbus servers, designate the first data register or internal relay number to store the data to write to the Modbus server. Dataregisters and internal relays can be designated as the master device address.
Data Size and Word/Bit
Designate the quantity of data to read or write. The valid data size depends on the function code. When function code 01, 02, 05,
or 15 is selected, designate the data size in bits. When function code 03, 04, 06, or 16 is selected, designate the data size inwords. For valid data sizes, see “Function Code” on page 11-22.
Remote Host No.
Designate the remote host number configured in the Remote Host List dialog box. In the Remote Host List dialog box, IP address
and port number are configured for each remote host. The default port number of Modbus TCP communication is 502. If the
Modbus TCP server uses a different port number, configure that port number in the Remote Host List dialog box.
Slave No.
Designate slave numbers 1 through 247. The same slave number can be designated repeatedly for different request numbers
which can be 1 through 255. The slave number is usually not referred by Modbus TCP server. Configure the slave number if
Modbus TCP server requires.
Slave Address
Designate data memory addresses of Modbus servers. The valid slave address range depends on the function code. For valid slave
addresses, see the table above. The allocations of memory addresses vary with each Modbus server device. Refer to manuals foreach Modbus server device.
Request Execution Device
To use request execution devices, click the radio button for “Use” and designate the first internal relay or data register in the
Modbus TCP Client Request Table. Internal relays or data register bits used for executing requests are automatically listed in thetable. To execute a request, turn on the corresponding request execution device.
When request execution devices are not designated, all requests programmed in the Request Table are executed continuously.
Error Status Data Register
To use error status data registers, click the radio button for “Use” and designate the first data register in the Modbus TCP Client
Request Table. Data registers used for storing error statuses are automatically listed in the table. When Use a single DR for allcommunication requests is selected, the first data register is shared by all requests.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-23

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Modbus TCP Server
When the SmartAXIS is configured as the Modbus TCP server, Modbus TCP client devices can read/write data to the SmartAXIS.
When the SmartAXIS receives a valid request from a Modbus TCP client device, the data is read or written according to the request
received. The communication data received from Modbus TCP clients is processed at the END processing of the user program.

Modbus TCP Server Specifications
Parameter

Modbus TCP Server

Slave Number

IgnoredResponse Time

1.5 msNumber of Clients that can Access Simultaneously

3 (1 client per 1 connection)

Port Number

502 (can be changed between 0 and 65535)

Supported Function Code

01 Read Coil Status
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
06 Preset Single Register
15 Force Multiple oils
16 Preset Multiple Registers

Address Map

Modbus TCP client can access the Modbus devices (Coil, Input Relay, Input Register, and Holding Register) of Modbus server toread or write the device data (I, Q, M, R, T, C, and D) of SmartAXIS. Refer to the following table to configure the Modbus TCP
clients.
Modbus Device Name
Coil
(000000 and above)

Input Relay(100000 and above)
Input Register(300000 and above)
Holding Register(400000 and above)

Modbus Address
Map (Decimal)

Communication
Frame Address *1

SmartAXIS Device *2000001 - 000112

0000 - 006F

Q0 - Q141

000701 - 000828

02BC - 033B

R0 - R127

001001 - 002024

03E8 - 07E7

M0 - M1277

009001 - 009144

2328 - 23B7

M8000 - M8177

100001 - 100126

0000 - 007D

I0 - I155

101001 - 101200

03E8 - 04AF

T0 - T199 (timer contact)

101501 - 101700

05DC - 06A3

C0 - C199 (counter contact)

300001 - 300200

0000 - 00C7

T0 - T199 (timer current value)

300501 - 300700

01F4 - 02BB

C0 - C199 (counter current value)

400001 - 402000

0000 - 07CF

D0 - D1999

408001 - 408200

1F40 - 2007

D8000 - D8199

409001 - 409200

2328 - 23EF

T0 - T199 (timer preset value)

409501 - 409700

251C - 25E3

C0 - C199 (counter preset value)

Applicable
Function Code1, 5, 152

4
3, 6, 16
3

*1: These 4-digit addresses are used in the communication frame. To calculate the address used in communication frame, extract lower 5 digits of
the Modbus address, subtract 1 from the value, and convert the result into hexadecimal. For details, see “Modbus Slave Communication” onpage 11-8.
*2: Access within the device range for the SmartAXIS type used.

11-24

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Programming WindLDR (Modbus TCP Server)
In order to use Modbus TCP server, configure the Modbus TCP server in the Function Area Settings dialog box and then download
the user program to the SmartAXIS.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Connection Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box appears.

2. Select Modbus TCP Server as the communication mode for connection 1.

The Modbus TCP Server dialog box appears.
3. Configure the parameters and click on OK button.

Note: For details about each parameter, see the following page.

4. Download the user program to the SmartAXIS.

Programming for the Modbus TCP server is complete.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

11-25

11: M ODBUS C OM M UN I CATI ON
Modbus TCP Server Communication Settings
Local Host Port No.

Configure the local host port number between 0 and 65,535. The same local host port number can be used with multiple
connection numbers.
If the same port number is used with multiple connections, Modbus TCP clients (as many as the number of the connections) can
communicate with SmartAXIS through the same port number.
Allow Access by IP Address

You can set the IP address for a device to permit access. By setting the allowed IP address, only the device with the specified IP
address can establish a connection with the SmartAXIS and communicate with the Modbus TCP server. When the same local hostport number is configured in multiple connections, all the allowed IP address settings are effective. If a connection in which theallowed IP address it not configured uses the same local host port number, arbitrary access is allowed through the port.
Example 1: If two connections use the same local port number and an allowed IP address is not configured for both connections,access from a total of two clients with any IP addresses is accepted.
Example 2: If two connections use the same local port number and 192.168.1.101 and 192.168.1.102 are configured as theallowed IP addresses, access from a total of two clients whose IP addresses are 192.168.1.101 and 192.168.1.102 is accepted.
Example 3: If connection 1 and 2 use the same local port number, an allowed IP address 192.168.1.101 is configured forconnection 1, and the allowed IP address is not configured for connections, access from a total of two clients with any IP
addresses is accepted.

Modbus TCP Communication Format
This section describes the communication format used for Modbus TCP client and server communication. Modbus TCP
communication format starts with the Modbus TCP header followed by the RTU mode communication format without the idle 3.5
characters at both ends and CRC as shown below.
Modbus TCP Communication Format
Transaction ID
2 bytesProtocol ID

Message Length(bytes)Unit ID

Function
Code

Data

2 bytes

2 bytes

1 byte1 byteN bytesIdle
3.5 characters

Slave No.

Function
Code

Data

CRC

1 byte1 byteN bytes

2 bytes

Modbus TCP Header

RTU Mode
Communication Format

Idle
3.5 characters

Transaction ID
The Modbus TCP server (slave) returns the request ID sent from the client (master) without any change. When receiving thereturned request ID, the client can confirm to which request the response was returned. When confirmation is not required,designate 0 as a transaction ID.
Protocol ID
Designate 0 to identify Modbus TCP protocol.
Message Length
Designate the length of the following message in bytes.
Unit ID
The ID for identifying the device. Store the slave number of the Modbus TCP server. The SmartAXIS Modbus TCP server accepts
and processes requests when the unit ID of the received request is not 0. When the unit ID is 0, the received request is processedas broadcast communication and no response is returned to the Modbus TCP client.
Function Code
Designate a function code, such as 01 (read coil status) and 02 (read input status).
Data
Designate required data for each function.

11-26

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12: R EM OTE I / O
I ntroduction
When you want to increase the number of I/Os to be connected to a single SmartAXIS, you can achieve this using the remote I/Ofunction.
In addition to the built-in I/Os of the SmartAXIS, you can expand the number of I/Os up to a maximum of 90 inputs and 54
outputs.
The remote I/O function can only be used on the SmartAXIS equipped with an Ethernet port.
Configure the SmartAXIS to which inputs and outputs need to be expanded as the remote I/O master, and configure theSmartAXIS to be the remote inputs and outputs as the remote I/O slaves.
The remote I/O master is configured on connections 1 through 3 in the Function Area Settings dialog box. The remote I/O slave isconfigured in the Remote I/O Slave Configuration dialog box.
The SmartAXIS configured as a remote I/O master can connect to one remote I/O slave per one connection. When theconnections 1 through 3 are all used for remote I/O, the remote I/O master can connect to a maximum of three remote I/O slaves.
Remote I/O master

Connection 1

Connection 3
Ethernet
Connection 2

Remote I/O slave

Remote I/O slave

Remote I/O slave

Notes:
 If a communication timeout occurs at a remote I/O slave, all outputs of the remote I/O slave are turned off.

Depending on the details of the control on the remote I/O slave side, this may lead to a hazardous situation, so set the master receive
timeout to an ample length. If the master receive timeout setting is made long, the time that the remote I/O slave outputs remain on also
becomes long when communication is actually lost. Set the master receive timeout to a value suited to each application.
 The SmartAXIS configured as remote I/O master/slave communicates over Ethernet. When other SmartAXIS or other network devices areconnected on the same LAN, the I/O refresh timing for the remote I/O slaves is affected by those devices.

Applicable SmartAXIS
FT1A-12FT1A-24

FT1A-40

FT1A-48

—

X

X

X

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12-1

12: R EM OTE I / O
Remote I/O Master
The SmartAXIS can be used as a remote I/O master by configuring the SmartAXIS as a remote I/O master in WindLDR. The
settings can be configured in the Function Area Settings dialog box of WindLDR.
The digital input information from the remote I/O slaves connected with connection 1 through 3 is input to I40 to I75, I80 to I115,
and I120 to I155. The analog input information from the remote I/O slaves is stored to D8149 to D8156, D8158 to D8165, andD8167 to D8174.
The output information for Q40 to Q61, Q80 to Q101, and Q120 to Q141 on the remote I/O master is output from the remote I/Oslaves connected with connection 1 through 3. For details on data communication between the remote I/O master and the remote
I/O slaves, see "Remote I/O Communication Memory Refresh Image" on page 12-3.
Specifications
Item

Connection 1

I40 to I75

Digital outputs

Q40 to Q61

Analog inputs

D8149 (=AI10) to D8156 (=AI17)

Remote I/O slave 1 communication error status

D8148

Remote I/O slave 1 communication error

M8005

Remote hostConnection 212-2000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Port number

0 to 65535
100 ms to 25,500 ms (100 ms increments)

Digital inputs

I80 to I115

Digital outputs

Q80 to Q101

Analog inputs

D8158 (=AI20) to D8165 (=AI27)

Remote I/O slave 2 communication error status

D8157

Remote I/O slave 2 communication error

M8006

IP address

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Port number

0 to 65535

Timeout

100 ms to 25,500 ms (100 ms increments)

Digital inputs

I120 to I155

Digital outputs

Q120 to Q141

Analog inputs

D8167 (=AI30) to D8174 (=AI37)

Remote I/O slave 3 communication error status

D8166

Remote I/O slave 3 communication error

M8007

Remote hostRefresh period

IP address

Timeout

Remote hostConnection 3

Description

Digital inputs

IP address

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Port number

0 to 65535

Timeout

100 ms to 25,500 ms (100 ms increments)

Communication processing

Scan asynchronous

Data update

Each scan end

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12: R EM OTE I / O
Remote I/O Communication Memory Refresh Image
Data communication between the remote I/O master and the remote I/O slaves is conducted as shown in the diagram below.
Remote I/O
master
I0 to I35
Q0 to Q21
Analog inputs
D8040 to D8047
Connection 1

Remote I/Oslave 1

I40 to I75

I0 to I35

Q40 to Q61

Q0 to Q21

Analog inputs

Analog inputs

D8149 to D8156

D8040 to D8047
Remote I/O

Connection 2

Slave 2

I80 to I115
Q80 to Q101
Analog inputs

I0 to I35
Q0 to Q21
Analog inputs

D8158 to D8165

D8040 to D8047
Remote I/O

Connection 3

Slave 3

I120 to I155

I0 to I35

Q120 to Q141

Q0 to Q21

Analog inputs

Analog inputs

D8167 to D8174

D8040 to D8047

Connection Status with Remote I/O Slaves
The connections status of each remote I/O slave can be confirmed by referring to the special internal relays and special dataregisters of the SmartAXIS configured as the remote I/O master.
Item
Connection status

IP address of the connectedslavePort number of the connectedslave

Connection port

DeviceConnection 1

M8110

Connection 2

M8111

Connection 3

M8112

Connection 1

D8110 to D8113

Connection 2

D8114 to D8117

Connection 3

D8118 to D8121

Connection 1

D8130

Connection 2

D8131

Connection 3

D8132

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Description
Indicates the connection status with thecorresponding slave.
OFF: Not connected, ON: Connected
Stores the IP address of the slave.

Stores the connected port number of the slave.

12-3

12: R EM OTE I / O
Communication Error Information with the Remote I/O Slaves
Communication errors with the remote I/O slaves can be confirmed by referring to M8005 to M8007 (remote I/O slavecommunication error). The details of the communication error can be confirmed by referring to D8148, D8157, and D8166 (remote
I/O slave communication error status).
Item

DeviceRemote I/O slave 1 communication error

M8005

Remote I/O slave 2 communication error

M8006

Remote I/O slave 3 communication error

M8007

Remote I/O slave 1 communication error status

D8148

Remote I/O slave 2 communication error status

D8157

Remote I/O slave 3 communication error status

D8166

Description
ON: Communication error occurs (ON while the error is occurring)
OFF: Communicating normally
0: Normal
1: Communication timeout error
2: Connection disconnected
10: Slave output error*1*1 The remote I/O master can communicate with the remote I/O slave, but this state indicates a system error has occurred on the remote I/O slave.
Check the status of the remote I/O slave.

Remote I/O Communication Timing Chart
Establish connection
Establish connection wait time
(fixed by system: 1.5 s)

1.

END processing

2.

3.

4.

Remote I/O masterOne scanRemote I/O slave 1
communication error(M8005)

ON

D8148 = 2
D8148 = 0

OFF

Remote I/O slave 1

The remote I/O master issues a communication request to the remote I/O slave in the END processing.
1. The remote I/O master's initial state is that the remote slave communication error (M8005 to M8007) is on and the remoteslave communication error status (D8148, D8157, D8166) is "2" (connection disconnected).
2. The remote I/O master attempts to establish a connection with remote I/O slave 1, but the connection cannot be established.
At the event above, the remote I/O slave 1 communication error (M8005) is kept on, and the remote I/O slave 1 communication
status (D8148) is kept as "2" (connection disconnected).
3. When the connection is successfully established afterward, the remote I/O slave 1 communication error (M8005) turns off, andthe remote I/O slave 1 communication error status (D8148) also becomes "0" (normal).
4. Communication with remote I/O slave 1 is continued.
Communication timeout
Communication
timeout time

One scan1.

END processing

2.

3.

Remote I/O master

Remote I/O slave 2
communication error(M8006)

D8157 = 1ONOFF

D8157 = 0D8157 = 0

Remote I/O slave 2

1. While communicating with the remote I/O slave, the remote slave communication error (M8005 to M8007) is off and the remoteslave communication error status (D8148, D8157, D8166) is "0" (normal).
2. If the response for a request issued to remote I/O slave 2 takes longer than the communication timeout, the remote I/O slave
2 communication error (M8006) turns on and the remote I/O slave 2 communication error status (D8157) becomes "1"(communication timeout error).
3. When a response from remote I/O slave 2 is returned, the remote I/O slave 2 communication error (M8006) turns off, and theremote I/O slave 2 communication error status (D8157) becomes "0" (normal).
12-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12: R EM OTE I / O
Communication with Multiple Remote I/O Slaves
One scan1.

END processing

2.

3.

Remote I/O
masterRemote I/Oslave 1

Remote I/Oslave 2

Remote I/Oslave 3

The above timing chart is an example where the communication with remote I/O slave 1 is the fastest and the communication withremote I/O slave 3 is the slowest.
1. The remote I/O master is able to perform remote I/O communication in END processing and it simultaneously issues requests
to all remote I/O slaves.
2. The time until the response is returned is affected by the state of the network connecting the remote I/O slaves. Therefore,
new requests are only issued for remote I/O slaves that have returned a response.
3. When multiple responses are received in one scan, new requests are issued for all of those simultaneously in END processing.
Note: Remote Communication Speed
The communication speed in remote I/O communication is affected by such factors as the state of the network line and the communication cable.
As a reference for communication speed, when performing remote I/O communication using a 100BASE-T compatible cable and switching hub, it
takes a minimum of approximately 5 ms after the remote I/O master issues a request until the response from the remote I/O slave is reflected as
inputs.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12-5

12: R EM OTE I / O
Programming WindLDR
To use a SmartAXIS as a remote I/O master, in the WindLDR Function Area Settings, configure the Remote I/O Master settings,
and then download the user program to the SmartAXIS.
Configuration Procedure
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Function Area Settings > Connection Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Click Communication Mode for the connection to configure, and then select Remote I/O Master.

The Remote I/O Master dialog box is displayed.

3. Click Remote Host No. and select New Remote Host....

The Remote Host dialog box is displayed.

12-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12: R EM OTE I / O
4. Configure the IP address and port number of the remote I/O slave to connect.

Note: The default port number of the remote I/O slave is 2110.

5. Click OK.

When the settings are correctly completed, the details configured in the Remote Host dialog box are displayed in the Remote
Host No. drop-down list.

6. Configure the receive timeout.

7. Click OK.

Configuring the remote I/O master is completed.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12-7

12: R EM OTE I / O
Remote I/O Slave
The SmartAXIS can be used as a remote I/O slave by configuring the SmartAXIS as a remote I/O slave in WindLDR. The settings
can be configured in the Remote I/O Slave Configuration dialog box of WindLDR.
Specifications
Item

Network settings

Description

Mode

Automatically acquire an IP address/fixed IP address

IP address

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet mask

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Default gateway

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Local Host Port No.

0 to 65535 (default is 2110)

Master communication timeout (Note)

100 ms to 25,500 ms (100 ms increments)

Input settings

Analog input settings
FT1A-24: 4 points
FT1A-40: 6 points
FT1A-48: 8 points

Output settings

None

Number of simultaneously connectable masters

1

Note: When communication is lost with the remote I/O master for the configured timeout or longer, all outputs of the remote I/O slave are turnedoff.

Remote I/O Slave Communication StateThe operating status (running/stopped) of the remote I/O slaves cannot be switched. Remote I/O slaves always perform I/O
refresh. While remote I/O slaves have no communication with the remote I/O master, they are in "Disconnected" state and all their
outputs are off. Once the communication is established with the remote I/O master, they are in "Connected" state and the I/Ostates start to be exchanged between the master and the slaves.
StatusDescription

Connected

The communication between the remote I/O master and slave is established.
The digital inputs and analog inputs of the slave are reflected on the master.
The outputs of the master are reflected to the slave's outputs.

Disconnected

The remote I/O slave is waiting for the communication from the remote I/O master.
The digital inputs and analog inputs of the slave are not reflected on the master.
All outputs of the slave are off.

The communication state with the remote I/O master can be checked with the LED on the SmartAXIS Lite and with the LCD on the
SmartAXIS Pro.
■Lite
The communication state is reflected in the power/run status LED.
StatusDescription

Connected

The power/run status LED is on.

Disconnected

The power/run status LED is flashing.

■Pro
The communication state is displayed on the standard screen and the status monitor screen. For how to check the communication
state on the status screen, see “Monitoring the Remote I/O Slave Status” on page 12-9.
Standard screen

12-8Connected

Disconnected

Remote I/O Slave
Connected

Remote I/O Slave
Disconnected

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12: R EM OTE I / O
Remote I/O Slave HMI Function
This section describes the menu screen when the SmartAXIS Pro is configured as a remote I/O slave.
For the button operations on the menu screen, see Chapter 6 "HMI Function".
Standard Screen

This screen displays content according to the communication state with the remote I/O master.
Connected

Disconnected

Remote I/O Slave
Connected

Remote I/O Slave
Disconnected

System menu

The menu items displayed when the SmartAXIS is configured as a remote I/O slave.
 Configurations

Configurations
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status Device Monitor*1
 Status Monitor
 Error Status*1 The remote I/O slave device monitor is read-only. The device values cannot be modified.

Monitoring the Remote I/O Slave Status

You can check the system software version and the communication cycle of the remote I/O slave.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +

Connected(OK) buttons.

Disconnected

Remote I/O Slave
Connected

Remote I/O Slave
Disconnected

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Status Monitor with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Configurations
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status
3. The system version is displayed. Press theConnected(down) button.
Disconnected

System Version:ࠉ2.00
Communication state:
ࠉConnected

System Version:ࠉ2.00
Communication state:
ࠉDisconnected

The communication cycle is displayed.
Connected

Disconnected

Communication cycle㸸
Current:
PV
Maximum:
PV
Minimum:PV
Current:
Maximum:
Minimum:

Communication cycle㸸
Current:
PV
Maximum:
PV
Minimum:
PVThe current communication cycle with the remote I/O master.
The maximum communication cycle from when the connection with the remote I/O master was
established until the present.
The minimum communication cycle from when the connection with the remote I/O master was
established until the present.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12-9

12: R EM OTE I / O
Remote I/O Slave Operation and Restrictions
The remote I/O slave outputs conform to the remote I/O master outputs. Therefore, the following restrictions are applied when
the SmartAXIS operates as a remote I/O slave.
Special internal relays

Communication settings

MaintenanceCommunication

12-10

All Outputs OFF (M8002)

Cannot be used.

Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped(M8025)

Cannot be used.

Serial communication port

The communication mode is always "Maintenance Communication". The
communication settings are fixed as the following settings.
Baud rate: 115,200 bps
Data length: 7 bits
Parity: Even
Stop bits: 1 bit

Ethernet Communication

Cannot be used except for remote I/O communication.

Access to devices

Output relay (Q) on/off state cannot be changed.
Other devices can be read and written to normally.

Forced I/O function

Cannot be used.

Data File Manager

Cannot be used.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12: R EM OTE I / O
Programming WindLDR
To use a SmartAXIS as a remote I/O slave, connect the SmartAXIS to the computer and configure it as a remote I/O slave with
WindLDR.
Notes:
The following restrictions apply when the SmartAXIS is configured as a remote I/O slave.
 The SmartAXIS only operates as remote I/O, functions other than the inputs and outputs are disabled.
 The user program originally entered into the SmartAXIS is deleted.
 No other settings except the remote I/O slave settings can be configured.

Configuration Procedure
1. Select Configuration > Remote I/O > Configure Slave.

The Remote I/O Slave Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2. Click PLC Type and select the PLC type of the connected SmartAXIS to configure.

3. Click the Network Settings tab and configure the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, local host port number, andmaster communication timeout for the remote I/O slave.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12-11

12: R EM OTE I / O
Note: When automatically acquiring an IP address using DHCP, the same IP address may not be assigned each time depending on the DHCP server
settings and the system configuration on the network where the SmartAXIS is operating. (Example: When using DHCP with two SmartAXIS units
and automatically acquiring the IP addresses, the IP addresses for the two units may be swapped.) When the SmartAXIS is incorporated in a system
configuration where it is a communication target, we recommend setting a fixed IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

4. In Master IP Address, enter the IP address of the remote I/O master to connect.

5. Click the Inputs Settings tab, and then configure the settings for the analog and digital inputs.

For details on the settings, see "Analog Input" on page 5-39.

Note: For the remote I/O slave, the input filter's set time is fixed to 3 ms. For details on the input filter function, see Chapter 5 "Special Functions"- "Input Filter" on page 5-38.

6. Click Download to download the remote I/O slave settings to the connected SmartAXIS.

Configuring the remote I/O slave is completed.

Notes:The remote I/O slave settings downloaded to the SmartAXIS can be uploaded to the Remote I/O Slave Configuration dialog box. However, thefollowing points should be taken into consideration:
 If the connected SmartAXIS is not configured as a remote I/O slave, the remote I/O slave settings cannot be uploaded.
 The existing settings on the dialog box are overwritten.

12-12

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12: R EM OTE I / O
Saving and Reusing Remote I/O Slave Settings
Remote I/O slave settings configured in the dialog box are lost when the dialog box is closed. Remote I/O slave settings configuredin the Remote I/O Slave Configuration dialog box can be reused by saving them as a configuration file (*.frs).
Note: No other information except the remote I/O slave settings are stored in the configuration file (*.frs) saved using the Remote I/O Slave
Configuration dialog box.

Saving Remote I/O Slave Settings
Operation Procedure
1. In the Remote I/O Slave Configuration dialog box, click Save.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2. Specify the location to save to and enter the file name.

3. Click Save.

A configuration file (*.frs) containing the remote I/O slave settings is created in the specified location.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

12-13

12: R EM OTE I / O
Using Saved Remote I/O Slave Settings
Operation procedure
1. In the Remote I/O Slave Configuration dialog box, click Open.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the configuration file (*.frs) to use and click Open.

The remote I/O slave settings are loaded.

Notes:
 When the remote I/O slave settings are read, the existing settings in the dialog box are overwritten.
 If you specify an invalid file, an error message is displayed and the remote I/O slave settings are not loaded.

12-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
I ntroduction
A script is a function for programming complicated processing with conditional branch, logical operations, arithmetic operations,and functions as text.
The programmed scripts can be executed in a ladder program or an FBD program. When the programming language is ladder,
scripts are executed with the SCRPT instruction. For details, see "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual" - Chapter 27 "Script".
When the programming language is FBD, scripts are executed with the SCRPT FB. For details, see "SmartAXIS FBD Programming
Manual" - Chapter 17 "The script FB".
For example, the logical AND operation is written as follows.
Ladder diagram

M0100

M0101

Script[M0100] && [M0101]← The script is programmed as text.

■Script Programming and Management
Scripts are programmed using the Script Editor dialog box in WindLDR and managed with the Script Manager dialog box.
Notes:
 In Script Editor, you can program scripts by selecting conditional expressions, operators, and functions from a list, and you can also checkthem for errors. The scripts can also be exported as text files, so they can be edited using a text editor such as Notepad. If you save anedited script as a text file, it can be imported into Script Editor.
For details, see "Script Editor" on page 13-6.
 In Script Manager, you can manage the scripts as a group by adding scripts created in Script Editor or deleting them. For details, see "Script

Manager" on page 13-5.

Script Data TypeThe data type for the range of data that will be handled in the script must be configured by taking into consideration the details of
the processing in the script including the maximum and minimum values of data that will be handled and whether negative
numbers and real numbers are required.
Note: The data type is configured in Script Editor. For how to configure it, see "Script Editor" on page 13-6.

Data Types
The following five data types can be processed in a script. For details about data types in ladder, see Chapter 4 "Instructions
Reference" - "Data Types for Advanced Instructions" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual". For details about data types
in FBD, see Chapter 4 "FB Reference" - "Data types" in the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".
Data type
Name

Used
data registers

Processable unit

W

Word

1

Unsigned 16 bits

0 to 65,535

I

Integer1

Signed 15 bits

-32,768 to 32,767

D

Double word

2

Unsigned 32 bits

0 to 4,294,967,295

L

Long

2

Signed 31 bits

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

F

Float

2

Signed 32 bits

-3.402823E+38 to -1.175495E-38
01.175495E-38 to 3.402823E+38

Abbreviation

Data range

Note: Some functions cannot be used if the data type is different. Check the function in the notation list.
See "Programming Scripts" on page 13-10.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-1

13: S CR I P TS
Device List
This section shows the devices that can be used in Script Editor and the device notation.
This section describes available devices and its notation that can be used in the Script Editor dialog box.
Note: The device ranges differ depending on each SmartAXIS. Specify the devices within the device range of the selected SmartAXIS. For device
ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 7-1.
DeviceBit device

Word device

Notation in Script Editor

I (Inputs)

I000 to I155

Q (Outputs)

Q000 to Q141

R (Shift registers)

R000 to R127

M (Internal relays)

M0000 to M1277,
M8000 to M8177

C (Counter contacts)

C000 to C199

T (Timer contacts)

T000 to T199

D (Data register bits)

D0000.0 ... D0000.15 to D1999.0 ... D1999.15,
D8000.0 ... D8000.15 to D8199.0 ... D8199.15

D (Data registers)

D0000 to D1999,
D8000 to D8199

TC (Timer current values)

TC000 to TC199

TP (Timer preset values)

TP000 to TP199

CC (Counter current values)

CC000 to CC199

CP (Counter preset values)

CP000 to CP199

Calculations in which both bit and word devices are used are not allowed.
Bit devices are always processed as bits, and values of those devices are 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
Applicable SmartAXIS

13-2

FT1A-12FT1A-24

FT1A-40

FT1A-48

X

X

X

X

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Script Programming and Management
Script Registration Procedure
This section describes the procedure to create and register a script. The registered script can be executed by specifying the script
ID in the SCRPT instruction/FB.
1. On the Project Window, double-click Script Manager.

Script Manager dialog box opens.
2. Click Add.

Script Editor dialog box opens.
3. Specify Script ID.

When creating a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 255).

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-3

13: S CR I P TS
4. Enter Script Name.

The script name can be entered up to 40 single-byte alphanumeric characters.

5. Select Data Type.
Note: The script is executed with the selected data type.

6. In Script, write the program.
Note: To create a script using the sample codes provided by WindLDR, under Function list, select Category and Function, and then click Insert
Format. The sample code displayed in Format is inserted at the cursor position in Script.

7. After you finish creating the script, click OK.

You are returned to the Script Manager dialog box and the created script is displayed in Script list.

8. Click Close.

A save confirmation message is displayed.
9. Click OK.

The script is saved and the Script Manager dialog box is closed.
Note: If you click No, the script is not saved and the Script Manager dialog box is closed.

13-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Script Manager
In the Script Manager dialog box, you can add scripts created in the Script Editor dialog box or delete registered scripts.

1.

3.
4.
5.

2.

6.

7.

1. List of scripts
Shows the list of registered scripts.
Script ID:
Error:
Script name:
Used:

Shows the script ID of the registered scripts (1 to 255).
Shows OK if the registered script has no errors. Shows NG if there are any errors.
Shows the name of the registered scripts.
Shows whether or not the registered scripts are used in this project.

2. Script
Shows the contents of the script selected in the Script list.
3. AddClick this button to display the Script Editor dialog box in order to create and add a script.
For details, see "Script Editor" on page 13-6.
4. Edit
Click this button to open the Script Editor dialog box in order to edit the script selected in the Script List.
For details, see "Script Editor" on page 13-6.
5. Delete
Click this button to delete the script selected in the Script List.
6. Select
Click this button to close the Script Manager dialog box and set the script ID of the script selected in the Script List to the editing
dialog box.
7. Close
Click this button to close Script Manager.
Note: If you click Close when the script list was modified, a save confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes on the confirmation message to savethe changes. Click No to discard the changes and close Script Manager.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-5

13: S CR I P TS
Script Editor
Script Editor is where you create new scripts and edit the scripts selected in Script Manager.
1.
2.
4.

3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

13.

(Description)

15.

16.

1. Script ID

When creating a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 255). When editing an existing script, this shows the script ID that was set.
2. Script NameEnter the script name. The script name can be entered up to 40 characters.
3. Data Type

Select the data type to process in the script. For details about the data types, see "Script Data Type" on page 13-1.
4. Script

Enter the script.
The restrictions for one script are a maximum of 240 characters per line and a maximum of 1024 lines per script.
5. Error Check

Click this button to check errors in the current script.
6. Import

Click this button to display the Open dialog box so you can import a script program.
If you select a script that was saved (exported) as a text file (*.txt) and click Open, the selected script is inserted at the current
cursor position in the current script.

13-6

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
7. Export

Click this button to display the Save As dialog box so you can export the script program.
If you select the location to save the script, enter a file name, and click Save, the current script is saved as a text file (*.txt). The
saved script can be inserted with Import.

8. Options

Click this button to display the Options dialog box.
In the Options dialog box, you can configure the font for the text used in the Script text box, the colors, the tab indents, and othersettings. For details, see "Options Dialog Box" on page 13-8.
9. FindClick this button to display the Find dialog box.
You can search the entered text in the script.

Note: If you first select an area in the script and then click Find, you can search only in the selected area.

10. Replace

Click this button to display the Replace dialog box.
Enter the text to search in the script in Find what and enter the text to replace it with in Replace with.

Notes:
 This is an effective tool when replacing device addresses.
 If you first select an area in the script and then click Replace, you can search and replace text only in the selected area.

11. Show/Hide Function List

This button shows and hides Function List and Output.
Note: Click and drag the bottom right corner of Script Editor and you can change the size of the box for editing scripts. By hiding Function List and
Output, you can increase the size of the script editing area (text box) and make it easier to edit the script.

12. Cursor

Shows the current cursor position in the Script text box as the line number and the column number.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-7

13: S CR I P TS
13. Function List

Category:
Function:
Format:Description:
Insert Format:
Insert Device:Shows the function category list.
Shows the list of functions in the selected category.
Shows a programming example of the selected function.
Shows a description of the selected function.
Click this button to insert the content displayed in Format at the cursor position.
Click this button to open the Tag Editor dialog box.
Specify a device address and click OK to insert the specified device address at the cursor position.

14. Script Compilation Output

Shows the details of errors when there are errors in the script in the error check.
If you double-click a comment displayed in Script Compilation Output, the section that corresponds to the error is highlighted
in the Script.
Note: Depending on the error, the error may exist on a line that differs from the line displayed in the output, or it may show multiple errors.

15. OK

Click this button to perform the error check on the current script, and then return to Script Manager after the script is saved.
Note: If there are any errors in the current script the save confirmation message is displayed. Scripts that contain errors can be saved.

16. Cancel

Click this button to return to Script Manager without saving the current script.
Options Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to specify Font, Size, Tab indent, and Colors used in the Script Editor Script text box.

■Font
Enter or select the font name for text displayed in Script.
■SizeEnter or select the size (pixels) of text displayed in Script.
■SampleShows a sample of text that will be displayed in the Script text box with the character font and the character size specified by
Font and Size.

13-8

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
■Colors
Shows the colors for Comment, Keyword, and Device.
Click the colored buttons to display the Color dialog box.

Characters that are not comments, keywords, or devices are all shown in black.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-9

13: S CR I P TS
Programming Scripts
Format List
This section describes the notation for control statements, operators, functions, and other elements, and it also describes theiroperation.
Except for comments, enter everything as single-byte characters. For specific programming examples, see "Script Programming
Examples" on page 13-16.
Control Statements
Conditional expressions are written here as
Executable lines are written as
,

,

,

,
and so on.

.

■Conditional branchFormatif ({Description
)

if (
if

)

{
else
else
else if; }if (else if (

{
else
{

Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.
Execution line 2 is executed if it is not satisfied.

; }

{
{

Execution line is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.

; }

; }

)
)

; }

Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
Conditional expression 2 is evaluated if conditional expression 1 is not satisfied,and execution line 2 is executed if conditional expression 2 is satisfied.
Execution line 3 is executed if conditional expression 2 is not satisfied too.

; }switch (){
case constant 1:;
break;
case constant 2:

switchcasedefault

break;
default:}

break;;

Execution line 1 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches constant 1.
Execution line 2 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches constant 2.
Execution line 3 is executed if the value of conditional expression does not match
constant 1 nor constant 2.

:■RepeatFormatwhile

while ({}

13-10

Description);

Execution line is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression is satisfied.
The execution will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is always
satisfied, so do not use fixed values or devices that do not change as the conditional
expression.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
■Halt and exit
FormatDescription

while (
{

)

if (
{

)

break
}

break;

Process will be as follows while the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
Execution line 2 is continuously executed while the conditional expression 2 is notsatisfied.
Once the conditional expression 2 is satisfied, the execution goes out of the loop bybreak (not executing execution line 2), and execution line 3 is executed.

;

;

}

;

switch (){
case constant 1:;
break;
case constant 2:

break

}
returnbreak;;

When the conditional expression matches the constant 1, execution line 1 is executedand the switch execution is terminated by break. Evaluation for constant 2 is not
executed, and the execution moves to execution line 3.

;
Script will exit and the next instruction/FB in the user program is executed.

return;Operator
Device, constant, and temporary device are described as,

here, and expressions are described as

,

,

.

■Relational operator
OperatorFormatDescription====

Compares if

is equal to

.

!=

!=

Compares if

is not equal to<<Compares if

is less than<=<=Compares if

is less than or equal to>>Compares if

is greater than>=>=Compares if

is greater than or equal to

.
.
.

.
.

■Logical operator
OperatorFormatDescription&&() && ()

Calculates the logical product (AND) of||() || ()

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of

!

!(

)

Inverse the logic of

and
and

.
.

.

■Arithmetic operator
OperatorFormatDescription

+

+

Adds

and

.

-

-

Subtracts

from

*

*

Multiplies

and

/

/

Divides%%

Calculates remainder after dividing

by

.
.
.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

by

.

13-11

13: S CR I P TS
■Bit operator
OperatorFormatDescription&&

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of||Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of^^Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of

~

and
and

.
.
and

.

Inverse the logic of each bits of.
For word devices and fixed values, 0 will be 65,535, and 65,535 will be 0.
For bit device, 0 will be 1, and 1 will be 0.

~

<<

<<

Shifts each bit ofto the left forbit(s).

>>>>

Shifts each bit ofto the right forbit(s).

Function
Device, constant, and temporary device are described as

,

,

,

... here.

■Bit function
Function
Bit setBit reset
Bit reverse

Format
SET(
RST(
REV(

Description);

Turns bit device
to 1.
This is the same result as

= 1;.

);

Turns bit device
to 0.
This is the same result as

= 0;.

);

Reverses the 1 and 0 of bit device
This is the same result as
=~

.
;.

■Word function
Arithmetic operation
Function

FormatDescription
Maximum value out of,,is returned.

MAX(

,

,

)

 This can be used for all data types.

Mininum value

MIN(

,

,

)

Minimum value out of,, This can be used for all data types.
 Up to 15 arguments can be defined.

Exponentialfunction

EXP()

 This can only be used for data type F (float).

Natural logarithm(base: e)

LOGE(

)

 This can only be used for data type F (float).

)Common logarithm (base is 10) foris returned.
 This can only be used for data type F (float).
 Set a value larger than 0 for argument.

Maximum value

 Up to 15 arguments can be defined.

Exponential function ofis returned.

is returned.

Natural logarithm (base is e) foris returned.

 Set a value larger than 0 for argument.

Common logarithm(Base: 10)

LOG10(

Exponentiation

POW(

,

Square root

ROOT(

)

Square root ofis returned.
 This can only be used for data type F (float).

Sine

SIN(

)

Sine of(-1 to +1) is returned.
Specify arbitrary formula to represent angle (units in radian) for argument
 This can only be used for data type F (float).

.

CosineCOS()

Cosine of(-1 to +1) is returned.
Specify arbitrary formula to represent angle (units in radian) for argument
 This can only be used for data type F (float).

.

Tangent

TAN()

Tangent of(-1 to +1) is returned.
Specify arbitrary formula to represent angle (units in radian) for argument
 This can only be used for data type F (float).

.

13-12

)

to thepower is returned.

 This can only be used for data type F (float).

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Function

FormatDescription

ArcsineASIN()

Arcsine of(-1 to +1) in radian value (-/2 to +/2) is returned.
Specify arbitrary formula for argument.
 This can only be used for data type F (float).

Arccosine

ACOS(

)

Arccosine of(-1 to +1) in radian value (0 to ) is returned.
Specify arbitrary formula for argument.
 This can only be used for data type F (float).

Arctangent

ATAN(

);

Arctangent of(-1 to +1) in radian value (-/2 to +/2) is returned.
Specify arbitrary formula for argument.
 This can only be used for data type F (float).

Conversion from
Angle to Radian

RAD(

);

 This can only be used for data type F (float).

Conversion from
Radian to Angle

DEG(

);

 This can only be used for data type F (float).

Value of
Value ofis converted from degree (°) to radian, and the value is returned.
is converted from radian to degree (°), and the value is returned.

Data type conversion
Function

FormatDescription

Conversion from
BCD to Binary

BCD2BIN()

BCD value ofis returned in binary value.
 This can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L(long).

Conversion from
Binary to BCD

BIN2BCD()

Binary value ofis returned in BCD value.
 This can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L(long).

Conversion fromfloat to Binary

FLOAT2BIN()

Float value ofis returned in binary value.
Values after the decimal point is truncated.
 This can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L(long).

Conversion from
Binary to float

BIN2FLOAT()

Binary value ofis returned in float value.
 This can be used with data types D (double word) and L (long).
Decimal number value
is converted to a character string, and store in order withas a starting device.
 This can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L(long).

Conversion from
Decimal to String
character

DEC2ASCII(,

Conversion from
String character to
DecimalASCII2DEC())

Character string
is returned as decimal number value.
 This can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L(long).

Data comparison and copy
Function

Data
comparison

Format

MEMCMP(,

Description,): Starting device of comparison target 1: Starting device of comparison target 2: Range of comparison (in words)
Values of device
forwords and values of device
for words
arecompared.
1 is returned if all the values of devices match, and 0 is returned if any of the value does
not match.
 Specified range is compared in word unit, and result is returned.
 Up to 64 words can be compared.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-13

13: S CR I P TS
Function

Data copy

Format

MEMCPY(

Description

,

,

)

: Starting device of copy source: Starting device of copy target: Range of copy (in words)
Values fromforwords are copied toforwords respectively.

 Specified range is compared in word unit, and result is returned.
 Up to 64 words can be copied.

Bit device(1 word length)toBit device(1 word length)
Bit device(1 word length)
toWord device
Word devicetoBit device(1 word length)

BITS2BITS(,

BITS2WORD(,

WORD2BITS(,);: Starting device of copy target (bit device): Starting device of copy source (bit device)
Copies one word worth of data fromto.
 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.

);: Starting device of copy target (word device): Starting device of copy source (bit device)
Copies one word worth of data fromto.
 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.

);: Starting device of copy target (bit device): Starting device of copy source (word device)
Copies one word worth of data fromto.
 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.

OffsetFunction

FormatDescription: Reference device: Device to store the offset value (0 to 32767)
Specifies the device atwords from.
Indirect readSpecify OFFSET function to the right of the assignment statement.

Indirect
specification

OFFSET(,)

Format example:

C = OFFSET(

Operation:

Stores the value of device at.

,)=words frominto

Indirect write
Specify OFFSET function to the left of the assignment statement.
Format example:

OFFSET(

Operation:

Stores the value of
.

,

) =
into the device atwords from Store the value appropriate for the data type as the offset value.

For example, when the data type is I (integer), store the offset value of I (integer)
into the device.

13-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
OtherThis section describes definitions for constant, device, temporary device, and comment.
■Constant
Constant can be defined as decimal or hexadecimal number.
Sample definition of decimal numbers

1234

Define the numeric value directly.

-1234

Define the negative number with a "-" (minus) symbol at the beginning.

12.34

Decimal number can be defined for real numbers (float).
Define a "." (period) between the whole numbers and decimal numbers.

There are 2 ways to define hexadecimal numbers.
Sample definition of hexadecimal numbers

0x12AB

Define "0" (zero) and "x" (lower case x) at the beginning of the value.

12ABh

Append "h" at the tail of the value.

■Device Address
Device Address is defined with the device symbol and address within "[" and "]".
Definition of the device[Device symbol and address](Space between the device symbol and address is not required.)

Sample definition[D0100]■Temporary Device
Temporary device is a device that can be used only inside the script. It can store a value and can be used as a variable.
It is defined with a device symbol "@" followed by address (1 – 32).
Definition of the temporary device@address(Space between the device symbol "@" and address is not required.)

Sample definition@2

Temporary device number 2

Note: All the values for temporary devices are set to "0" when the execution of the script is started.

■Comment
A note defined in the script is called a comment. The line with "//" defined at the beginning of a line will become a comment.
"//" is defined with a single-byte. Double-byte characters can be written after "//".
Definition of comment// Arbitrary note
Sample definition// Store the initial value to calculation data [D0100] for process A[D0100] = 1234;::← This line is not executed.

Notes: Describing comments to explain the contents of the script is useful especially when another person works on the scripts or when some time

has passed after editing the scripts.
 Comments are ignored (not executed) when the script is executed, so they can be defined freely without interfering the execution time.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-15

13: S CR I P TS
Script Programming Examples
This section describes script programming examples for control statements, arithmetic operators, and functions, as well as theiroperations.

1. Control Statements
Example 1.1

Conditional branch

Scriptif ([D0100]){[D0102] = 100;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is not 0, then 100 is stored in D0102.
Example 1.2

Conditional branch

Scriptif ([D0100]){[D0102] = [D0103] + [D0104] + [D0105];}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is not 0, the value of D0103, D0104, and D0105 are added and the result is stored in D0102.
Example 1.3

Conditional branch

Scriptif (0 != [D0100]){
if (0 != [D0102]){[D0103] = 0x1234;}}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is not 0 and the value of D0102 is not 0 either, 0x1234 is stored in D0103.
If the value of D0100 is not 0 and the value of D0102 is 0, then nothing is executed.
If the value of D0100 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of D0102.
Example 1.4

Conditional branch

Scriptif ((0 != [D0100]) || (0 != [D0102])){[D0103] = 100;}else{
[D0104] = [D0105] + 100;}
Operation Description

If either the value of D0100 or the value of D0102 is not 0, then 100 is stored in D0103.
If the values of both D0100 and D0102 are 0, 100 is added to D0105 and the result is stored in D0104.
13-16

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Example 1.5

Conditional branch

Scriptif ([D0100] == 0){[D0102] = 0x1234;}
else if ([D0100] == 1){[D0102] = 0x5678;}
else{[D0102] = 0x9999;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in D0102.
If the value of D0100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in D0102.
If the value of D0100 is not 0 nor 1, then 0x9999 is stored in D0102.
Example 1.6

Conditional branch

Scriptif ([D0100]){
if ([D0102]){
if ([D0103]){[D0104] = 100;}else{
[D0104] = 200;}}}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100, D0102, and D0103 are all not 0, then 100 is stored in D0104.
If the values of D0100 and the value of D0102 are not 0 and the value of D0103 is 0, then 200 is stored in D0104.
If either the value of D0100 or D0102 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of D0103.
Example 1.7

Iteration

Script[D0100] = 10;[D0102] = 10;
while (0 < [D0100]){[D0102] = [D0102] + 1;
[D0100] = [D0100] - 1;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is larger than 0, then 1 is repeatedly added to the value of D0102 and 1 is repeatedly subtracted from thevalue of D0100.
In the script example above, when the while statement repeats ten times, the value of D0100 becomes 0 and the while statement
ends.
After this script is executed, the value of D0100 is 0 and the value of D0102 is 20.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-17

13: S CR I P TS
Example 1.8

Iteration

Script[D0100] = 0;
[D0102] = 3;
[D0103] = 5;
while ([D0100] == 0){[D0102] = [D0102] + 1;
if ([D0103] == [D0102]){
SET([M0000]);
break;}}

Operation Description

While the value of D0100 is 0, the while statement is repeated.
Inside the while statement, if the values of D0102 and D0103 are equal, the while statement will terminate, and after [M0000]
changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement.
In the example script above, the values of D0102 and D0103 are equal when the while statement repeats twice, and after M0000
changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement loop. After execution, the value of D0100 is 0, the value of D0102 is 5,
the value of D0103 is 5, and M0000 is 1.
Example 1.9

Indirect write and indirect read using iteration (while statement)

Script//Transfer D0010 through D0019 to D0100 through D0109// Initialize the offset value[D0000] = 0;// Loop ten times
while ([D0000] < 10){// Transfer 1 word by indirect assignment
OFFSET([D0100] , [D0000]) = OFFSET([D0010] , [D0000]);// Increment indirect value[D0000] = [D0000] + 1}
Operation Description

This script stores the values of D0010 through D0019 in D0100 through D0109.
It operates as follows.
First, the offset value D0000 is initialized and set to 0.
First iteration (loop): The value of D0000 is 0, so the condition "[D0000] < 10" is true and the statements inside while are executed.

 The value of D0010, 0 words from D0010, is stored in D0100, 0 words from D0100.
 1 is added to the value of offset value D0000, so that it becomes 1.

Second iteration (loop) : The value of D0000 is 1, so the condition "[D0000] < 10" is true and the statements inside while are executed.
 The value of D0011, 1 word from D0010, is stored in D0101, 1 word from D0100.
 1 is added to the value of offset value D0000, so that it becomes 2.

:(Repeats in the same manner for the third to ninth iterations):
Tenth iteration (loop) : The value of D0000 is 9, so the condition "[D0000] < 10" is true and the statements inside while are executed.
 The value of D0019, 9 words from D0010, is stored in D0109, 9 words from D0100.
 1 is added to the value of offset value D0000, so that it becomes 10.

The value of D0000 is 10, so the condition "[D0000] < 10" is false and execution breaks out of the while loop.
After execution, the values of D0100 through D0109 are the same with the values of D0010 through D0019.
13-18

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Example 1.10 Decimal to octal conversion using a while statement
Script// Convert a decimal value to octal// - For example, convert 10 (dec) to 12 (oct), 16 (dec) to 20 (oct)// - Convert a value to octal up to 4 digits max@1 = 0;@2 = [D0100];@3 = 1;@4 = 0;// while counter// gets original data// decimal base// calculation results// repeat four times
while (@1 < 4){// Extract 1st octal digit from original data. Store working result in @10.
@10 = @2 % 8;//Convert the extracted results to decimal and add to the results@4 = @4 + (@10 * @3);//Increase the decimal base by one digit@3 = @3 * 10;// Decrease the original data by one digit@2 = @2 / 8;// If @2 is 0, exit the white statement
if (0 == @2){
break;}// Increment while counter by 1
@1 = @1 + 1;}// Store the calculation result in D0200[D0200] = @4;
Operation Description

This example converts a decimal value to octal using a while statement.
By repeating the process to divide the original decimal data by 8 and converting each digit to octal in a while statement, theconversion is implemented up to four digits.
The original decimal value is stored in D0100. After the script is executed, the converted octal value is stored in D0200.
Example 1.11 Conditional branch with switch
Scriptswitch ([D0100]){case 10:[D0200] = 0x1234;
break;
case 999:[D0200] = 0x5678;
SET([D0000.01]);
break;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is 10, then 0x1234 is stored in D0200.
If the value of D0100 is 999, then 0x5678 is stored in D0200 and D0000.01 is set to 1.
If the value of D0100 is not 10 nor 999, then nothing is executed.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-19

13: S CR I P TS
Example 1.12 Conditional branch with switch using the default statement
Scriptswitch ([D0100]){case 0:[D0102] = 0x1234;
break;
case 1:[D0102] = 0x5678;
break;
default:[D0102] = 0x9999;
break;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in D0102.
If the value of D0100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in D0102.
If the value of D0100 is not 0 nor 1, then 0x9999 is stored in D0102.
Example 1.13 Terminate the script with the return statement
Scriptif (0x1234 == [D0100]){[D0102] = 0x5678;
return;}[D0103] = 0;
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is not 0x1234, then 0 is stored in D0103.
If the value of D0100 is 0x1234, then 0x5678 is stored in D0102 and the script is terminated.
The return statement does not break out of a loop like the break statement, it terminates the script execution.
Example 1.14 Break out of a loop with the break statement
Script[D0100] = 0;
[D0102] = 3;
[D0103] = 5;
while ([D0100] == 0){[D0102] = [D0102] + 1;}

if ([D0102] == [D0103){
SET([D0000.01]);
break;}

Operation Description

While the value of D0100 is 0, the while statement is repeated until D0102 and D0103 match.
Inside the while statement, if the values of D0102 and D0103 are equal, the while statement will end and execution breaks out of
the while statement.
In the example above, the values of D0102 and D0103 match when the while statement is repeated twice, and after D0000.01
changes to 1, the while statement ends. After execution, the value of D0100 is 0, the value of D0102 is 5, the value of D0103 is 5,
and the value of D0000.01 is 1.
13-20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
2. Relational Operators
Example 2.1

Equal toScriptif ([D0100] == [D0102]){[D0103] = 0x100;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is equal to the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.2

Not equal to

Scriptif ([D0100] != [D0102]){[D0103] = 0x100;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is not equal to the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.3

Less than

Scriptif ([D0100] < [D0102]){[D0103] = 0xl00;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is less than the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.4

Less than or equal to

Scriptif ([D0100] <= [D0102]){[D0103] = 0xl00;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is less than or equal to the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.5

Greater than

Scriptif ([D0100] > [D0102]){[D0103] = 0xl00;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is greater than the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.6

Greater than or equal to

Scriptif ([D0100] >= [D0102]){[D0103] = 0xl00;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is greater than or equal to the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-21

13: S CR I P TS
3. Logical Operators
Example 3.1

Logical AND

Scriptif (([D0100] == [D0200]) && ([D0300] == [D0400] + [D0500])){[D0600] = 100;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is equal to the value of D0200, and if the value of D0300 is equal to the value of D0400 and D0500 added
together, then 100 is stored in D0600.
If either ([D0100] == [D0200]) or ([D0300] == [D0400] + [D0500]) is false, the processing in the brackets “{ }” is not executed.
Example 3.2

Logical OR

Scriptif ((0 != [D0100]) || (0 != [D0200])){[D0300] = 100;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is not 0 or the value of D0102 is not 0, then 100 is stored in D0300.
If either one of them is true, the processing in the brackets “{ }” is executed.
Example 3.3

Logical inversion

Scriptif (!([D0100] == 0x1234)){[D0300] = 100;}
Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is not equal to 0x1234, then 100 is stored in D0300.
Example 3.4

Logical inversion

Scriptif (!(0 !=[D0100])){[D0300] = 100 ;}Operation Description

If the value of D0100 is 0, then 100 is stored in D0300.
This is the same as the code "if (0==[D0100]))".

13-22

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
4. Arithmetic Operators
Example 4.1

Addition

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] + [D0200];
Operation Description

The values of D0100 and D0200 are added together and the result is stored in D0300.
Example 4.2

Subtraction

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] - [D0200];
Operation Description

The value of D0200 is subtracted from the value of D0100 and the result is stored in D0300.
Example 4.3

Multiplication

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] * [D0200];
Operation Description

The values of D0100 and D0200 are multiplied together and the result is stored in D0300.
Example 4.4

Division

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] / [D0200];
Operation Description

The value of D0100 is divided by the value of D0200 and the result is stored in D0300.
Example 4.5

ModuloScript

[D0300] = [D0100] % [D0200];
Operation Description

The value of D0100 is divided by the value of D0200 and the remainder is stored in D0300.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-23

13: S CR I P TS
5. Bitwise Operators
Example 5.1

Logical AND

Scriptif ([D0000.01] & [D0001.01]){
SET([D0002.01)]);}else{
RST([D0002.01]);}
Operation Description

If the bitwise logical AND operation on the value of D0000.01 and the value of D0001.01 is 1, D0002.01 is changed to 1.
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the value of D0000.01 and the value of D0001.01 is 0, D0002.01 is changed to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
D0000.01

D0001.01

Example 5.2

D0002.01

Logical OR

Scriptif ([D0000.01] | [D0001.01]){
SET([D0002.01]);}else{
RST([D0002.01]);}
Operation Description

If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of D0000.01 and the value of D0001.01 is 1, D0002.01 is changed to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of D0000.01 and the value of D0001.01 is 0, D0002.01 is changed to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
D0002.01

D0000.01

D0001.01

Example 5.3

Logical XOR (exclusive OR)

Script[D0200] = [D0100] ^ 0xFF;
Operation Description

The logical XOR operation on the value of D0100 and each bit in 0xFF is stored in D0200.
For example, if the value of D0100 is 15 (0x0F), then 240 (0xF0) is stored in D0200.
Example 5.4

Inversion

Script[D0200] = ~[D0100];
Operation Description

The bits in the value of D0100 are inverted and stored in D0200.
For example, if the value of D0100 is 0, then 65,535 is stored in D0200.
13-24

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Example 5.5

Inversion

Scriptif (([D0000.01] & ~[D0001.01]) | [D0002.01]){
SET([D0003.01]);}else{
RST([D0003.01]);}
Operation Description

If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of D0002.01 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on the value ofD0000.01 and the inverted result of the value of D0001.01 is 1, then D0003.01 is changed to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of D0002.01 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on the value ofD0000.01 and the inverted result of the value of D0001.01 is 0, D0003.01 is changed to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
D0000.01

D0001.01

D0003.01

D0002.01

Example 5.6

Left shift

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] << [D0200];
Operation Description

The value of D0100 is shifted to the left by the value of D0200 and the result is stored in D0300.
For example, if the value of D0100 is 1 and the value of D0200 is 3, 1 is shifted 3 bits to the left, and the result of 8 is stored in
D0300.
Example 5.7

Right shift

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] >> [D0200];
Operation Description

The value of D0100 is shifted to the right by the value of D0200 and the result is stored in D0300.
For example, if the value of D0100 is 8 and the value of D0200 is 3, 8 is shifted 3 bits to the right, and the result of 1 is stored in
D0300.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-25

13: S CR I P TS
6. Bit Functions
Example 6.1

Set a bit

ScriptSET([D0000.01]);
Operation Description

Turns D0000.01 to 1. The result is the same as [D0000.01] = 1.
Example 6.2

Reset a bit

Script

RST([D0000.01]);
Operation Description

Turns D0000.01 to 0. The result is the same as [D0000.01] = 0.
Example 6.3

Invert a bit

ScriptREV([D0000.01]);
Operation Description

Inverts 1 and 0 in D0000.01. The result is the same as [D0000.01] = ~[D0000.01].

7. Word Functions

Arithmetic operations
Example 7.1

Maximum value

Script[D0200] = MAX([D0100], [D0110], [D0120], [D0130], [D0140]);
Operation Description

Out of the values stored in D0100, D0110, D0120, D0130, and D0140, the maximum value is stored in D0200.
Up to 15 arguments can be used.
Example 7.2

Mininum value

Script[D0200] = MIN([D0100], [D0110], [D0120], [D0130], [D0140]);
Operation Description

Out of the values stored in D0100, D0110, D0120, D0130, and D0140, the minimum value is stored in D0200.
Up to 15 arguments can be used.
Example 7.3

Exponential function

Script[D0010] = EXP([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the exponential function of the value of D0020 and the result is stored in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
13-26

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Example 7.4

Natural logarithm

Script[D0010] = LOGE([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the natural logarithm of the value of D0020 and the result is stored in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.5

Common logarithm

Script[D0010] = LOG10([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the logarithm of the value of D0020 with 10 as the base and the result is stored in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.6

Power

Script[D0010] = POW([D0020],[D0030]);
Operation Description

Calculates the power of the values.
For example, if the value of D0020 is 10 and the value of D0030 is 5, the function calculates 10 to the power of 5 and stores theresult in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.7

Square root

Script[D0010] = ROOT([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the square root of the value of [D0020] and the result is stored in [D0010].
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.8

Sine

Script[D0010] = SIN([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the sine of the radian value of D0020 and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.9

CosineScript[D0010] = COS([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the cosine of the radian value of D0020 and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-27

13: S CR I P TS
Example 7.10 Tangent
Script[D0010] = TAN([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the tangent of the radian value of D0020 and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.11 Arcsine
Script[D0010] = ASIN([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the arcsine of the value of D0020 and stores the result as radians in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.12 Arccosine
Script[D0010] = ACOS([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the arccosine of the value of D0020 and stores the result as radians in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.13 Arctangent
Script[D0010] = ATAN([D0020]);
Operation Description

Calculates the arctangent of the value of D0020 and stores the result as radians in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.14 Convert angle to radians
Script[D0010] = RAD([D0020]);
Operation Description

Converts the value of D0020 from degrees (°) to radians and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.15 Convert radians to angle
Script[D0010] = DEG([D0020]);
Operation Description

Converts the value of D0020 from radians to degrees (°) and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

13-28

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Data type conversions
Example 7.16 Convert BCD to binary
Script[D0200] = BCD2BIN([D0100]);
Operation Description

Converts the BCD value in D0100 to a binary value and stores it in D0200.
For example, if the BCD value 10 (16 as a binary value) is stored in D0100, 10 (binary value) is stored in D0200.
Example 7.17 Convert binary to BCD
Script[D0200] = BIN2BCD([D0100]);
Operation Description

Converts the binary value in D0100 to a BCD value and stores it in D0200.
For example, if the binary value 16 (10 as a BCD value) is stored in D0100, 16 (BCD value) is stored in D0200.
Example 7.18 Convert float to binary
Script[D0200] = FLOAT2BIN([D0100]);
Operation Description

Converts the float value in D0100 to a binary value and stores it in D0200.
For example, if the data type F (float) 1234.0 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) is stored in D0100, 1234 (binary value) is stored in
D0200. If the data type F (float) 1234.56 (0x449A51EC as a binary value) is stored in D0100, the value after the decimal point is
truncated and 1234 (binary value) is stored in D0200.
Example 7.19 Convert binary to float
Script[D0200] = BIN2FLOAT([D0100]);
Operation Description

Converts the binary value in D0100 to a float value and stores it in D0200.
For example, if the binary value 1234 is stored in D0100, the float value 1234.0 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) is stored in D0200.
Example 7.20 Convert decimal to string
Script

DEC2ASCII([D0100], [D0200]);
Operation Description

Converts the decimal numeric value in D0200 to a string and stores it in order with D0100 as the starting address.
Notes:
 This function can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long).
 The NULL terminating character (0x00) is added to the end of the string.

Converting 1234 (when the data type is W (word))

DeviceStored value

D0200

1234

DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

D0100

'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

D0101

'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

D0102

0x00

0x00

Terminating character

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-29

13: S CR I P TS
Converting -12345 (when the data type is I (integer))

DeviceStored value

D0200-12345Stored value

DeviceUpper byte

Lower byte

D0100'-' = 0x2D

'1' = 0x31

D0101

'2' = 0x32

'3' = 0x33

D0102

'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

0x00

0x00

D0103

Terminating character

Converting 1234567890 (when the data type is D (double word))

DeviceD0200
D0201

DeviceStored value
1234567890

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

D0100

'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

D0101

'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

D0102

'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

D0103

'7' = 0x37

'8' = 0x38

D0104

'9' = 0x39

'0' = 0x30

0x00

0x00

D0105

Terminating character

Converting -1234567890 (when the data type is L (long))

DeviceD0200
D0201

DeviceStored value-1234567890

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

D0100'-' = 0x2D

'1' = 0x31

D0101

'2' = 0x32

'3' = 0x33

D0102

'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

D0103

'6' = 0x36

'7' = 0x37

D0104

'8' = 0x38

'9' = 0x39

D0105

'0' = 0x30

0x00
Terminating character

Example 7.21 Convert string to decimal
Script[D0100] = ASCII2DEC([D0200]);
Operation Description
Converts the stored string starting at D0200 to a decimal and stores the result in D0100.
The number of digits that can be converted is the maximum number of digits for each data type with added sign.

If the string to convert contains a NULL or characters that cannot be converted to numeric values, the string is converted up tothat character.
Notes:
 This function can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long).
 The NULL terminating character (0x00) is added to the end of the string.

Setting the string "1234" (when the data type is W (word))
DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

DeviceStored value

D0200'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

D0100

1234

D0201

'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

D0202

0x00

0x00

Terminating character

13-30

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Setting the string "1234567" (when the data type is D (double word))
DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

DeviceStored value

D0200'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

D0100

12345

D0201

'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

D0202

'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

D0203

'7' = 0x37

0x00
Terminating character

Setting the string "-12345" (when the data type is I (integer))
DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

DeviceStored value

D0200'-' = 0x2D

'1' = 0x31

D0100

-12345D0201'2' = 0x32

'3' = 0x33

D0202

'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

0x00

0x00

D0203

Terminating character

String "1234567890" (when the data type is L (long))
DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

DeviceStored value

D0200'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

D0100

1234567890

D0201'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

D0202

'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

D0203

'7' = 0x37

'8' = 0x38

D0204

'9' = 0x39

'0' = 0x30

0x00

0x00

D0205

Terminating character

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-31

13: S CR I P TS
Data comparison and copying
Example 7.22 Word-unit data comparison
Script[D0000] = MEMCMP([D0100], [D0200], 10);
Operation Description

Compares the values of 10 words from D0100 (up to D0109) with the values of 10 words from D0200 (up to D0209).
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in D0000. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.
Compare each
D0100
D0101
D0102

D0200
D0201
D0202

･･･

･･･

･･･
D0107
D0108
D0109

D0207
D0208
D0209

Note: Even if the data type is set to D (double word), L (long), or F (float), the comparison is performed from the starting device in word units.

Example 7.23 Bit-unit data comparison
Script[D0000] = MEMCMP([D0100.02], [D0200.00], 10);
Operation Description

Compares the third bit of D0100 through the third bit of D0109 with the state of the bits from the first bit of D0200 through thefirst bit of D0209.
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in D0000. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.
Compare each
1st bit of D0200
1st bit of D0201
1st bit of D0202

3rd bit of D0100
3rd bit of D0101
3rd bit of D0102

･･･

･･･

･･･

1st bit of D0207
1st bit of D0208
1st bit of D0209

3rd bit of D0107
3rd bit of D0108
3rd bit of D0109

Note: Even if the data type is set to D (double word), L (long), or F (float), the comparison is performed from the starting device in bit units.

Example 7.24 Word-unit data copy
Script

MEMCPY([D0100], [D0200], 10);
Operation Description

Copies the value of 10 word devices from D0200 (up to D0209) to 10 word devices from D0100 (up to D0109).
Copy each
D0200
D0201
D0202
･･･

･･･
D0107
D0108
D0109

･･･

D0100
D0101
D0102

D0207
D0208
D0209

Note: Even if the data type is set to D (double word), L (long), or F (float), the data is copied from the starting device in word units.

13-32

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Example 7.25 Bit-unit data copy
Script

MEMCPY([D0200.00], [D0100.02], 10);
Operation Description

Copies the third bit of 10 words from D0100 (up to D0109) to the bit state for 10 bits of devices from D0200 (up to D0209).
Copy each
1st bit of D0200
1st bit of D0201
1st bit of D0202

3rd bit of D0100
3rd bit of D0101
3rd bit of D0102
･･･

･･･

･･･
1st bit of D0207
1st bit of D0208
1st bit of D0209

3rd bit of D0107
3rd bit of D0108
3rd bit of D0109

Note: Even if the data type is set to D (double word), L (long), or F (float), the bits are copied from the starting device in bit units.

Example 7.26 Copy 1 word from bit devices to bit devices
Script

BITS2BITS(I004, M0000);
Operation Description

A value of 1 word length from I004 (I004 to I023) is copied to the bit states of a 1 word region from M0000 (M0000 to M0017).
Copy each
I004
I005

M0017

･･･

･･･

･･･

M0000
M0001

I023

Example 7.27 Copy 1 word from bit devices to a word device
Script

BITS2WORD(I004, D0000);
Operation Description

A value of 1 word length from I004 (to I023) is copied to the value of device D0000.
This is the same as BITS2BITS (I004, D0000.0);.
Example 7.28 Copy 1 word from a word device to bit devices
ScriptWORD2BITS(D0100, M0000);
Operation Description

The value of device D0100 is copied to the bit states of a value of 1 word length from M0000 (M0000 to M0017).
This is the same as BITS2BITS (D1000.0, M0000);.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-33

13: S CR I P TS
Indirect assignment
Example 7.29 Indirect read
Script[D0200] = OFFSET([D0010],[D0020]);
Operation Description

When the value of D0020 is 8, the value of D0018, the device 8 words from D0010, is read and stored in D0200.
D0010

0000

D0018

1234

D0020 0008
+8

D0200

1234

Read

Example 7.30 Indirect write
ScriptOFFSET([D0010],[D0020]) = 1234;
Operation Description

When the value of D0020 is 3, the constant 1234 is stored in D0013, the device 3 words from D0010.
D0010

0000

D0013

1234

D0020 0003
+3

1234

13-34

Write

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13: S CR I P TS
Important Notes
This section describes important notes when programming scripts.

Important Notes Regarding While Definition■Define so the execution does not go into an infinite loop.
The execution expression is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression is satisfied.
However, it will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is satisfied continually.

[D0100] = 10;
while (0 != [D0100]){[D0200] = [D0200] + 1;}
In the conditional expression of the while definition, it states to exit the loop when the value of D0100 turns 0. However, the value
stored in D0100 is not changed after string 10 in the first line of the script, so the execution goes into an infinite loop.
When using the while definition, define it so the execution will not go into an infinite loop.
If the execution becomes an infinite loop, the scan time will exceed the watchdog timer setting and a watchdog timer error will
occur.
The value of D0100 becomes 0 when the while definition is repeated 10 times in the following example, and the execution will getout of the while definition.

[D0100] = 10;
while (0 != [D0100]){[D0200] = [D0200] + 1;
[D0100] = [D0100] - 1;}

About the Priority of the Operator
Operators are processed in the order from the left in each line. When multiple operations are combined, the operators areprocessed in the following priorities.
Priority

OperatorHigh()! ~ - (Negative number)* / %+ - (Subtraction)
<< >>
&
^
|
< <= > >=
== !=
&&
||

Low

=

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

13-35

13: S CR I P TS

13-36

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
I ntroduction
This chapter describes the procedures to determine the cause of problem and actions to be taken when any problem occurs while
operating the SmartAXIS.
The SmartAXIS has self-diagnostic functions to prevent the spread of problems if any should occur. In case of any problem, follow
the troubleshooting procedures to determine the cause and to correct the error.
Errors are checked in various stages. While editing a user program on WindLDR, incorrect devices and other data are rejected.
User program syntax errors are found during compilation on WindLDR. When an incorrect program is downloaded to the
SmartAXIS, user program syntax errors are still checked. Errors are also checked at starting and during operation of theSmartAXIS. When an error occurs, the error is reported by turning on the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS Lite and an error message
can be viewed on WindLDR. For the procedure to confirm the error status and clear the error on the SmartAXIS Pro, see"Checking/Clearing Error Information" on page 6-20.

Reading Error Data
When any error occurs during the SmartAXIS operation, “Error” is indicated and error details can be read using WindLDR.
Monitoring WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor. The monitor mode is enabled.
2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Status. The PLC Status dialog box appears.

When any error exists, “Error” is displayed in the error status box.

System Software Version
D8029

Details Button

Error Status Box
D8005 (general error code)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-1

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
3. On the right of the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box, click the Details button.

The PLC Error Status screen appears.

Clearing Error Codes from WindLDR
After removing the cause of the error, clear the error code using the following procedure:
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor. The monitor mode is enabled.
2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Status. The PLC Status dialog box appears.
3. On the right of the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box, click the Clear button.

This procedure clears the error code from special data register D8005 (general error code), and the error is cleared from the PLC
Status dialog box.

Clear Button

Error Cleared

14-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N GSpecial Data Registers for Error Information
Two data registers are assigned to store information on errors.
D8005

General Error Code

D8006

User Program Execution Error Code

Example: This ladder program clears the error information using the error clear bit of special data register D8005.
Turn on M0 and turn on the upper bit of D8005.
The error information is cleared at the end of the ladder scan.

General Error Codes
The error code is stored in special data register D8005.
If '1' is stored in each bit of D8005, the corresponding error is occurring.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8005
Power failure
Watchdog timer error
Reserved
User program ROM sum check error
Timer/counter preset value sum check error
Reserved
Keep data sum check error
User program syntax error
User program writing error
System error
Reserved
Reserved
Memory cartridge program transfer error
User program execution error
SD memory card access error
Error information bits

Error clear bit

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-3

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
SmartAXIS Operating Status, Output, and ERR LED during Errors
OperatingStatus

Output

ERR LEDPower failure

Stop

OFF

OFF

Any time

Watchdog timer error

Stop

OFF

ON

Any time

User program ROM sum check error

Stop

OFF

ON

Starting operation

TIM/CNT preset value sum check error

Maintained

MaintainedON

When checking a change intimer/counter settings

Keep data error

Maintained/
Stop *1

Maintained/OFF *1

OFFTurning power onUser program syntax error

Stop

OFF

ON

Downloading user program

User program writing error

Stop

OFF

ON

Downloading user program

System error

Stop

OFF

ON

Turning power on

Memory cartridge program transfer error

Stop

OFF

ON

Turning power onUser program execution error

Maintained

Maintained

ON

Executing user program

SD memory card access error

Maintained

MaintainedON

When an SD memory card isinsertedError Items

Checked at*1:

Operation starts to run and outputs are turned on or off according to the user program as default, but it is also possible to stop operation andturn off outputs using the Function Area Settings on WindLDR. See "Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error" on page 5-5.

*2:

The SmartAXIS Pro has no error status LED.

Error Causes and Actions
0001h: Power FailureThis error indicates when the power supply is lower than the specified voltage. This error is also recorded when the power isturned off. Clear the error code using WindLDR.
0002h: Watchdog Timer Error
The watchdog timer monitors the time required for one program cycle (scan time). When the time exceeds the allowed time, thewatchdog timer indicates an error. Clear the error code using WindLDR. If this error occurs frequently, the SmartAXIS has to be
replaced.
0008h: User Program ROM Sum Check Error
The user program stored in the SmartAXIS ROM is corrupted. Download a correct user program to the SmartAXIS, and clear theerror code using WindLDR.
When a memory cartridge is installed on the SmartAXIS, the user program in the memory cartridge is checked.
0010h: Timer/Counter Preset Value Sum Check Error
The execution data of timer/counter preset values is corrupted. The timer/counter preset values are initialized to the values of theuser program automatically. Note that changed preset values are cleared and that the original values are restored. Clear the error
code using WindLDR.
0040h: Keep Data Sum Check Error
This error indicates that the data designated to be maintained during power failure is corrupted because of memory backup failure.
Note that the “keep” data of internal relays and shift registers are cleared. Data of counters and data registers are also cleared.
Clear the error code using WindLDR.
If this error occurs in a short period of power interruption after the battery has been charged as specified, the battery is defective
and the SmartAXIS has to be replaced.
0080h: User Program Syntax Error
This error indicates that the user program has a syntax error. Correct the user program, and download the corrected user program
to the SmartAXIS. The error code is cleared when a correct user program is transferred.
0100h: User Program Writing Error
This error indicates a failure of writing into the SmartAXIS ROM when downloading a user program. The error code is cleared whenwriting into the ROM is completed successfully. If this error occurs frequently, the SmartAXIS has to be replaced.
When a memory cartridge is installed on the SmartAXIS, writing into the memory cartridge is checked.

14-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
0200h: System Error
This error is issued when ROM is not found. When this error occurred, turn power off and on. Clear the error code using WindLDR.
If this error occurs frequently, the SmartAXIS has to be replaced.
1000h: Memory Cartridge Program Transfer Error
This error indicates that the user program cannot be downloaded to/uploaded from SmartAXIS using the memory cartridge. The
memory cartridge program transfer fails when one of the following conditions is met: When the user program in the SmartAXIS is password-protected and the password of the user program in the memory cartridge does notmatch. Configure the correct password to the user program in the memory cartridge. For details on entering the password, see "User
Program Protection" on page 5-64.
 When uploading the user program from the SmartAXIS is prohibited. Upload cannot be executed.

2000h: User Program Execution Error
This error indicates that invalid data is found during execution of a user program. When this error occurs, special internal relay
M8004 (user program execution error) is turned on.
Referring to the next page to fix and clear the error code.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-5

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N GUser Program Execution Error
This error indicates that invalid data is found during execution of a user program. When this error occurs, the ERR LED and special
internal relay M8004 (user program execution error) turned on. The detailed information of this error can be viewed from the error
code stored in special data register D8006 (user program execution error code).
User Program
Execution Error Code
(D8006)14-6

Error Details

1

Source/destination device exceeds range.

2

MUL result exceeds data type range.

3

DIV result exceeds data type range, or division by 0.

4

BCDLS has S1 or S1+1 exceeding 9999.

5

S1 is 10,000 or higher in the HTOB(W) instruction, or S1 is 100,000,000 or higher in the HTOB(D) instruction.

6

BTOH has any digit of S1 exceeding 9.

7

HTOA/ATOH/BTOA/ATOB has quantity of digits to convert out of range.

8

ATOH/ATOB has non-ASCII data for S1 through S1+4.

9

In the WEEK instruction, the ON time data exceeds range (hour data is 24 or higher, minute data is 60 or higher),or the OFF time data exceeds range (hour data is 25 or higher, minute data is 60 or higher).

10

In the YEAR instruction, the month and day data exceeds range (month data is 13 or higher, day data is 32 or
higher).

12

CVXTY/CVYTX is executed without matching XYFS.
XYFS and CVXTY/CVYTX have the same S1, but have different data types.

13

CVXTY/CVYTX has S2 exceeding the value specified in XYFS.

14

Label in LJMP, LCAL, or DJNZ is not found.

18

Attempt was made to execute an instruction that cannot be used in an interrupt program:
SOTU, SOTD, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, CNT, CDP, CUD, SFR, SFRN, WEEK, YEAR, MSG, TXD, RXD, DI, EI, XYFS,CVXTY, CVYTX, AVRG, PULS, PWM, RAMP, ZRN, ARAMP, DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS, TTIM, FIFOF, NDSRL, HOUR,
ETXD, ERXD, DLOG, and TRACE (see "Ladder Program Instructions List" on page 8-1).

19

Attempt was made to execute an instruction that is not available for the PLC.

20

PULS, PWM, RAMP, ZRN, or ARAMP has an invalid value in control registers.

21

DECO has S1 exceeding 255.

22

BCNT has S2 exceeding 256.

23

ICMP>= has S1 < S3.

25

BCDLS has S2 exceeding 7.

26

DI or EI is executed when interrupt input or timer interrupt is not programmed in the Function Area Settings.

27

Work area is broken when using DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS, or TTIM.

28

S1 for trigonometric function instruction is invalid.

29

Result of F (float) data type instruction exceeds the data type range.

30

The number of bits configured in the SFTL/SFTR instruction or SFR FB exceeds the valid range.

31

In the FIFOF instruction, the FIEX instruction or the FOEX instruction was executed before the FIFO data file wasregistered.

32

TADD, TSUB, HOUR, or HTOS has invalid data for source device S1 or HOUR FB has invalid data for the Preset
value.

34

NDSRC has invalid data for source device S3.

35

In the SUM instruction, the execution result exceeds the valid range for the selected data type, or S2 data is 0.

36

DLOG/TRACE is executed but the capacity of CSV file exceeds 5 MB.

41

SD memory card is write protected.

42

The result of execution using the SCRPT instruction/FB is a value that indicates anything other than normal
completion.

43

The minimum value is greater than the maximum value in RCMP FB.

44

The shift registers specified by the start shift register and the number of bits in SFR FB does not exist.

45

In RPULS FB, the minimum value of ON time is greater than the maximum value of ON time, or the maximum
value of ON time is greater than the cycle time.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagrams
When one of the following problems is encountered, see the following trouble shooting diagrams:
ProblemTroubleshooting
Diagram

The power is not on.

Diagram 1

Operation has not started.

Diagram 2

An error has occurred.

Diagram 3

Input does not operate normally.

Diagram 4

Output does not operate normally.

Diagram 5

Communication between WindLDR on a computer and the SmartAXIS is not possible.

Diagram 6

Cannot stop or reset operation.

Diagram 7

Watchdog timer error occurs and the CPU does not run.

Diagram 8

The interrupt/catch input cannot receive short pulses.

Diagram 9

Frequency measurement does not work.

Diagram 10

Data is not transmitted at all in the user communication mode. (24-, 40-, 48-I/O types only)

Diagram 11

Data is not transmitted correctly in the user communication mode. (24-, 40-, 48-I/O types only)

Diagram 12

Data is not received at all in the user communication mode. (24-, 40-, 48-I/O types only)

Diagram 13

Data is not received correctly in the user communication mode. (24-, 40-, 48-I/O types only)

Diagram 14

Modbus master communication does not work. (24-, 40-, 48-I/O types only)

Diagram 15

Long communication cycle for Modbus RTU master communication or Modbus TCP client communication.
(24-, 40-, 48-I/O types only)

Diagram 16

WindLDR and the SmartAXIS cannot communicate.

Diagram 17

WindLDR does not communicate with PLC via USB.

Diagram 18

Modbus master communication request is slow.

Diagram 19

Remote I/O Communication is not possible between the Remote I/O master and slaves.

Diagram 20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-7

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 1SmartAXIS Lite - The Power/Run Status LED (PWR/RUN) is not On or Flashing
The SmartAXIS Lite power/run status LED (PWR/RUN) is on while running and flashes while stopped.
The power/run status LED is
not on or flashing.

Is power supplied?

NO

Supply power.

YESNO

Is the power voltage correct?

Is the power/
run status LED
on or flashing?

YES

Supply the rated voltage.
AC power type:100-240V AC
DC power type:
24V DC

NO

YES

NO

Is the power/
run status LED
on or flashing?

Call IDEC for assistance.

14-8

YES

END

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N GSmartAXIS Pro - The Backlight is not On

The Backlight is not On.

Is power supplied?

NO

Supply power.

YESNO

Is the power voltage correct?

Is the LCD backlight on?

YES

Supply the rated voltage.
AC power type:100-240V AC
DC power type:
24V DC

NO

YES

NO

Is the LCD backlight on?

Call IDEC for assistance.

YES

END

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-9

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 2SmartAXIS Lite - The Power/Run Status LED (PWR/RUN) is not On
The SmartAXIS Lite power/run status LED (PWR/RUN) is on while running and flashes while stopped.
The power/run
status LED is not on.

YES

Is the error status LED on?

See Troubleshooting Diagram 3,“SmartAXIS Lite - The Error Status LED (ERR) is On”

NO
Click the Start button in WindLDR on acomputer connected to the SmartAXIS.

Is the power/
run status LED on?

Note: The Start button is found in the WindLDR menu bar.

YES

NO
Note: To monitor M8000, from the WindLDR menu bar, select Online >Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Custom > New Custom Monitor. Enter
M8000 in the Device box in the Custom Monitor dialog box.

Monitor M8000 (start control special
internal relay) using WindLDR.

YES

Note: To turn on M8000, enter 1 in the Current Value box in the
Custom Monitor dialog box.

Is M8000 on?

NO
Turn on M8000 using WindLDR.

NOIs the power/
run status LED on?

YES

Is stop or reset input
designated using Function Area
Settings?

YES
NO
Turn off the stop and reset inputs.

Is the power/
run status LED on?

YES

NO

Call IDEC for assistance.

14-10

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

END

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 3SmartAXIS Lite - The Error Status LED (ERR) is On

The error status LED is on.

Clear error codes using WindLDR.
See Note below.

YES

Did the error status LED turn off?

NO
END

See "General Error Codes" on page 14-3.
Identify the error code and correct the error.

Did the error status LED turn off?

YES

NO
END

Call IDEC for assistance.

Note: Temporary errors can be cleared to restore normal operation by clearing error codes from WindLDR. See "Clearing Error Codes fromWindLDR" on page 14-2.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-11

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 4

Input does not operate normally.

Is the input device on?

NO

YES
Note: Check the on state for the input with the
WindLDR monitor or the device monitor on the
SmartAXIS Pro LCD.
Are input device
addresses correct?

Is the input
wiring correct?

NO

NO

YES

Correct the program.

Correct the input wiring.

YES

Is the input terminal
powered correctly?

NO

Supply the rated voltage to the input
terminal.

Are wiring andoperation of external
devices correct?

NO

Correct the external
device wiring.

YES
END

Call IDEC for assistance.

14-12

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

YES

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 5

Output does not operate normally.

Note: The Start button is found in the
WindLDR menu bar.
SmartAXIS Lite:
Is the power/run status LED on?
SmartAXIS Pro:Is the LCD backlight on?

NO

Click the Start button in WindLDR on acomputer connected to the SmartAXIS.

YES

SmartAXIS Lite: Check the output with WindLDR.
SmartAXIS Pro: Check the output with WindLDR
or the device monitor.

Are output device
addresses correct?

NO

Correct the program.

YES

Does the monitored output
turn on and off?

NO

The output circuit in the SmartAXIS isdamaged.
Replace the SmartAXIS.

YESIs the SmartAXIS output
connection correct?

NO

Correctly connect the output.

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

END

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-13

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 6

Communication between WindLDR on a computer andthe SmartAXIS is not possible.

Is the computer link cableconnected correctly?

NO

Connect the cable completely.

YES
Note: The Start button is found in the
WindLDR menu bar.
SmartAXIS Lite:
Is the power/run status LED on?
SmartAXIS Pro:Is the LCD backlight on?

NO

Click the Start button in WindLDR on acomputer connected to the SmartAXIS.

NO

Correct the Communication Settings
using WindLDR.

YES

Are theCommunication Settings correct?

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

When only program download is not possible:

Only program download is not possible.

Is “Protect User Program”
enabled?

YES

Disable the user program protection.
For details, see "32-bit Data Storage
Setting" on page 5-62.

NO

Call IDEC for assistance.

14-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 7

Cannot stop or reset operation.

Is stop or
reset input designated in
the WindLDR Function Area
Settings?

Note: To monitor M8000, from the WindLDR menu bar, selectOnline > Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Custom > New
Custom Monitor. Enter M8000 in the Device box in the Custom
Monitor dialog box.

NO

Monitor the start control special internal
relay M8000 using WindLDR on acomputer.

YES

Is the designated stop or
reset input on?

NO

Turn on the designated input.

YES

Monitor the designated stop or reset
input using WindLDR on a computer.

Does the monitored input
turn on and off?

NO

The input circuit in the SmartAXIS isdamaged.
Replace the SmartAXIS.

YES
YES

Is M8000 off?

NO

Turn off the start control special internal
relay M8000 using WindLDR on acomputer.

Call IDEC for assistance.

Note: To turn off M8000, enter 0 in the Current Value box in the
Custom Monitor dialog box.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-15

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 8

Watchdog timer error occurs andthe SmartAXIS does not run.

Did you create a program
where the scan time exceeds the time
configured for the watchdog
timer? *1

YES

NOP instruction can reset the watchdog timer.
Insert a NOP instruction into the ladder diagram
so the time configured for the watchdog timer is
not exceeded. For FBD, the watchdog timer
cannot be reset in the program.

NO

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 See "Watchdog Timer Setting" on page 5-67.

Troubleshooting Diagram 9

The interrupt/catch input
cannot receive short pulses.

Are the input ON/OFF
voltage levels correct?

NO

Make sure of correct input voltage.
ON voltage:

15V DC minimum

OFF voltage:

5V DC maximum

YES

END

Call IDEC for assistance.

14-16

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 10

Frequency measurement does notwork.

Are signals being input
to group 1 to 4 (12-I/O type)or group 1 to 6 (24-, 40-,
48-I/O type)?

NO

Make sure that input signals are connected tocorrect terminals.

NO

Select Single-phase High-speed Counter in theGroups 1 through 4.

YES

Are the Function Area
Settings completed? *1

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.
*1 See "Frequency Measurement" on page 5-36.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-17

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 11

Data is not transmitted at allin the user communication mode.

Is thecommunication cableconnected correctly?

NO

Make sure of correct wiring.

YES

Is the input to the
TXD instruction on?

NO

Turn on the input to the TXD instruction.

YES

SmartAXIS Lite:
Is the power/run status LED on?
SmartAXIS Pro:Is the LCD backlight on?

NO

SmartAXIS Lite: When the power/run status LED is
not on*1
SmartAXIS Pro: When the LCD backlight is not on *1

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 "SmartAXIS Pro - The Backlight is not On" on page 14-9 or "SmartAXIS Lite - The Power/Run Status LED (PWR/RUN) is not On" on page 14-10.

14-18

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 12

Data is not transmitted correctlyin the user communication mode.

Are communication
parameters set correctly
using WindLDR?

NO

Set the communication parameters to match those of
the remote terminal using WindLDR*1.

YES

Correct the program to replace the duplicate dataregister with a different data register.

YES

Correct the program to make sure that inputs tomore than 5 TXD instructions do not go on
simultaneously.

NO

Make sure that the busy signal at the remoteterminal does not exceed 5 sec.

NO

Make sure that the transmit data designated assource 1 device is correct.

YES

Is the data register
designated as transmit
status used repeatedly?

NO

Are inputs tomore than 5 TXD instructions on
simultaneously?

NO

Is duration of the busy
signal at the remote terminal
less than 5 sec?

YES

Did you makesure of source 1 device of the TXD
instruction?

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 See "Programming WindLDR" on page 10-4.

If the user communication still has a problem after completing the above procedure, also perform the procedure of
Diagram 11, described on the preceding page.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-19

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 13

Data is not received at allin the user communication mode.

Is thecommunication cableconnected correctly?

NO

Make sure of correct wiring.

YES

Is the input to the
RXD instruction on?

NO

Turn on the input to the RXD instruction.

YES

SmartAXIS Lite:
Is the power/run status LED on?
SmartAXIS Pro:Is the LCD backlight on?

NO

SmartAXIS Lite: When the power/run status LED is
not onSmartAXIS Pro: When the LCD backlight is not on *1

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 See "SmartAXIS Pro - The Backlight is not On" on page 14-9 or "SmartAXIS Lite - The Power/Run Status LED (PWR/RUN) is not On" on page 1410.

14-20

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 14
Data is not received correctlyin the user communication mode.

Are communication
parameters set correctly using
WindLDR?

NO

Set the communication parameters tomatch those of the remote terminal using
WindLDR. SmartAXIS can use constants
only for start and stop delimiters. *1

YES
Is the data register
designated as receive status used
repeatedly?

YES

Correct the program to replace theduplicate data register with a different
data register.

NO
Is a start delimiter
specified in the RXD
instruction?

NO
Is one input
used to start multiple RXD
instructions?

YES
Correct the program to make surethat inputs to more than 5 RXD
instructions do not go on
simultaneously.

YES

YES

Are inputs tomore than 5 RXD instructions on
simultaneously?

Use one input to start one RXD
instruction without a start delimiter.

NO

Did you checkthe start delimiter of incoming data?

NONO

Make sure that the start delimiter in the
RXD instruction matches that of theincoming data.

NO

Make sure that the receive format of the
RXD instruction matches that of theincoming data.

NO

Make sure that the end delimiter in the
RXD instruction matches that of theincoming data.

NO

Make sure that the receive timeout value
is larger than character intervals of theincoming data.

YES
Did you checkthe format of incoming
data?

YES
NO

Is an end delimiter
specified in the RXD
instruction?

YES
Did you checkthe end delimiter ofincoming data?

YES
Is the receive
timeout value set correctly
using WindLDR?

YES
Call IDEC for assistance.
*1 See "Programming WindLDR" on page 10-4.

If the user communication still has a problem after completing the above procedure, also perform the procedure of
Diagram 13 described on the preceding page.
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-21

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 15
Modbus RTU mastercommunication does not work.

Are communication
parameters equal at master andslave?

NO

Confirm communication settings using
WindLDR (see "Programming Modbus
Master Using WindLDR" on page 11-4.)

YES
When the communication
error status is configured, is the error
information stored? *1

YES

NO
YES

Confirm the slave number (high-orderbyte) and error code (low-order byte) *1.

Set to use a request
execution device and the device
is not turned on.

NO
Make sure that slave address settings arecorrect.

Is it clear which
request has an error?

YESNO
See the request table to find which request
has an error and what error occurred (see"Communication Error Data of Each
Request" on page 11-3).

Turn on the request execution device.

01h (function error)?

YES

Make sure that the slave is compatible
with the function code.

YES

Make sure of the valid slave address
range and master settings.

NO

02h (access destination error)?

NO
03h (device
quantity error, 1-bit write
data error)?

YES

NO

16h (timeout error)?

NO
Confirm slave settings again.
*1 See "Communication Error Data" on page 11-3.

14-22

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

YES

Data size and actual data may not
match. Make sure that slave settingsand hardware are correct (without noise
and failure).

Make sure that the slave number andcommunication settings are correct.

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 16Long communication cycle for Modbus RTU mastercommunication or Modbus TCP client communication.

Configure a request execution device and assign
a data register or internal relay.

Turn off the request execution devices for communication
requests that do not require constant execution and turn on
the devices only when they are used.

END

Troubleshooting Diagram 17
WindLDR and the SmartAXIS
cannot communicate.

Is the USB interface
cable connected?

NO

Connect the cable.

YES

SmartAXIS Lite:
Is the power/run status LED on?
SmartAXIS Pro: Is the LCD
backlight on?

NO

SmartAXIS Lite: When the power/run
status LED is not on
SmartAXIS Pro: When the LCD backlight is
not on *1

YES

Are the WindLDR
communication
settings correct?

NO

Set the correct communication settings.

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.
*1 See "SmartAXIS Pro - The Backlight is not On" on page 14-9 or "SmartAXIS Lite - The Power/Run Status LED (PWR/RUN) is not On" on page 1410.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-23

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 18
WindLDR does not communicate
with PLC via USB.

Is a communication
error displayed when monitoring isstarted on WindLDR?

Carry out steps 1 and 2 below and try again.

YES

Step 2: Check communication settings
Open the Communication Settings dialog box
in WindLDR. Select USB and uncheck the Use
HGxG Pass-Through check box.

NO

Is "IDEC PLC USB
Port (COMx)" listed in Device
Manager on the PC?*

Step 1: Check the cabling
Disconnect and reconnect the USB cableconnecting the computer and the PLC.
If the computer and the PLC are connected
via a USB hub, connect the computer and
the PLC directly using a single USB cable.

NO

The USB port of the connected SmartAXIS is
not recognized.
Install or update the driver, and then try
again.

YES
Is error message“Unable to open the COM”
displayed when WindLDR starts
monitoring?

YES

NO

*Confirmation procedure:
1. Right-click on My Computer and selectProperties.
2. In the System Properties dialog box,
select the Hardware tab, and click Device
Manager.
3. All available communication ports are
displayed under Ports (COM & LPT).

Restart the computer and try again.

Is the problem solved?

Terminate the Pass-Through Tool, WindO/INV2, and other applications that may use
COM port, and then try again.

YES

NO
Replace the USB cable and try again.

Is the problem solved?

YES

NO
Call IDEC for assistance.

14-24

END

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 19

Modbus master communication
request is slow.

Select to use request execution internal
relay and designate an internal relay
number.

Keep unnecessary internal relays turned off
and turn on internal relays only whensending requests.

END

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

14-25

14: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 20
Remote I/O communication is not possible
between the remote I/O master and slaves.

Is the LAN cableconnected to the SmartAXIS that will perform
remote I/O
communication?

NO

Connect the LAN cable properly.

YES

Is Communication
Timeout Error occurring at the
remote I/O master?

YES

Set the remote I/O master communication
timeout time to a longer value.

For how to configure the timeout setting,see "Remote I/O Master" on page 12-2.

NO

Is the problem solved?

YES

NO

Are the network settings ofthe remote I/O master correct?

NO

Configure the network settings of theremote I/O master and specify a valid IP
address and subnet mask.*1

For how to configure the network setting,see "Remote I/O Master" on page 12-2.

YES

Is the problem solved?

YES

NO

Is Remote I/O Masterselected in the connection settings forthe remote I/O master?

NO

Select Remote I/O Master in theconnection settings of the remote I/O master.

For how to configure the connection setting,see "Remote I/O Master" on page 12-2.

Is the problem solved?

YES

YES
NO

Are the network settings ofthe remote I/O slaves correct?

NO

Configure the network settings of theremote I/O slaves and specify valid IP
addresses and subnet mask.*1

For how to configure the network setting,see "Remote I/O Master" on page 12-2.

YES

Is the problem solved?

YES

NO

Are the remote host settings,
IP address and port number, for the
remote I/O slaves configured in
the remote I/O master correct?

Configure the correct remote host settings in the
remote I/O master for the remote I/O slaves.
NO

For how to configure these settings, see"Remote I/O Master" on page 12-2 and"Remote I/O Slave" on page 12-8.

YESIs Master IP Addressconfigured in the remote I/O slaves correct?

Is the problem solved?

YES

NO

NO

Specify the IP address of the remote I/O
master as the Master IP Address in the
remote I/O slave.

For how to configure the setting, see"Remote I/O Master" on page 12-2.

YES

Is the problem solved?

YES

NO

END

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 Use valid network settings, IP address, subnet mask, and port number, for the remote I/O communication. For the valid network settings for the
SmartAXIS, contact the network administrator.

14-26

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
System Software
Getting the Latest Version of the System Software
When you install or upgrade to the latest version of Automation Organizer, the latest system software is also available along withthe software.

Checking the Version
You can check the SmartAXIS system software version with the following steps.
1. Connect the computer to the SmartAXIS USB port with the USB maintenance cable (HG9Z-XCM42).
2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Start Monitor.

WindLDR enters monitor mode.

3. Select Online > PLC > Status.

The PLC Status dialog box is displayed.

You can check the SmartAXIS system software version with System Software Version.
Note: SmartAXIS system software downloads can be executed from WindLDR.
For how to download the system software, see "Upgrade SmartAXIS System Software" on page A-2.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Appendix-1

A P P EN DI X
Upgrade SmartAXIS System Software
The system software of SmartAXIS can be upgraded using WindLDR. If the system software of your SmartAXIS is old, upgrade thesystem software with the following procedure:
1. Connect the SmartAXIS to the computer where WindLDR is installed using USB maintenance cable (recommended cable:

HG9Z-XCM42).

Note: System software cannot be downloaded via the expansion communication ports or the Ethernet port.

2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Download > System Software Download.

The System Software Download dialog box appears.
3. Select the PLC type and the system software version to download, and then click Start System Software Download.

The latest version is indicated as default.
Older versions are also available.

Details of upgrades are indicated.

Notes:
 If the SmartAXIS is running, it is stopped automatically before the system software download starts.
 Older system software can also be downloaded to the SmartAXIS if required.
 The system software download takes about one minute.

Appendix-2

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
4. A confirmation message is displayed. Click OK to start downloading the system software.

5. System software download status is shown by a progress bar. A completion message appears when the system software has

been downloaded successfully. Click OK to close the System Software Download dialog box.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Appendix-3

A P P EN DI X
Notes:
 For the SmartAXIS Pro, its backlight will flash while the system software is downloading. For the SmartAXIS Lite, its error status LED will

flash.
 After the system software has downloaded, the SmartAXIS will be in the STOP state. Start the SmartAXIS with WindLDR or the SmartAXIS

Pro LCD/operation switches.
 The user program stored in the SmartAXIS before downloading the system software remains and is executed when the SmartAXIS isrestarted. A user program execution error may occur if an older system software is downloaded to the SmartAXIS.
 If the system software download fails, the backlight on the SmartAXIS Pro will remain flashing or the error status LED on the SmartAXIS Lite

will remain flashing. In this situation, turn on the SmartAXIS power again and redo the download from step 1. If the SmartAXIS Pro backlightis still flashing or the SmartAXIS Lite error status LED is still flashing even after turning on the power again, the communication error dialog
box is displayed before step 4.

1. A communication error dialog box is displayed. Click Cancel.

2. A dialog box prompting you to check the status of the SmartAXIS is displayed. Click Yes.

Appendix-4

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
CablesCommunication cables and their connector pinouts are described in this section.
Communication Port and Applicable Cables
Communication Port

Expansion Communication Port 2
Expansion Communication Port 3

Communication Cartridge

Applicable Cable

RS232C communication cartridge
FT1A-PC1 (Mini-DIN type)

FC2A-KC4C
FC2A-KP1C
HG9Z-XC295
FC4A-KC1C
FC4A-KC2C

RS485 communication cartridge
FT1A-PC2 (Mini-DIN type)

FC2A-KP1C

RS485 communication cartridge
FT1A-PC3 (Terminal block type)

Twisted-pair shielded cable with a minimum core wire of
0.3mm2 (Conductor resistance 85Ω/km maximum, shieldresistance 20Ω/km maximum)

Computer Link Cable 4C (FC2A-KC4C)
Cable Length: 3m (9.84 feet)To Computer

To SmartAXIS

Mini DIN Connector Pinouts
Description
ShieldD-sub 9-pin Female Connector Pinouts
Pin

Pin

Cover

Cover

FG

Description
Frame Ground

TXD

Transmit Data

3

3

TXD

Transmit Data

RXD

Receive Data

4

2

RXD

Receive Data

RTS

Request to Send

1

6

DSR

Data Set ReadyNC

No Connection

8

8

CTS

Clear to Send

DSR

Data Set Ready

5

1

DCD

Data Carrier Detect

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

2

4

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

SG

Signal Ground

7

5

SG

Signal GroundSG

Signal Ground

6

7

NC

No Connection

9NC

No Connection

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Appendix-5

A P P EN DI X
User Communication Cable 1C (FC2A-KP1C)
Cable Length: 2.5m (8.2 feet)

6

3
1
4

7

2

8

5

Mini DIN Connector Pinouts
Pin

Signal line (RS232C)

Signal line (RS485)

AWG#

1

RTS

Request to Send

B

28

2

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

A

28

3

TXD

Transmit Data

NC

Color

TwistedYellow

No Connection

28

Blue

4

RXD

Receive DataNC

No Connection

28

Green

5

DSR

Data Set ReadyNC

No Connection

28

Brown

6

SG

Signal GroundNC

No Connection

28

Gray

7

SG

Signal GroundSG

Signal Ground

26

8

NC

No ConnectionNC

No Connection

26

Cover

—

CautionTwisted——Signal Direction

Black

Red
White
Shield Do not connect any wiring to NC terminals, otherwise operation failure or device damage may be caused.

O/I Communication Cable (HG9Z-XC295)
Cable Length: 5m (16.4 feet)To HG2G-5F, 3G/4G
To SmartAXIS

D-sub 9-pin Female Connector Pinouts

Appendix-6

Description

Pin

RS

1

Mini DIN Connector Pinouts
Pin

Description

ER

2

SD

3

2

RD

RD

4

3

SD

DR

5

SG

6

5

SG

SG

7

7

RS

NC

8

8

CS

Shield

Cover

Cover

ShieldS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
O/I Communication Cable 1C (FC4A-KC1C)
Cable Length: 5m (16.4 feet)To HG1F

To SmartAXIS

Mini DIN Connector Pinouts

D-sub 9-pin Male Connector Pinouts

Description

Pin

Pin

NC

No Connection

1

1

FG

NC

No Connection

2

2

TXD1

Transmit Data 1

TXD

Transmit Data

3

3

RXD1

Receive Data 1

RXD

Receive Data

4

4

TXD2

Transmit Data 2

NC

No Connection

5

5

RXD2

Receive Data 2

SG

Signal Ground

6

6

DSR

Data Set Ready

SG

Signal Ground

7

7

SG

Signal GroundNC

No Connection

8

8

NC

No Connection

Cover

9

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

ShieldDescription
Frame Ground

O/I Communication Cable 2C (FC4A-KC2C)
Cable Length: 5m (16.4 feet)To HG2F/3F/4F
To SmartAXIS

Mini DIN Connector Pinouts

D-sub 25-pin Male Connector Pinouts

Description

Pin

Pin

NC

No Connection

1

1

FG

Frame GroundNC

No Connection

2

2

TXD

Transmit Data

TXD

Transmit Data

3

3

RXD

Receive Data

RXD

Receive Data

4

4

RTS

Request to Send

NC

No Connection

5

5

CTS

Clear to Send

CMSW

Communication Switch

6

6

DSR

Data Set Ready

SG

Signal Ground

7

7

SG

Signal GroundNC

No Connection

8

8

DCD

Data Carrier Detect

Cover

20

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

ShieldS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Description

Appendix-7

A P P EN DI X
HMI Screen Transition Diagram
System menu overall transition diagram
Message withthe highest
priority

Stopped+2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status

I 0000 ,I 0010 ,I 0020 ,I 0030 ,External Memory

Configurations

Device Monitor

Program Monitor

Status Monitor

Error Status

01234567
01234567
01234567
012345Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
I 0000 , 01234567
I 0010 , 01234567
I 0020 , 01234567
I 0030 , 012345
Last Monitored Line
Go To...

System Version:
1.00
Run/Stop Status:
StoppedGeneral Error: 3
Execution Error: 0
Clear Error

Stopped2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

Stopping the SmartAXIS

Appendix-8…

Memory Cartridge
SD Card

Running the SmartAXIS

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations…

T/C Preset Values

Switching run/stop

Do you want tostop PLC?
No
Yes

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor

2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40

Edit Program

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Program Monitor+

Running

Running
2012/OCT/10/WED
13:30:40
S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

R
R
R
R

000 , 01234567
010 , 01234567
020 , 01234567
030 , 01234567

A P P EN DI X
Writing/Clearing TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values) in the User Program
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

T/C Preset Values

T/C Change Status:
T/C is changed
Clear
Comfirm

Uploading/Downloading the User Program
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Memory Cartridge
SD Card

PLC -> Cartridge
Cartridge -> PLC

PLC -> Cartridge
Cartridge -> PLC

Stopping Access to the SD Memory Card/Formatting the SD Memory Card
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Memory Cartridge
SD Card

Stop Access
FormatDo you want to stop
SD card access?
No
Yes

Stop Access
FormatDo you want toformat SD card?
No
Yes

Communications
Message Settings

Slave Number

Configuring the Slave Number
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Port 2:0Port 3:0

Configuring the Network Settings
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Communications
Message Settings

Slave Number
Network Settings

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway:
0. 0. 0. 0

Network Settings
DHCP: OFFIP Address:
192.168. 1. 5

Network Settings
DHCP: OFFIP Address:
192.168. 1. 5

Slave Number
Network Settings

Modifying the Scroll Speed/Configuring the Scroll Unit
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Communications
Message Settings

Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-character

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-character

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Appendix-9

A P P EN DI X
Configuring the Blinking Speed
Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Communications
Message Settings

Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

Blink Speed:
500 msScroll Settings
Blink Settings

Setting the Calender/ClockRun
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

2012/10/100
13: 30: 40

Changing the Menu Language
Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Menu Languages:
Japanese

Setting the LCD Backlight ON Time
Backlight ON time:00010 sFunction
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Monitoring Device Values
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status

I
I
I
I

010 ,
020 ,
030 ,
040 ,

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

Q
Q
Q
Q

000 ,
010 ,
020 ,
030 ,

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

T 0000 ,T 0010 ,T 0020 ,T 0030 ,01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

CC
CC
CC
CC

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

C
C
C
C

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

TP
TP
TP
TP

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

TC
TC
TC
TC

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

CP
CP
CP
CP

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

D
D
D
D

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

D
D
D
D

8000:
8001:
8002:
8003:

0
0
0
0

M 0000 ,M 0010 ,M 0020 ,M 0030 ,01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

R
R
R
R

000 ,
010 ,
020 ,
030 ,

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

M 8000 ,M 8010 ,M 8020 ,M 8030 ,01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

Monitoring the User Program
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status

Last Monitored Line
Go To...

9
I0000

SOTU

M0000

M0001

10
M0002

M0003

M0004

When FBD program is selected as the programming language, Program Monitor and the System Menu items under it are notdisplayed.
Appendix-10

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
Monitoring the SmartAXIS Status
System Version:
1.00
Run/Stop Status:
Running

Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status

Scan Time:
Current:
2 ms
Maximum:
4 ms
Minimum:
2 ms

Protection Status:
Read Program:
Prohibited

When the SmartAXIS is stopped: Stopped
MAC Address:**-**-**-**-**-**

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway:
0. 0. 0. 0

Network Settings
DHCP: OFFIP Address:
192.168. 1. 5Protection Status:
Write Program:
Password Protected

Checking/clearing error information
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status
Error!
PLC is stopped.
Press OK button for
more details.

General Error: 3
Execution Error: 0
Clear Error(Press and hold)General Error: 3
Execution Error: 0
Clear Error

General Error: 3Power failure
Watchdog Timer

Error!
PLC is running.
Press OK button for
more details.

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Appendix-11

A P P EN DI X
Type List
SmartAXIS Pro / Lite

Type

Power
Voltage

24V DCPro

100-240V AC
50/60Hz

24V DC

Lite

100-240V AC
50/60HzI/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)

Input Type
DigitalInput

Analog
Input(Note)

Output Type
Relay
Output(10A)

12 points (8/4)

6

2

—

24 points (16/8)

12

4

4

40 points (24/16)

18

6

48 points (30/18)

22

12 points (8/4)

824 points (16/8)

1640 points (24/16)

24

8

6

2

24 points (16/8)

12

4

48 points (30/18)

22

12 points (8/4)

824 points (16/8)

1640 points (24/16)

24
30

—

4

12 points (8/4)

18

8

—

30

40 points (24/16)

4—Transistor
Output
—

4

—
4

6
8

4
8

—

—

FT1A-H40RKA
FT1A-H40RSA

18 (Sink)

FT1A-H48KA

18 (Source)

4

4

—

Note: Shared with digital inputs

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL—

FT1A-H24RC
FT1A-H40RC

18 (Sink)
18 (Source)—

FT1A-H48KC
FT1A-H48SC
FT1A-B12RA
FT1A-B24RA

4 (Sink)

FT1A-B40RKA

4 (Source)

FT1A-B40RSA

18 (Sink)

FT1A-B48KA

18 (Source)

FT1A-B48SA
FT1A-B12RC

—

12
—

FT1A-H48SAFT1A-H12RC——

FT1A-H12RA
FT1A-H24RA

4 (Sink)

12—

Type No.

4 (Source)—

48 points (30/18)

48 points (30/18)

Appendix-12

Relay
Output(2A)

FT1A-B24RC
FT1A-B40RC

18 (Sink)

FT1A-B48KC

18 (Source)

FT1A-B48SCA P P EN DI X
Options
Name

Description/specification
Japanese

SmartAXIS
Pro/Lite
User’s Manual

SmartAXIS
Ladder Programming
ManualEnglishChinese (simplified)
GermanJapanese
EnglishChinese (simplified)
GermanSmartAXIS FBDProgramming Manual

Japanese

Application Software

Automation Organizer

Communication
Cartridge

EnglishType No.

Describes product specifications, installation and wiring
instructions, instructions for basic programming operations
and special functions, device and instruction lists,
communication functions, and troubleshooting proceduresfor the SmartAXIS Pro/Lite series.

FT9Y-B1377

Describes basic operations for ladder programming,
instructions for monitoring ladders on the SmartAXIS,
available devices and instruction lists, and details of each
instruction.

FT9Y-B1381

Describes basic operations for function block programming,
device and function block lists, and function block actions.

FT9Y-B1385

FT9Y-B1378
FT9Y-B1379
FT9Y-B1380
FT9Y-B1382
FT9Y-B1383
FT9Y-B1384
FT9Y-B1386
SW1A-W1C

Connection Specifications

Mini DIN

Standards

EIA RS232C

Maximum Baud Rate

115,200bps

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication, User communication, Modbus
RTU master/slave

Isolation between Internal
Circuit and Communication Port

Not isolatedConnection Specifications

Mini DIN

Standards

EIA RS485

Maximum Baud Rate

115,200bps

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication, User communication, Modbus
RTU master/slave

Isolation between Internal
Circuit and Communication Port

Not isolatedConnection Specifications

Terminal blockStandards

EIA RS485

Maximum Baud Rate

115,200bps

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication, User communication, Modbus
RTU master/slave

Isolation between Internal
Circuit and Communication Port

Not isolated

FT1A-PC1FT1A-PC2FT1A-PC3

End Clips

Used on DIN rail to fasten SmartAXIS modules(package quantity 10)

BNL6PN10

Direct Mounting Hook

Direct mounting hook for 12- and 24-I/O types for maintenance, 5 pcs.

FT9Z-PSP1PN05

SD Memory Card

Capacity: 2GB

HG9Z-XMS2

Memory Cartridge

Dedicated user program save memory

FT1A-PM1

USB maintenance cable
USB A male to USB mini-B male, 2m

HG9Z-XCM42

USB extension cable (for panel attachment)
USB mini-B female to USB mini-B male, 1m

HG9Z-XCM21

Maintenance CableS M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Appendix-13

A P P EN DI X
Fonts
This section describes the fonts that can be displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD.

Supported Languages
The SmartAXIS Pro is equipped with fonts for multiple languages as standard. Messages in the language selected with the MSG
instruction can be displayed on the LCD.
The menu can be displayed in English, Chinese, or Japanese, and messages can be displayed in a desired language out of thefollowing languages: German, English, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, French, Cyrillic, Chinese, and Japanese.

Installed Fonts List
Setting nameCharacter code system

Supported languages

European

ISO8859-1 (Latin-1)

English, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch (Note), French (Note)

Japanese

Shift-JIS

Japanese (level 1)

Chinese

GB2312Chinese (simplified)Cyrillic

ANSI1251

RussianNote: Some of the characters cannot be input.

Character Code Table
Using the Character Code Table
Example: Finding the character code for the character “a” in the table.
Upper 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)

Lower 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)

The upper 4 bits of the code are hexadecimal 6.
The lower 4 bits of the code are hexadecimal 1.
Therefore, the character code for "a" is as follows.

"a": 6 1
Lower 4 bits
Upper 4 bits
Note: For other fonts and two-byte characters, refer to the table of the relevant code system.

Appendix-14

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
European Font (ISO 8859-1)

Cyrillic Font (ANSI 1251)

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Appendix-15

A P P EN DI X
Japanese Font (JIS X0201)

Appendix-16

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X

S M AR TAX I S P R O / L I TE U SER ' S M ANUAL

Appendix-17

About the W arranty of the P roducts
1. Warranty Period
The Products are warranted for 3 years from the date of purchase, or from the date of delivery completion.
* Consumable/maintenance parts such as batteries and relays if the operation exceeds 100,000 times are excluded fromthe 3-year warranty.
2. Extent of Warranty
IDEC CORPORATION is responsible for failures or defects of the Products during the above warranty period, either areplacement part will be provided or the defective parts of the Products will be repaired free of charge. If such failure or
defects should occur, please offer them to the distributor, dealer or IDEC CORPORATION with the materials in which the dateof purchase is specified.
* The expenses for installation and construction at the time of repair will not be borne.
3. Indemnification
IDEC CORPORATION will not be liable under this Warranty and be indemnified and held harmless from any and all demands,
suits, expenses, claims, damages and liabilities in the following event that:
1) The Products are used or operated beyond the conditions or environment range as described in catalog, specifications
or instruction; or2) The failure or defects of the Products arise from the cause other than the Products; or3) The Products are improved, modified or altered by the party other than IDEC; or
4) The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from the usage of the Product in the way that is notintended; or5) The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from the cause beyond IDEC’s control including, but notlimited to, fire, earthquake, flood, lightning, other natural disasters, and acts of God; or6) The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from the relocation, transportation or drop after you
purchase the Products; or7) The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from improper installation; or
8) Maintenance and inspection are not carried out in accordance with instruction.
* Customers assume their own risk in programming products, Company will not be held liable for damages as a result of
improper programming.
IDEC CORPORATION DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND/OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARUSE OR PURPOSE, AS WELL AS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGESRELATING TO THE PRODUCTS
4. Extent of Service
The price of the Products will not include the fee for any service such as sending technicians and engineers, IDECCORPORATION will charge you the fee for the following:1) Instruction for installment and visiting for test operation, including, but not limited to creating application softwareand operation tests; and
2) Maintenance and inspection, arrangement and repair; and
3) Technical assistance and technical education; and
4) Product test and inspection based on you request.

Specifications and other descriptions in this manual are subject to change without notice.
Information in this manual is current as of July, 2024.
2021 IDEC Corporation, All Rights Reserved.
‴‟‣‥ ‪‚‪‛